Microchip DSPIC30F3013CT-30E/PT High-performance, 16-bit digital signal controller Datasheet

dsPIC30F3010/3011
Data Sheet
High-Performance, 16-Bit
Digital Signal Controllers
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70141E
Note the following details of the code protection feature on Microchip devices:
•
Microchip products meet the specification contained in their particular Microchip Data Sheet.
•
Microchip believes that its family of products is one of the most secure families of its kind on the market today, when used in the
intended manner and under normal conditions.
•
There are dishonest and possibly illegal methods used to breach the code protection feature. All of these methods, to our
knowledge, require using the Microchip products in a manner outside the operating specifications contained in Microchip’s Data
Sheets. Most likely, the person doing so is engaged in theft of intellectual property.
•
Microchip is willing to work with the customer who is concerned about the integrity of their code.
•
Neither Microchip nor any other semiconductor manufacturer can guarantee the security of their code. Code protection does not
mean that we are guaranteeing the product as “unbreakable.”
Code protection is constantly evolving. We at Microchip are committed to continuously improving the code protection features of our
products. Attempts to break Microchip’s code protection feature may be a violation of the Digital Millennium Copyright Act. If such acts
allow unauthorized access to your software or other copyrighted work, you may have a right to sue for relief under that Act.
Information contained in this publication regarding device
applications and the like is provided only for your convenience
and may be superseded by updates. It is your responsibility to
ensure that your application meets with your specifications.
MICROCHIP MAKES NO REPRESENTATIONS OR
WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND WHETHER EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, WRITTEN OR ORAL, STATUTORY OR
OTHERWISE, RELATED TO THE INFORMATION,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ITS CONDITION,
QUALITY, PERFORMANCE, MERCHANTABILITY OR
FITNESS FOR PURPOSE. Microchip disclaims all liability
arising from this information and its use. Use of Microchip
devices in life support and/or safety applications is entirely at
the buyer’s risk, and the buyer agrees to defend, indemnify and
hold harmless Microchip from any and all damages, claims,
suits, or expenses resulting from such use. No licenses are
conveyed, implicitly or otherwise, under any Microchip
intellectual property rights.
Trademarks
The Microchip name and logo, the Microchip logo, Accuron,
dsPIC, KEELOQ, KEELOQ logo, MPLAB, PIC, PICmicro,
PICSTART, PRO MATE, rfPIC and SmartShunt are registered
trademarks of Microchip Technology Incorporated in the
U.S.A. and other countries.
FilterLab, Linear Active Thermistor, MXDEV, MXLAB,
SEEVAL, SmartSensor and The Embedded Control Solutions
Company are registered trademarks of Microchip Technology
Incorporated in the U.S.A.
Analog-for-the-Digital Age, Application Maestro, CodeGuard,
dsPICDEM, dsPICDEM.net, dsPICworks, dsSPEAK, ECAN,
ECONOMONITOR, FanSense, In-Circuit Serial
Programming, ICSP, ICEPIC, Mindi, MiWi, MPASM, MPLAB
Certified logo, MPLIB, MPLINK, mTouch, PICkit, PICDEM,
PICDEM.net, PICtail, PIC32 logo, PowerCal, PowerInfo,
PowerMate, PowerTool, REAL ICE, rfLAB, Select Mode, Total
Endurance, UNI/O, WiperLock and ZENA are trademarks of
Microchip Technology Incorporated in the U.S.A. and other
countries.
SQTP is a service mark of Microchip Technology Incorporated
in the U.S.A.
All other trademarks mentioned herein are property of their
respective companies.
© 2008, Microchip Technology Incorporated, Printed in the
U.S.A., All Rights Reserved.
Printed on recycled paper.
Microchip received ISO/TS-16949:2002 certification for its worldwide
headquarters, design and wafer fabrication facilities in Chandler and
Tempe, Arizona; Gresham, Oregon and design centers in California
and India. The Company’s quality system processes and procedures
are for its PIC® MCUs and dsPIC® DSCs, KEELOQ® code hopping
devices, Serial EEPROMs, microperipherals, nonvolatile memory and
analog products. In addition, Microchip’s quality system for the design
and manufacture of development systems is ISO 9001:2000 certified.
DS70141E-page ii
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
dsPIC30F3010/3011
High Performance, 16-Bit Digital Signal Controllers
Note:
This data sheet summarizes features of
this group of dsPIC30F devices and is not
intended to be a complete reference
source. For more information on the CPU,
peripherals, register descriptions and general device functionality, refer to the
“dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual”
(DS70046). For more information on the
device instruction set and programming,
refer to the “dsPIC30F/33F Programmer’s
Reference Manual” (DS70157).
High-Performance Modified RISC CPU:
• Modified Harvard Architecture
• C Compiler Optimized Instruction Set Architecture
with Flexible Addressing modes
• 83 Base Instructions
• 24-Bit Wide Instructions, 16-Bit Wide Data Path
• 24 Kbytes On-Chip Flash Program Space
(8K instruction words)
• 1 Kbyte of On-Chip Data RAM
• 1 Kbyte of Nonvolatile Data EEPROM
• 16 x 16-Bit Working Register Array
• Up to 30 MIPs Operation:
- DC to 40 MHz external clock input
- 4 MHz-10 MHz oscillator input with
PLL active (4x, 8x, 16x)
• 29 Interrupt Sources
- 3 external interrupt sources
- 8 user-selectable priority levels for each
interrupt source
- 4 processor trap sources
DSP Engine Features:
•
•
•
•
Dual Data Fetch
Accumulator Write Back for DSP Operations
Modulo and Bit-Reversed Addressing modes
Two, 40-Bit Wide Accumulators with Optional
saturation Logic
• 17-Bit x 17-Bit Single-Cycle Hardware Fractional/
Integer Multiplier
• All DSP Instructions Single Cycle
• ±16-Bit Single-Cycle Shift
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
Peripheral Features:
• High-Current Sink/Source I/O Pins: 25 mA/25 mA
• Timer module with Programmable Prescaler:
- Five 16-bit timers/counters; optionally pair
16-bit timers into 32-bit timer modules
• 16-Bit Capture Input Functions
• 16-Bit Compare/PWM Output Functions
• 3-Wire SPI modules (supports 4 Frame modes)
• I2CTM module Supports Multi-Master/Slave mode
and 7-Bit/10-Bit Addressing
• 2 UART modules with FIFO Buffers
Motor Control PWM Module Features:
• 6 PWM Output Channels
- Complementary or Independent Output
modes
- Edge and Center-Aligned modes
• 3 Duty Cycle Generators
• Dedicated Time Base
• Programmable Output Polarity
• Dead-Time Control for Complementary mode
• Manual Output Control
• Trigger for A/D Conversions
Quadrature Encoder Interface Module
Features:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Phase A, Phase B and Index Pulse Input
16-Bit Up/Down Position Counter
Count Direction Status
Position Measurement (x2 and x4) mode
Programmable Digital Noise Filters on Inputs
Alternate 16-Bit Timer/Counter mode
Interrupt on Position Counter Rollover/Underflow
Analog Features:
• 10-Bit Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC) with
4 S/H Inputs:
- 1 Msps conversion rate
- 9 input channels
- Conversion available during Sleep and Idle
• Programmable Brown-out Reset
DS70141E-page 1
dsPIC30F3010/3011
Special Microcontroller Features:
CMOS Technology:
• Enhanced Flash Program Memory:
- 10,000 erase/write cycle (min.) for
industrial temperature range, 100K (typical)
• Data EEPROM Memory:
- 100,000 erase/write cycle (min.) for
industrial temperature range, 1M (typical)
• Self-Reprogrammable under Software Control
• Power-on Reset (POR), Power-up Timer (PWRT)
and Oscillator Start-up Timer (OST)
• Flexible Watchdog Timer (WDT) with On-Chip
Low-Power RC Oscillator for Reliable Operation
• Fail-Safe Clock Monitor Operation Detects Clock
Failure and Switches to On-Chip Low-Power RC
Oscillator
• Programmable Code Protection
• In-Circuit Serial Programming™ (ICSP™)
• Selectable Power Management modes:
- Sleep, Idle and Alternate Clock modes
•
•
•
•
Low-Power, High-Speed Flash Technology
Wide Operating Voltage Range (2.5V to 5.5V)
Industrial and Extended Temperature Ranges
Low Power Consumption
dsPIC30F Motor Control and Power Conversion Family
Pins
UART
SPI
I2CTM
Program
Output
Motor
SRAM EEPROM Timer Input
A/D 10-Bit Quad
Mem. Bytes/
Comp/Std Control
Bytes
Bytes
16-Bit Cap
1 Msps
Enc
Instructions
PWM
PWM
Device
dsPIC30F3010
28
24K/8K
1024
1024
5
4
2
6 ch
6 ch
Yes
1
1
1
dsPIC30F3011
40/44
24K/8K
1024
1024
5
4
4
6 ch
9 ch
Yes
2
1
1
DS70141E-page 2
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
dsPIC30F3010/3011
Pin Diagrams
MCLR
EMUD3/AN0/VREF+/CN2/RB0
EMUC3/AN1/VREF-/CN3/RB1
AN2/SS1/CN4/RB2
AN3/INDX/CN5/RB3
AN4/QEA/IC7/CN6/RB4
AN5/QEB/IC8/CN7/RB5
AN6/OCFA/RB6
AN7/RB7
AN8/RB8
VDD
VSS
OSC1/CLKI
OSC2/CLKO/RC15
EMUD1/SOSCI/T2CK/U1ATX/CN1/RC13
EMUC1/SOSCO/T1CK/U1ARX/CN0/RC14
FLTA/INT0/RE8
EMUD2/OC2/IC2/INT2/RD1
OC4/RD3
VSS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
dsPIC30F3011
40-Pin PDIP
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
AVDD
AVSS
PWM1L/RE0
PWM1H/RE1
PWM2L/RE2
PWM2H/RE3
PWM3L/RE4
PWM3H/RE5
VDD
VSS
RF0
RF1
U2RX/CN17/RF4
U2TX/CN18/RF5
PGC/EMUC/U1RX/SDI1/SDA/RF2
PGD/EMUD/U1TX/SDO1/SCL/RF3
SCK1/RF6
EMUC2/OC1/IC1/INT1/RD0
OC3/RD2
VDD
dsPIC30F3011
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
NC
EMUD1/SOSCI/T2CK/U1ATX/CN1/RC13
OSC2/CLKO/RC15
OSC1/CLKI
VSS
VDD
AN8/RB8
AN7/RB7
AN6/OCFA/RB6
AN5/QEB/IC8/CN7/RB5
AN4/QEA/IC7/CN6/RB4
NC
NC
PWM1H/RE1
PWM1L/RE0
AVSS
AVDD
MCLR
EMUD3/AN0/VREF+/CN2/RB0
EMUC3/AN1/VREF-/CN3/RB1
AN2/SS1/CN4/RB2
AN3/INDX/CN5/RB3
PGC/EMUC/U1RX/SDI1/SDA/RF2
U2TX/CN18/RF5
U2RX/CN17/RF4
RF1
RF0
VSS
VDD
PWM3H/RE5
PWM3L/RE4
PWM2H/RE3
PWM2L/RE2
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
PGD/EMUD/U1TX/SDO1/SCL/RF3
SCK1/RF6
EMUC2/OC1/IC1/INT1/RD0
OC3/RD2
VDD
VSS
OC4/RD3
EMUD2/OC2/IC2/INT2/RD1
FLTA/INT0/RE8
EMUC1/SOSCO/T1CK/U1ARX/CN0/RC14
NC
44-Pin TQFP
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70141E-page 3
dsPIC30F3010/3011
Pin Diagrams (Continued)
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
PGD/EMUD/U1TX/SDO1/SCL/RF3
SCK1/RF6
EMUC2/OC1/IC1/INT1/RD0
OC3/RD2
VDD
VSS
OC4/RD3
EMUD2/OC2/IC2/INT2/RD1
FLTA/INT0/RE8
EMUC1/SOSCO/T1CK/U1ARX/CN0/RC14
EMUD1/SOSCI/T2CK/U1ATX/CN1/RC13
44-Pin QFN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
dsPIC30F3011
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
OSC2/CLKO/RC15
OSC1/CLKI
VSS
VSS
VDD
VDD
AN8/RB8
AN7/RB7
AN6/OCFA/RB6
AN5/QEB/IC8/CN7/RB5
AN4/QEA/IC7/CN6/RB4
PWM2L/RE2
NC
PWM1H/RE1
PWM1L/RE0
AVSS
AVDD
MCLR
EMUD3/AN0/VREF+/CN2/RB0
EMUC3/AN1/VREF-/CN3/RB1
AN2/SS1/CN4/RB2
AN3/INDX/CN5/RB3
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
PGC/EMUC/U1RX/SDI1/SDA/RF2
U2TX/CN18/RF5
U2RX/CN17/RF4
RF1
RF0
VSS
VDD
VDD
PWM3H/RE5
PWM3L/RE4
PWM2H/RE3
DS70141E-page 4
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
dsPIC30F3010/3011
Pin Diagrams (Continued)
MCLR
EMUD3/AN0/VREF+/CN2/RB0
EMUC3/AN1/VREF-/CN3/RB1
AN2/SS1/CN4/RB2
AN3/INDX/CN5/RB3
AN4/QEA/IC7/CN6/RB4
AN5/QEB/IC8/CN7/RB5
VSS
OSC1/CLKI
OSC2/CLKO/RC15
EMUD1/SOSCI/T2CK/U1ATX/CN1/RC13
EMUC1/SOSCO/T1CK/U1ARX/CN0/RC14
VDD
EMUD2/OC2/IC2/INT2/RD1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
dsPIC30F3010
28-Pin SPDIP
28-Pin SOIC
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
AVDD
AVSS
PWM1L/RE0
PWM1H/RE1
PWM2L/RE2
PWM2H/RE3
PWM3L/RE4
PWM3H/RE5
VDD
VSS
PGC/EMUC/U1RX/SDI1/SDA/RF2
PGD/EMUD/U1TX/SDO1/SCL/RF3
FLTA/INT0/SCK1/OCFA/RE8
EMUC2/OC1/IC1/INT1/RD0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
dsPIC30F3010
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
OSC2/CLKO/RC15
OSC1/CLKI
VSS
VSS
VDD
VDD
NC
NC
NC
AN5/QEB/IC8/CN7/RB5
AN4/QEA/IC7/CN6/RB4
PWM2L/RE2
NC
PWM1H/RE1
PWM1L/RE0
AVSS
AVDD
MCLR
EMUD3/AN0/VREF+/CN2/RB0
EMUC3/AN1/VREF-/CN3/RB1
AN2/SS1/CN4/RB2
AN3/INDX/CN5/RB3
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
PGC/EMUC/U1RX/SDI1/SDA/RF2
NC
NC
NC
NC
VSS
VDD
VDD
PWM3H/RE5
PWM3L/RE4
PWM2H/RE3
39
38
37
36
35
34
44
43
42
41
40
PGD/EMUD/U1TX/SDO1/SCL/RF3
FLTA/INT0/SCK1\OCFA/RE8
EMUC2/OC1/IC1/INT1/RD0
NC
VDD
VSS
NC
EMUD2/OC2/IC2/INT2/RD1
VDD
EMUC1/SOSCO/T1CK/U1ARX/CN0/RC14
EMUD1/SOSCI/T2CK/U1ATX/CN1/RC13
44-Pin QFN
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70141E-page 5
dsPIC30F3010/3011
Table of Contents
1.0 Device Overview .......................................................................................................................................................................... 7
2.0 CPU Architecture Overview........................................................................................................................................................ 15
3.0 Memory Organization ................................................................................................................................................................. 23
4.0 Address Generator Units ............................................................................................................................................................ 35
5.0 Interrupts .................................................................................................................................................................................... 41
6.0 Flash Program Memory .............................................................................................................................................................. 47
7.0 Data EEPROM Memory ............................................................................................................................................................. 53
8.0 I/O Ports ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 59
9.0 Timer1 Module ........................................................................................................................................................................... 65
10.0 Timer2/3 Module ........................................................................................................................................................................ 69
11.0 Timer4/5 Module ....................................................................................................................................................................... 75
12.0 Input Capture Module ................................................................................................................................................................. 79
13.0 Output Compare Module ............................................................................................................................................................ 83
14.0 Quadrature Encoder Interface (QEI) Module ............................................................................................................................. 87
15.0 Motor Control PWM Module ....................................................................................................................................................... 93
16.0 SPI Module ............................................................................................................................................................................... 105
17.0 I2C™ Module ........................................................................................................................................................................... 109
18.0 Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter (UART) Module .............................................................................................. 117
19.0 10-bit High-Speed Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC) Module ................................................................................................ 125
20.0 System Integration ................................................................................................................................................................... 137
21.0 Instruction Set Summary .......................................................................................................................................................... 151
22.0 Development Support............................................................................................................................................................... 159
23.0 Electrical Characteristics .......................................................................................................................................................... 163
24.0 Packaging Information.............................................................................................................................................................. 201
Index ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 215
TO OUR VALUED CUSTOMERS
It is our intention to provide our valued customers with the best documentation possible to ensure successful use of your Microchip
products. To this end, we will continue to improve our publications to better suit your needs. Our publications will be refined and
enhanced as new volumes and updates are introduced.
If you have any questions or comments regarding this publication, please contact the Marketing Communications Department via
E-mail at [email protected] or fax the Reader Response Form in the back of this data sheet to (480) 792-4150. We
welcome your feedback.
Most Current Data Sheet
To obtain the most up-to-date version of this data sheet, please register at our Worldwide Web site at:
http://www.microchip.com
You can determine the version of a data sheet by examining its literature number found on the bottom outside corner of any page.
The last character of the literature number is the version number, (e.g., DS30000A is version A of document DS30000).
Errata
An errata sheet, describing minor operational differences from the data sheet and recommended workarounds, may exist for current
devices. As device/documentation issues become known to us, we will publish an errata sheet. The errata will specify the revision
of silicon and revision of document to which it applies.
To determine if an errata sheet exists for a particular device, please check with one of the following:
• Microchip’s Worldwide Web site; http://www.microchip.com
• Your local Microchip sales office (see last page)
When contacting a sales office, please specify which device, revision of silicon and data sheet (include literature number) you are
using.
Customer Notification System
Register on our web site at www.microchip.com to receive the most current information on all of our products.
DS70141E-page 6
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
dsPIC30F3010/3011
1.0
Note:
DEVICE OVERVIEW
This data sheet summarizes features of
this group of dsPIC30F devices and is not
intended to be a complete reference
source. For more information on the CPU,
peripherals, register descriptions and general device functionality, refer to the
“dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual”
(DS70046). For more information on the
device instruction set and programming,
refer to the “dsPIC30F/33F Programmer’s
Reference Manual” (DS70157).
This document contains device-specific information for
the dsPIC30F3010/3011 device. The dsPIC30F
devices contain extensive Digital Signal Processor
(DSP) functionality within a high-performance 16-bit
microcontroller (MCU) architecture. Figure 1-1 and
Figure 1-2 show device block diagrams for the
dsPIC30F3011 and dsPIC30F3010 devices.
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70141E-page 7
dsPIC30F3010/3011
FIGURE 1-1:
dsPIC30F3011 BLOCK DIAGRAM
Y Data Bus
X Data Bus
16
Interrupt
Controller
PSV & Table
Data Access
24 Control Block
8
16
16
Data Latch
Y Data
RAM
(4 Kbytes)
Address
Latch
16
24
16
24
Address Latch
Program Memory
(24 Kbytes)
Data EEPROM
(1 Kbyte)
16
Data Latch
X Data
RAM
(4 Kbytes)
Address
Latch
16
16
X RAGU
X WAGU
Y AGU
PCU PCH PCL
Program Counter
Loop
Stack
Control
Control
Logic
Logic
16
EMUD3/AN0/VREF+/CN2/RB0
EMUC3/AN1/VREF-/CN3/RB1
AN2/SS1/CN4/RB2
AN3/INDX/CN5/RB3
AN4/QEA/IC7/CN6/RB4
AN5/QEB/IC8/CN7/RB5
AN6/OCFA/RB6
AN7/RB7
AN8/RB8
Effective Address
16
Data Latch
PORTB
ROM Latch
16
24
IR
16 x 16
W Reg Array
Decode
Instruction
Decode and
Control
Power-up
Timer
Timing
Generation
DSP
Engine
Oscillator
Start-up Timer
POR/BOR
Reset
MCLR
VDD, VSS
AVDD, AVSS
SPI
PORTC
16 16
Control Signals
to Various Blocks
OSC1/CLKI
EMUD1/SOSCI/T2CK/U1ATX/CN1/RC13
EMUC1/SOSCO/T1CK/U1ARX/CN0/RC14
OSC2/CLKO/RC15
16
16
Divide
Unit
EMUC2/OC1/IC1/INT1/RD0
EMUD2/OC2/IC2/INT2/RD1
OC3/RD2
OC4/RD3
ALU<16>
PORTD
16
16
Watchdog
Timer
10-Bit ADC
Input
Capture
Module
Output
Compare
Module
I2C™
Timers
QEI
Motor Control
PWM
UART1,
UART2
PWM1L/RE0
PWM1H/RE1
PWM2L/RE2
PWM2H/RE3
PWM3L/RE4
PWM3H/RE5
FLTA/INT0/RE8
PORTE
RF0
RF1
PGC/EMUC/U1RX/SDI1/SDA/RF2
PGD/EMUD/U1TX/SDO1/SCL/RF3
U2RX/CN17/RF4
U2TX/CN18/RF5
SCK1/RF6
PORTF
DS70141E-page 8
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
dsPIC30F3010/3011
FIGURE 1-2:
dsPIC30F3010 BLOCK DIAGRAM
Y Data Bus
X Data Bus
16
16
Interrupt
Controller
PSV & Table
Data Access
24 Control Block
8
16
Data Latch
Y Data
RAM
(4 Kbytes)
Address
Latch
16
24
Y AGU
PCU PCH PCL
Program Counter
Loop
Stack
Control
Control
Logic
Logic
Address Latch
Program Memory
(24 Kbytes)
Data EEPROM
(1 Kbyte)
16
16
16
X RAGU
X WAGU
16
24
16
Data Latch
X Data
RAM
(4 Kbytes)
Address
Latch
EMUD3/AN0/VREF+/CN2/RB0
EMUC3/AN1/VREF-/CN3/RB1
AN2/SS1/CN4/RB2
AN3/INDX/CN5/RB3
AN4/QEA/IC7/CN6/RB4
AN5/QEB/IC8/CN7/RB5
PORTB
Effective Address
16
Data Latch
ROM Latch
16
24
IR
16 x 16
W Reg Array
Decode
Instruction
Decode and
Control
Power-up
Timer
Timing
Generation
DSP
Engine
POR/BOR
Reset
VDD, VSS
AVDD, AVSS
Divide
Unit
EMUC2/OC1/IC1/INT1/RD0
EMUD2/OC2/IC2/INT2/RD1
Oscillator
Start-up Timer
MCLR
SPI
PORTC
16 16
Control Signals
to Various Blocks
OSC1/CLKI
EMUD1/SOSCI/T2CK/U1ATX/CN1/RC13
EMUC1/SOSCO/T1CK/U1ARX/CN0/RC14
OSC2/CLKO/RC15
16
16
ALU<16>
16
PORTD
16
Watchdog
Timer
10-Bit ADC
Input
Capture
Module
Output
Compare
Module
I2C™
Timers
QEI
Motor Control
PWM
UART
PWM1L/RE0
PWM1H/RE1
PWM2L/RE2
PWM2H/RE3
PWM3L/RE4
PWM3H/RE5
FLTA/INT0/SCK1/OCFA/RE8
PORTE
PGC/EMUC/U1RX/SDI1/SDA/RF2
PGD/EMUD/U1TX/SDO1/SCL/RF3
PORTF
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70141E-page 9
dsPIC30F3010/3011
Table 1-1 provides a brief description of the device I/O
pinout and the functions that are multiplexed to a port
pin. Multiple functions may exist on one port pin. When
multiplexing occurs, the peripheral module’s functional
requirements may force an override of the data
direction of the port pin.
TABLE 1-1:
dsPIC30F3011 I/O PIN DESCRIPTIONS
Pin
Type
Buffer
Type
AN0-AN8
I
Analog
AVDD
P
P
Positive supply for analog module.
AVSS
P
P
Ground reference for analog module.
CLKI
CLKO
I
O
CN0-CN7
CN17-CN18
I
ST
Input change notification inputs.
Can be software programmed for internal weak pull-ups on all inputs.
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
ST
ST
ST
ST
ST
ST
ST
ST
ICD Primary Communication Channel data input/output pin.
ICD Primary Communication Channel clock input/output pin.
ICD Secondary Communication Channel data input/output pin.
ICD Secondary Communication Channel clock input/output pin.
ICD Tertiary Communication Channel data input/output pin.
ICD Tertiary Communication Channel clock input/output pin.
ICD Quaternary Communication Channel data input/output pin.
ICD Quaternary Communication Channel clock input/output pin.
IC1, IC2, IC7,
IC8
I
ST
Capture inputs 1, 2, 7 and 8.
INDX
QEA
I
I
ST
ST
QEB
I
ST
Quadrature Encoder Index Pulse input.
Quadrature Encoder Phase A input in QEI mode.
Auxiliary Timer External Clock/Gate input in Timer mode.
Quadrature Encoder Phase A input in QEI mode.
Auxiliary Timer External Clock/Gate input in Timer mode.
INT0
INT1
INT2
I
I
I
ST
ST
ST
External interrupt 0.
External interrupt 1.
External interrupt 2.
FLTA
PWM1L
PWM1H
PWM2L
PWM2H
PWM3L
PWM3H
I
O
O
O
O
O
O
ST
—
—
—
—
—
—
PWM Fault A input.
PWM 1 Low output.
PWM 1 High output.
PWM 2 Low output.
PWM 2 High output.
PWM 3 Low output.
PWM 3 High output.
MCLR
I/P
ST
Master Clear (Reset) input or programming voltage input. This pin is an active
low Reset to the device.
OCFA
OC1-OC4
I
O
ST
—
Compare Fault A input (for Compare channels 1, 2, 3 and 4).
Compare outputs 1 through 4.
Pin Name
EMUD
EMUC
EMUD1
EMUC1
EMUD2
EMUC2
EMUD3
EMUC3
Legend: CMOS =
ST
=
I
=
DS70141E-page 10
Description
Analog input channels.
AN0 and AN1 are also used for device programming data and clock inputs,
respectively.
ST/CMOS External clock source input. Always associated with OSC1 pin function.
—
Oscillator crystal output. Connects to crystal or resonator in Crystal
Oscillator mode. Optionally functions as CLKO in RC and EC modes.
Always associated with OSC2 pin function.
CMOS compatible input or output
Schmitt Trigger input with CMOS levels
Input
Analog =
O
=
P
=
Analog input
Output
Power
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
dsPIC30F3010/3011
TABLE 1-1:
Pin Name
dsPIC30F3011 I/O PIN DESCRIPTIONS (CONTINUED)
Pin
Type
Buffer
Type
Description
OSC1
OSC2
I
I/O
ST/CMOS Oscillator crystal input. ST buffer when configured in RC mode; CMOS
—
otherwise.
Oscillator crystal output. Connects to crystal or resonator in Crystal Oscillator
mode. Optionally functions as CLKO in RC and EC modes.
PGD
PGC
I/O
I
ST
ST
In-Circuit Serial Programming™ data input/output pin.
In-Circuit Serial Programming clock input pin.
RB0-RB8
I/O
ST
PORTB is a bidirectional I/O port.
RC13-RC15
I/O
ST
PORTC is a bidirectional I/O port.
RD0-RD3
I/O
ST
PORTD is a bidirectional I/O port.
RE0-RE5,
RE8
I/O
ST
PORTE is a bidirectional I/O port.
RF0-RF6
I/O
ST
PORTF is a bidirectional I/O port.
SCK1
SDI1
SDO1
SS1
I/O
I
O
I
ST
ST
—
ST
Synchronous serial clock input/output for SPI #1.
SPI #1 Data In.
SPI #1 Data Out.
SPI #1 Slave Synchronization.
SCL
SDA
I/O
I/O
ST
ST
Synchronous serial clock input/output for I2C™.
Synchronous serial data input/output for I2C.
SOSCO
SOSCI
O
I
T1CK
T2CK
I
I
ST
ST
Timer1 external clock input.
Timer2 external clock input.
U1RX
U1TX
U1ARX
U1ATX
U2RX
U2TX
I
O
I
O
I
O
ST
—
ST
—
ST
—
UART1 Receive.
UART1 Transmit.
UART1 Alternate Receive.
UART1 Alternate Transmit.
UART2 Receive.
UART2 Transmit.
VDD
P
—
Positive supply for logic and I/O pins.
VSS
P
—
Ground reference for logic and I/O pins.
VREF+
I
Analog
Analog Voltage Reference (High) input.
VREF-
I
Analog
Analog Voltage Reference (Low) input.
Legend: CMOS =
ST
=
I
=
—
32 kHz low-power oscillator crystal output.
ST/CMOS 32 kHz low-power oscillator crystal input. ST buffer when configured in RC
mode; CMOS otherwise.
CMOS compatible input or output
Schmitt Trigger input with CMOS levels
Input
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
Analog =
O
=
P
=
Analog input
Output
Power
DS70141E-page 11
dsPIC30F3010/3011
Table 1-2 provides a brief description of the device I/O
pinout and the functions that are multiplexed to a port
pin. Multiple functions may exist on one port pin. When
multiplexing occurs, the peripheral module’s functional
requirements may force an override of the data
direction of the port pin.
TABLE 1-2:
dsPIC30F3010 I/O PIN DESCRIPTIONS
Pin
Type
Buffer
Type
AN0-AN5
I
Analog
AVDD
P
P
Positive supply for analog module.
AVSS
P
P
Ground reference for analog module.
CLKI
CLKO
I
O
CN0-CN7
I
ST
Input change notification inputs.
Can be software programmed for internal weak pull-ups on all inputs.
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
ST
ST
ST
ST
ST
ST
ST
ST
ICD Primary Communication Channel data input/output pin.
ICD Primary Communication Channel clock input/output pin.
ICD Secondary Communication Channel data input/output pin.
ICD Secondary Communication Channel clock input/output pin.
ICD Tertiary Communication Channel data input/output pin.
ICD Tertiary Communication Channel clock input/output pin.
ICD Quaternary Communication Channel data input/output pin.
ICD Quaternary Communication Channel clock input/output pin.
IC1, IC2, IC7,
IC8
I
ST
Capture inputs 1, 2, 7 and 8.
INDX
QEA
I
I
ST
ST
QEB
I
ST
Quadrature Encoder Index Pulse input.
Quadrature Encoder Phase A input in QEI mode.
Auxiliary Timer External Clock/Gate input in Timer mode.
Quadrature Encoder Phase A input in QEI mode.
Auxiliary Timer External Clock/Gate input in Timer mode.
INT0
INT1
INT2
I
I
I
ST
ST
ST
External interrupt 0.
External interrupt 1.
External interrupt 2.
FLTA
PWM1L
PWM1H
PWM2L
PWM2H
PWM3L
PWM3H
I
O
O
O
O
O
O
ST
—
—
—
—
—
—
PWM Fault A input.
PWM 1 Low output.
PWM 1 High output.
PWM 2 Low output.
PWM 2 High output.
PWM 3 Low output.
PWM 3 High output.
MCLR
I/P
ST
Master Clear (Reset) input or programming voltage input. This pin is an active
low Reset to the device.
OCFA
OC1, OC2
I
O
ST
—
Compare Fault A input (for Compare channels 1, 2, 3 and 4).
Compare outputs 1 and 2.
Pin Name
EMUD
EMUC
EMUD1
EMUC1
EMUD2
EMUC2
EMUD3
EMUC3
Legend: CMOS =
ST
=
I
=
DS70141E-page 12
Description
Analog input channels.
AN0 and AN1 are also used for device programming data and clock inputs,
respectively.
ST/CMOS External clock source input. Always associated with OSC1 pin function.
—
Oscillator crystal output. Connects to crystal or resonator in Crystal
Oscillator mode. Optionally functions as CLKO in RC and EC modes.
Always associated with OSC2 pin function.
CMOS compatible input or output
Schmitt Trigger input with CMOS levels
Input
Analog =
O
=
P
=
Analog input
Output
Power
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
dsPIC30F3010/3011
TABLE 1-2:
Pin Name
dsPIC30F3010 I/O PIN DESCRIPTIONS (CONTINUED)
Pin
Type
Buffer
Type
Description
OSC1
OSC2
I
I/O
ST/CMOS Oscillator crystal input. ST buffer when configured in RC mode; CMOS
—
otherwise.
Oscillator crystal output. Connects to crystal or resonator in Crystal Oscillator
mode. Optionally functions as CLKO in RC and EC modes.
PGD
PGC
I/O
I
ST
ST
In-Circuit Serial Programming™ data input/output pin.
In-Circuit Serial Programming clock input pin.
RB0-RB5
I/O
ST
PORTB is a bidirectional I/O port.
RC13-RC15
8I/O
8ST
PORTC is a bidirectional I/O port.
RD0-RD1
I/O
ST
PORTD is a bidirectional I/O port.
RE0-RE5,
RE8
I/O
ST
PORTE is a bidirectional I/O port.
RF2-RF3
I/O
ST
PORTF is a bidirectional I/O port.
SCK1
SDI1
SDO1
I/O
I
O
ST
ST
—
Synchronous serial clock input/output for SPI #1.
SPI #1 Data In.
SPI #1 Data Out.
SCL
SDA
I/O
I/O
ST
ST
Synchronous serial clock input/output for I2C™.
Synchronous serial data input/output for I2C.
SOSCO
SOSCI
O
I
T1CK
T2CK
I
I
ST
ST
Timer1 external clock input.
Timer2 external clock input.
U1RX
U1TX
U1ARX
U1ATX
I
O
I
O
ST
—
ST
—
UART1 Receive.
UART1 Transmit.
UART1 Alternate Receive.
UART1 Alternate Transmit.
VDD
P
—
Positive supply for logic and I/O pins.
VSS
P
—
Ground reference for logic and I/O pins.
—
32 kHz low-power oscillator crystal output.
ST/CMOS 32 kHz low-power oscillator crystal input. ST buffer when configured in RC
mode; CMOS otherwise.
VREF+
I
Analog
Analog Voltage Reference (High) input.
VREF-
I
Analog
Analog Voltage Reference (Low) input.
Legend: CMOS =
ST
=
I
=
CMOS compatible input or output
Schmitt Trigger input with CMOS levels
Input
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
Analog =
O
=
P
=
Analog input
Output
Power
DS70141E-page 13
dsPIC30F3010/3011
NOTES:
DS70141E-page 14
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
dsPIC30F3010/3011
2.0
Note:
2.1
CPU ARCHITECTURE
OVERVIEW
This data sheet summarizes features of
this group of dsPIC30F devices and is not
intended to be a complete reference
source. For more information on the CPU,
peripherals, register descriptions and general device functionality, refer to the
“dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual”
(DS70046). For more information on the
device instruction set and programming,
refer to the “dsPIC30F/33F Programmer’s
Reference Manual” (DS70157).
Core Overview
The core has a 24-bit instruction word. The Program
Counter (PC) is 23 bits wide with the Least Significant
bit (LSb) always clear (see Section 3.1 “Program
Address Space”), and the Most Significant bit (MSb)
is ignored during normal program execution, except for
certain specialized instructions. Thus, the PC can
address up to 4M instruction words of user program
space. An instruction prefetch mechanism is used to
help maintain throughput. Program loop constructs,
free from loop count management overhead, are supported using the DO and REPEAT instructions, both of
which are interruptible at any point.
The working register array consists of 16x16-bit registers, each of which can act as data, address or offset
registers. One working register (W15) operates as a
Software Stack Pointer (SP) for interrupts and calls.
The data space is 64 Kbytes (32K words) and is split into
two blocks, referred to as X and Y data memory. Each
block has its own independent Address Generation Unit
(AGU). Most instructions operate solely through the X
memory AGU, which provides the appearance of a
single unified data space. The Multiply-Accumulate
(MAC) class of dual source DSP instructions operate
through both the X and Y AGUs, splitting the data
address space into two parts (see Section 3.2 “Data
Address Space”). The X and Y data space boundary is
device specific and cannot be altered by the user. Each
data word consists of 2 bytes, and most instructions can
address data either as words or bytes.
There are two methods of accessing data stored in
program memory:
• The upper 32 Kbytes of data space memory can
be mapped into the lower half (user space) of program space at any 16K program word boundary,
defined by the 8-bit Program Space Visibility Page
(PSVPAG) register. This lets any instruction
access program space as if it were data space,
with a limitation that the access requires an additional cycle. Moreover, only the lower 16 bits of
each instruction word can be accessed using this
method.
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
• Linear indirect access of 32K word pages within
program space is also possible using any working
register, via table read and write instructions.
Table read and write instructions can be used to
access all 24 bits of an instruction word.
Overhead-free circular buffers (Modulo Addressing)
are supported in both X and Y address spaces. This is
primarily intended to remove the loop overhead for
DSP algorithms.
The X AGU also supports Bit-Reversed Addressing on
destination effective addresses, to greatly simplify input
or output data reordering for radix-2 FFT algorithms.
Refer to Section 4.0 “Address Generator Units” for
details on Modulo and Bit-Reversed addressing.
The core supports Inherent (no operand), Relative, Literal, Memory Direct, Register Direct, Register Indirect,
Register Offset and Literal Offset Addressing modes.
Instructions are associated with predefined addressing
modes, depending upon their functional requirements.
For most instructions, the core is capable of executing
a data (or program data) memory read, a working register (data) read, a data memory write and a program
(instruction) memory read per instruction cycle. As a
result, 3 operand instructions are supported, allowing
C = A + B operations to be executed in a single cycle.
A DSP engine has been included to significantly
enhance the core arithmetic capability and throughput.
It features a high-speed 17-bit by 17-bit multiplier, a
40-bit ALU, two 40-bit saturating accumulators and a
40-bit bidirectional barrel shifter. Data in the accumulator or any working register can be shifted up to 16 bits
right or 16 bits left in a single cycle. The DSP instructions operate seamlessly with all other instructions and
have been designed for optimal real-time performance.
The MAC class of instructions can concurrently fetch
two data operands from memory, while multiplying two
W registers. To enable this concurrent fetching of data
operands, the data space has been split for these
instructions and linear for all others. This has been
achieved in a transparent and flexible manner, by
dedicating certain working registers to each address
space for the MAC class of instructions.
The core does not support a multi-stage instruction
pipeline. However, a single stage instruction prefetch
mechanism is used, which accesses and partially
decodes instructions a cycle ahead of execution, in
order to maximize available execution time. Most
instructions execute in a single cycle, with certain
exceptions.
The core features a vectored exception processing
structure for traps and interrupts, with 62 independent
vectors. The exceptions consist of up to 8 traps (of
which 4 are reserved) and 54 interrupts. Each interrupt
is prioritized based on a user assigned priority between
1 and 7 (1 being the lowest priority and 7 being the
highest) in conjunction with a predetermined ‘natural
order’. Traps have fixed priorities, ranging from 8 to 15.
DS70141E-page 15
dsPIC30F3010/3011
2.2
Programmer’s Model
The programmer’s model is shown in Figure 2-1 and
consists of 16x16-bit working registers (W0 through
W15), 2x40-bit accumulators (ACCA and ACCB),
STATUS Register (SR), Data Table Page register
(TBLPAG), Program Space Visibility Page register
(PSVPAG), DO and REPEAT registers (DOSTART,
DOEND, DCOUNT and RCOUNT) and Program Counter (PC). The working registers can act as Data,
Address or Offset registers. All registers are memory
mapped. W0 acts as the W register for file register
addressing.
2.2.1
SOFTWARE STACK POINTER/
FRAME POINTER
The dsPIC® DSC devices contain a software stack.
W15 is the dedicated Software Stack Pointer, and will
be automatically modified by exception processing and
subroutine calls and returns. However, W15 can be referenced by any instruction in the same manner as all
other W registers. This simplifies the reading, writing
and manipulation of the Stack Pointer (e.g., creating
stack frames).
Note:
In order to protect against misaligned
stack accesses, W15<0> is always clear.
Some of these registers have a Shadow register associated with each of them, as shown in Figure 2-1. The
Shadow register is used as a temporary holding register and can transfer its contents to or from its host register upon the occurrence of an event. None of the
Shadow registers are accessible directly. The following
rules apply for transfer of registers into and out of
shadows.
W15 is initialized to 0x0800 during a Reset. The user
may reprogram the SP during initialization to any
location within data space.
• PUSH.S and POP.S
W0, W1, W2, W3, SR (DC, N, OV, Z and C bits
only) are transferred.
• DO instruction
DOSTART, DOEND, DCOUNT shadows are
pushed on loop start, and popped on loop end.
2.2.2
When a byte operation is performed on a working register, only the Least Significant Byte (LSB) of the target
register is affected. However, a benefit of memory
mapped working registers is that both the Least and
Most Significant Bytes can be manipulated through
byte-wide data memory space accesses.
W14 has been dedicated as a Stack Frame Pointer as
defined by the LNK and ULNK instructions. However,
W14 can be referenced by any instruction in the same
manner as all other W registers.
STATUS REGISTER
The dsPIC DSC core has a 16-bit STATUS Register
(SR), the LSB of which is referred to as the SR Low
Byte (SRL) and the MSB as the SR High Byte (SRH).
See Figure 2-1 for SR layout.
SRL contains all the MCU ALU operation status flags
(including the Z bit), as well as the CPU Interrupt Priority Level status bits, IPL<2:0>, and the Repeat Active
status bit, RA. During exception processing, SRL is
concatenated with the MSB of the PC to form a
complete word value which is then stacked.
The upper byte of the SR register contains the DSP
adder/subtracter status bits, the DO Loop Active bit
(DA) and the Digit Carry (DC) status bit.
2.2.3
PROGRAM COUNTER
The Program Counter is 23 bits wide. Bit 0 is always
clear. Therefore, the PC can address up to 4M
instruction words.
DS70141E-page 16
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
dsPIC30F3010/3011
FIGURE 2-1:
PROGRAMMER’S MODEL
D15
D0
W0/WREG
PUSH.S Shadow
W1
DO Shadow
W2
W3
Legend
W4
DSP Operand
Registers
W5
W6
W7
Working Registers
W8
W9
DSP Address
Registers
W10
W11
W12/DSP Offset
W13/DSP Write Back
W14/Frame Pointer
W15/Stack Pointer
SPLIM
AD39
Stack Pointer Limit Register
AD15
AD31
AD0
ACCA
DSP
Accumulators
ACCB
PC22
PC0
Program Counter
0
0
7
TABPAG
TBLPAG
Data Table Page Address
0
7
PPSVPAG
SVPAG
Program Space Visibility Page Address
15
0
RCOUNT
REPEAT Loop Counter
15
0
DCOUNT
DO Loop Counter
22
0
DOSTART
DO Loop Start Address
DOEND
DO Loop End Address
22
15
0
Core Configuration Register
CORCON
OA
OB
SA
SB OAB SAB DA
SRH
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
DC IPL2 IPL1 IPL0 RA
N
OV
Z
C
STATUS Register
SRL
DS70141E-page 17
dsPIC30F3010/3011
2.3
Divide Support
The dsPIC DSC devices feature a 16/16-bit signed
fractional divide operation, as well as 32/16-bit and 16/
16-bit signed and unsigned integer divide operations, in
the form of single instruction iterative divides. The
following instructions and data sizes are supported:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
DIVF – 16/16 signed fractional divide
DIV.sd – 32/16 signed divide
DIV.ud – 32/16 unsigned divide
DIV.sw – 16/16 signed divide
DIV.uw – 16/16 unsigned divide
TABLE 2-1:
The divide instructions must be executed within a
REPEAT loop. Any other form of execution (e.g. a series
of discrete divide instructions) will not function correctly
because the instruction flow depends on RCOUNT. The
divide instruction does not automatically set up the
RCOUNT value, and it must, therefore, be explicitly and
correctly specified in the REPEAT instruction, as shown
in Table 2-1 (REPEAT will execute the target instruction
{operand value + 1} times). The REPEAT loop count
must be set up for 18 iterations of the DIV/DIVF instruction. Thus, a complete divide operation requires
19 cycles.
Note:
The divide flow is interruptible. However,
the user needs to save the context as
appropriate.
DIVIDE INSTRUCTIONS
Instruction
Function
DIVF
Signed fractional divide: Wm/Wn → W0; Rem → W1
DIV.sd
Signed divide: (Wm + 1:Wm)/Wn → W0; Rem → W1
DIV.sw
Signed divide: Wm/Wn → W0; Rem → W1
DIV.ud
Unsigned divide: (Wm + 1:Wm)/Wn → W0; Rem → W1
DIV.uw
Unsigned divide: Wm/Wn → W0; Rem → W1
2.4
DSP Engine
The DSP engine consists of a high-speed 17-bit x
17-bit multiplier, a barrel shifter, and a 40-bit adder/
subtracter (with two target accumulators, round and
saturation logic).
The dsPIC30F devices have a single instruction flow
which can execute either DSP or MCU instructions.
Many of the hardware resources are shared between
the DSP and MCU instructions. For example, the
instruction set has both DSP and MCU multiply
instructions which use the same hardware multiplier.
The DSP engine also has the capability to perform
inherent accumulator-to-accumulator operations, which
require no additional data. These instructions are ADD,
SUB and NEG.
A block diagram of the DSP engine is shown in
Figure 2-2.
TABLE 2-2:
Instruction
DSP INSTRUCTION
SUMMARY
Algebraic Operation
CLR
A=0
ED
A = (x – y)2
EDAC
MAC
MOVSAC
MPY
MPY.N
MSC
A = A + (x – y)2
A = A + (x * y)
No change in A
A=x*y
A=–x*y
A=A–x*y
The DSP engine has various options selected through
various bits in the CPU Core Configuration register
(CORCON), as listed below:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Fractional or integer DSP multiply (IF).
Signed or unsigned DSP multiply (US).
Conventional or convergent rounding (RND).
Automatic saturation on/off for ACCA (SATA).
Automatic saturation on/off for ACCB (SATB).
Automatic saturation on/off for writes to data
memory (SATDW).
Accumulator Saturation mode selection
(ACCSAT).
DS70141E-page 18
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
dsPIC30F3010/3011
FIGURE 2-2:
DSP ENGINE BLOCK DIAGRAM
40
S
a
40 Round t 16
u
Logic r
a
t
e
40-Bit Accumulator A
40-Bit Accumulator B
Carry/Borrow Out
Carry/Borrow In
Saturate
Adder
Negate
40
40
40
16
X Data Bus
Barrel
Shifter
40
Y Data Bus
Sign-Extend
32
Zero Backfill
16
32
33
17-Bit
Multiplier/Scaler
16
16
To/From W Array
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70141E-page 19
dsPIC30F3010/3011
2.4.1
MULTIPLIER
The 17x17-bit multiplier is capable of signed or
unsigned operation and can multiplex its output using a
scaler to support either 1.31 fractional (Q31) or 32-bit
integer results. Unsigned operands are zero-extended
into the 17th bit of the multiplier input value. Signed
operands are sign-extended into the 17th bit of the
multiplier input value. The output of the 17x17-bit
multiplier/scaler is a 33-bit value, which is signextended to 40 bits. Integer data is inherently
represented as a signed two’s complement value,
where the MSB is defined as a sign bit. Generally
speaking, the range of an N-bit two’s complement
integer is -2N-1 to 2N-1 – 1. For a 16-bit integer, the data
range is -32768 (0x8000) to 32767 (0x7FFF), including
0. For a 32-bit integer, the data range is -2,147,483,648
(0x8000 0000) to 2,147,483,645 (0x7FFF FFFF).
When the multiplier is configured for fractional multiplication, the data is represented as a two’s complement
fraction, where the MSB is defined as a sign bit and the
radix point is implied to lie just after the sign bit
(QX format). The range of an N-bit two’s complement
fraction with this implied radix point is -1.0 to (1-21-N).
For a 16-bit fraction, the Q15 data range is -1.0
(0x8000) to 0.999969482 (0x7FFF), including 0 and
has a precision of 3.01518x10-5. In Fractional mode, a
16x16 multiply operation generates a 1.31 product,
which has a precision of 4.65661x10-10.
The same multiplier is used to support the MCU
multiply instructions, which includes integer 16-bit
signed, unsigned and mixed sign multiplies.
2.4.2.1
The adder/subtracter is a 40-bit adder with an optional
zero input into one side and either true or complement
data into the other input. In the case of addition, the
carry/borrow input is active-high and the other input is
true data (not complemented), whereas in the case of
subtraction, the carry/borrow input is active-low and the
other input is complemented. The adder/subtracter
generates overflow status bits, SA/SB and OA/OB,
which are latched and reflected in the STATUS register.
• Overflow from bit 39: this is a catastrophic
overflow in which the sign of the accumulator is
destroyed.
• Overflow into guard bits 32 through 39: this is a
recoverable overflow. This bit is set whenever all
the guard bits are not identical to each other.
The adder has an additional saturation block which
controls accumulator data saturation, if selected. It
uses the result of the adder, the overflow status bits
described above, and the SATA/B (CORCON<7:6>)
and ACCSAT (CORCON<4>) mode control bits to
determine when and to what value to saturate.
Six STATUS register bits have been provided to
support saturation and overflow; they are:
1.
2.
3.
The MUL instruction may be directed to use byte or
word-sized operands. Byte operands will direct a 16-bit
result, and word operands will direct a 32-bit result to
the specified register(s) in the W array.
2.4.2
DATA ACCUMULATORS AND
ADDER/SUBTRACTER
The data accumulator consists of a 40-bit adder/subtracter with automatic sign extension logic. It can select
one of two accumulators (A or B) as its preaccumulation source and post-accumulation destination. For the ADD and LAC instructions, the data to be
accumulated or loaded can be optionally scaled via the
barrel shifter, prior to accumulation.
DS70141E-page 20
Adder/Subtracter, Overflow and
Saturation
4.
5.
6.
OA:
ACCA overflowed into guard bits
OB:
ACCB overflowed into guard bits
SA:
ACCA saturated (bit 31 overflow and saturation)
or
ACCA overflowed into guard bits and saturated
(bit 39 overflow and saturation)
SB:
ACCB saturated (bit 31 overflow and saturation)
or
ACCB overflowed into guard bits and saturated
(bit 39 overflow and saturation)
OAB:
Logical OR of OA and OB
SAB:
Logical OR of SA and SB
The OA and OB bits are modified each time data passes
through the adder/subtracter. When set, they indicate
that the most recent operation has overflowed into the
accumulator guard bits (bits 32 through 39). The OA and
OB bits can also optionally generate an arithmetic warning trap when set and the corresponding overflow trap
flag enable bit (OVATE, OVBTE) in the INTCON1 register (refer to Section 5.0 “Interrupts”) is set. This allows
the user to take immediate action, for example, to correct
system gain.
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
dsPIC30F3010/3011
The SA and SB bits are modified each time data passes
through the adder/subtracter, but can only be cleared by
the user. When set, they indicate that the accumulator
has overflowed its maximum range (bit 31 for 32-bit
saturation, or bit 39 for 40-bit saturation) and will be
saturated (if saturation is enabled). When saturation is
not enabled, SA and SB default to bit 39 overflow and
thus indicate that a catastrophic overflow has occurred.
If the COVTE bit in the INTCON1 register is set, SA and
SB bits will generate an arithmetic warning trap when
saturation is disabled.
The overflow and saturation status bits can optionally
be viewed in the STATUS Register (SR) as the logical
OR of OA and OB (in bit OAB) and the logical OR of SA
and SB (in bit SAB). This allows programmers to check
one bit in the STATUS register to determine if either
accumulator has overflowed, or one bit to determine if
either accumulator has saturated. This would be useful
for complex number arithmetic which typically uses
both the accumulators.
The device supports three Saturation and Overflow
modes.
1.
2.
3.
Bit 39 Overflow and Saturation:
When bit 39 overflow and saturation occurs, the
saturation logic loads the maximally positive 9.31
(0x7FFFFFFFFF) or maximally negative 9.31
value (0x8000000000) into the target
accumulator. The SA or SB bit is set and
remains set until cleared by the user. This is
referred to as ‘super saturation’ and provides
protection against erroneous data or unexpected
algorithm problems (e.g., gain calculations).
Bit 31 Overflow and Saturation:
When bit 31 overflow and saturation occurs, the
saturation logic then loads the maximally
positive 1.31 value (0x007FFFFFFF) or
maximally negative 1.31 value (0x0080000000)
into the target accumulator. The SA or SB bit is
set and remains set until cleared by the user.
When this Saturation mode is in effect, the guard
bits are not used (so the OA, OB or OAB bits are
never set).
Bit 39 Catastrophic Overflow
The bit 39 overflow status bit from the adder is
used to set the SA or SB bit, which remain set
until cleared by the user. No saturation operation
is performed and the accumulator is allowed to
overflow (destroying its sign). If the COVTE bit in
the INTCON1 register is set, a catastrophic
overflow can initiate a trap exception.
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
2.4.2.2
Accumulator ‘Write Back’
The MAC class of instructions (with the exception of
MPY, MPY.N, ED and EDAC) can optionally write a
rounded version of the high word (bits 31 through 16)
of the accumulator that is not targeted by the instruction
into data space memory. The write is performed across
the X bus into combined X and Y address space. The
following addressing modes are supported:
1.
2.
W13, Register Direct:
The rounded contents of the non-target
accumulator are written into W13 as a
1.15 fraction.
[W13]+=2, Register Indirect with Post-Increment:
The rounded contents of the non-target accumulator are written into the address pointed to by
W13 as a 1.15 fraction. W13 is then
incremented by 2 (for a word write).
2.4.2.3
Round Logic
The round logic is a combinational block, which performs a conventional (biased) or convergent (unbiased)
round function during an accumulator write (store). The
Round mode is determined by the state of the RND bit
in the CORCON register. It generates a 16-bit, 1.15 data
value which is passed to the data space write saturation
logic. If rounding is not indicated by the instruction, a
truncated 1.15 data value is stored and the least
significant word (lsw) is simply discarded.
Conventional rounding takes bit 15 of the accumulator,
zero-extends it and adds it to the ACCxH word (bits 16
through 31 of the accumulator). If the ACCxL word
(bits 0 through 15 of the accumulator) is between
0x8000 and 0xFFFF (0x8000 included), ACCxH is
incremented. If ACCxL is between 0x0000 and 0x7FFF,
ACCxH is left unchanged. A consequence of this
algorithm is that over a succession of random rounding
operations, the value will tend to be biased slightly
positive.
Convergent (or unbiased) rounding operates in the
same manner as conventional rounding, except when
ACCxL equals 0x8000. If this is the case, the LSb
(bit 16 of the accumulator) of ACCxH is examined. If it
is ‘1’, ACCxH is incremented. If it is ‘0’, ACCxH is not
modified. Assuming that bit 16 is effectively random in
nature, this scheme will remove any rounding bias that
may accumulate.
The SAC and SAC.R instructions store either a truncated (SAC) or rounded (SAC.R) version of the contents
of the target accumulator to data memory, via the X bus
(subject to data saturation, see Section 2.4.2.4 “Data
Space Write Saturation”). Note that for the MAC class
of instructions, the accumulator write-back operation
will function in the same manner, addressing combined
MCU (X and Y) data space though the X bus. For this
class of instructions, the data is always subject to
rounding.
DS70141E-page 21
dsPIC30F3010/3011
2.4.2.4
Data Space Write Saturation
2.4.3
BARREL SHIFTER
In addition to adder/subtracter saturation, writes to data
space may also be saturated, but without affecting the
contents of the source accumulator. The data space
write saturation logic block accepts a 16-bit,
1.15 fractional value from the round logic block as its
input, together with overflow status from the original
source (accumulator) and the 16-bit round adder.
These are combined and used to select the appropriate
1.15 fractional value as output to write to data space
memory.
The barrel shifter is capable of performing up to 16-bit
arithmetic or logic right shifts, or up to 16-bit left shifts
in a single cycle. The source can be either of the two
DSP accumulators or the X bus (to support multi-bit
shifts of register or memory data).
If the SATDW bit in the CORCON register is set, data
(after rounding or truncation) is tested for overflow and
adjusted accordingly. For input data greater than
0x007FFF, data written to memory is forced to the
maximum positive 1.15 value, 0x7FFF. For input data
less than 0xFF8000, data written to memory is forced
to the maximum negative 1.15 value, 0x8000. The MSb
of the source (bit 39) is used to determine the sign of
the operand being tested.
The barrel shifter is 40 bits wide, thereby obtaining a
40-bit result for DSP shift operations and a 16-bit result
for MCU shift operations. Data from the X bus is
presented to the barrel shifter between bit positions 16
to 31 for right shifts, and bit positions 0 to 15 for left
shifts.
The shifter requires a signed binary value to determine
both the magnitude (number of bits) and direction of the
shift operation. A positive value will shift the operand
right. A negative value will shift the operand left. A
value of ‘0’ will not modify the operand.
If the SATDW bit in the CORCON register is not set, the
input data is always passed through unmodified under
all conditions.
DS70141E-page 22
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
dsPIC30F3010/3011
Note:
3.1
MEMORY ORGANIZATION
FIGURE 3-1:
This data sheet summarizes features of
this group of dsPIC30F devices and is not
intended to be a complete reference
source. For more information on the CPU,
peripherals, register descriptions and general device functionality, refer to the
“dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual”
(DS70046). For more information on the
device instruction set and programming,
refer to the “dsPIC30F/33F Programmer’s
Reference Manual” (DS70157).
PROGRAM SPACE
MEMORY MAP FOR
dsPIC30F3010/3011
Reset - GOTO Instruction
Reset - Target Address
Vector Tables
Program Address Space
The program address space is 4M instruction words. It
is addressable by the 23-bit PC, table instruction
Effective Address (EA) or data space EA, when
program space is mapped into data space, as defined
by Table 3-1. Note that the program space address is
incremented by two between successive program
words in order to provide compatibility with data space
addressing.
000000
000002
000004
Interrupt Vector Table
User Memory
Space
3.0
Reserved
Alternate Vector Table
User Flash
Program Memory
(8K instructions)
Reserved
(Read 0’s)
User program space access is restricted to the lower
4M instruction word address range (0x000000 to
0x7FFFFE) for all accesses other than TBLRD/TBLWT,
which use TBLPAG<7> to determine user or configuration space access. In Table 3-1, read/write instructions,
bit 23 allows access to the Device ID, the User ID and
the Configuration bits; otherwise, bit 23 is always clear.
Data EEPROM
(1 Kbyte)
00007E
000080
000084
0000FE
000100
003FFE
004000
7FFBFE
7FFC00
7FFFFE
800000
Configuration Memory
Space
Reserved
UNITID (32 instr.)
8005BE
8005C0
8005FE
800600
Reserved
Device Configuration
Registers
F7FFFE
F80000
F8000E
F80010
Reserved
DEVID (2)
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
FEFFFE
FF0000
FFFFFE
DS70141E-page 23
dsPIC30F3010/3011
TABLE 3-1:
PROGRAM SPACE ADDRESS CONSTRUCTION
Access
Space
Access Type
Instruction Access
TBLRD/TBLWT
TBLRD/TBLWT
Program Space Visibility
FIGURE 3-2:
User
User
(TBLPAG<7> = 0)
Configuration
(TBLPAG<7> = 1)
User
Program Space Address
<23>
<22:16>
<15>
<14:1>
0
PC<22:1>
TBLPAG<7:0>
Data EA <15:0>
TBLPAG<7:0>
0
<0>
0
Data EA <15:0>
PSVPAG<7:0>
Data EA <14:0>
DATA ACCESS FROM PROGRAM SPACE ADDRESS GENERATION
23 bits
Using
Program
Counter
Program Counter
0
Select
Using
Program
Space
Visibility
0
1
0
EA
PSVPAG Reg
8 bits
15 bits
EA
Using
Table
Instruction
1/0
TBLPAG Reg
8 bits
User/
Configuration
Space
Select
16 bits
24-bit EA
Byte
Select
Note: Program Space Visibility cannot be used to access bits<23:16> of a word in program memory.
DS70141E-page 24
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
dsPIC30F3010/3011
3.1.1
DATA ACCESS FROM PROGRAM
MEMORY USING TABLE
INSTRUCTIONS
A set of table instructions are provided to move byte or
word-sized data to and from program space.
1.
This architecture fetches 24-bit wide program memory.
Consequently, instructions are always aligned. However, as the architecture is modified Harvard, data can
also be present in program space.
There are two methods by which program space can
be accessed: via special table instructions, or through
the remapping of a 16K word program space page into
the upper half of data space (see Section 3.1.2 “Data
Access From Program Memory Using Program
Space Visibility”). The TBLRDL and TBLWTL instructions offer a direct method of reading or writing the lsw
of any address within program space, without going
through data space. The TBLRDH and TBLWTH instructions are the only method whereby the upper 8 bits of a
program space word can be accessed as data.
2.
3.
The PC is incremented by two for each successive
24-bit program word. This allows program memory
addresses to directly map to data space addresses.
Program memory can thus be regarded as two 16-bit
word-wide address spaces, residing side by side, each
with the same address range. TBLRDL and TBLWTL
access the space which contains the lsw, and TBLRDH
and TBLWTH access the space which contains the
MSB.
4.
Figure 3-2 shows how the EA is created for table operations and data space accesses (PSV = 1). Here,
P<23:0> refers to a program space word, whereas
D<15:0> refers to a data space word.
FIGURE 3-3:
TBLRDL: Table Read Low
Word: Read the lsw of the program
address;
P<15:0> maps to D<15:0>.
Byte: Read one of the LSBs of the program
address;
P<7:0> maps to the destination byte when byte
select = 0;
P<15:8> maps to the destination byte when byte
select = 1.
TBLWTL: Table Write Low (refer to Section 6.0
“Flash Program Memory” for details on Flash
programming).
TBLRDH: Table Read High
Word: Read the msw of the program
address;
P<23:16> maps to D<7:0>; D<15:8> will always
be = 0.
Byte: Read one of the MSBs of the program
address;
P<23:16> maps to the destination byte when
byte select = 0;
The destination byte will always be = 0 when
byte select = 1.
TBLWTH: Table Write High (refer to Section 6.0
“Flash Program Memory” for details on Flash
programming).
PROGRAM DATA TABLE ACCESS (lsw)
PC Address
0x000000
0x000002
0x000004
0x000006
Program Memory
‘Phantom’ Byte
(Read as ‘0’).
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
23
16
8
0
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
TBLRDL.W
TBLRDL.B (Wn<0> = 0)
TBLRDL.B (Wn<0> = 1)
DS70141E-page 25
dsPIC30F3010/3011
FIGURE 3-4:
PROGRAM DATA TABLE ACCESS (MSB)
TBLRDH.W
PC Address
0x000000
0x000002
0x000004
0x000006
23
16
8
0
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
TBLRDH.B (Wn<0> = 0)
Program Memory
‘Phantom’ Byte
(Read as ‘0’)
3.1.2
TBLRDH.B (Wn<0> = 1)
DATA ACCESS FROM PROGRAM
MEMORY USING PROGRAM SPACE
VISIBILITY
The upper 32 Kbytes of data space may optionally be
mapped into any 16K word program space page. This
provides transparent access of stored constant data
from X data space, without the need to use special
instructions (i.e., TBLRDL/H, TBLWTL/H instructions).
Program space access through the data space occurs
if the MSb of the data space, EA, is set and program
space visibility is enabled, by setting the PSV bit in the
Core Control register (CORCON). The functions of
CORCON are discussed in Section 2.4 “DSP
Engine”.
Data accesses to this area add an additional cycle to
the instruction being executed, since two program
memory fetches are required.
Note that the upper half of addressable data space is
always part of the X data space. Therefore, when a
DSP operation uses program space mapping to access
this memory region, Y data space should typically
contain state (variable) data for DSP operations,
whereas X data space should typically contain
coefficient (constant) data.
Although each data space address, 0x8000 and higher,
maps directly into a corresponding program memory
address (see Figure 3-5), only the lower 16 bits of the
24-bit program word are used to contain the data. The
upper 8 bits should be programmed to force an illegal
instruction to maintain machine robustness. Refer
to the “dsPIC30F/33F Programmer’s Reference
Manual” (DS70157) for details on instruction encoding.
DS70141E-page 26
Note that by incrementing the PC by 2 for each
program memory word, the 15 LSbs of data space
addresses directly map to the 15 LSbs in the
corresponding program space addresses. The
remaining bits are provided by the Program Space
Visibility Page register, PSVPAG<7:0>, as shown in
Figure 3-5.
Note:
PSV access is temporarily disabled during
table reads/writes.
For instructions that use PSV which are executed
outside a REPEAT loop:
• The following instructions will require one instruction cycle in addition to the specified execution
time:
- MAC class of instructions with data operand
prefetch
- MOV instructions
- MOV.D instructions
• All other instructions will require two instruction
cycles in addition to the specified execution time
of the instruction.
For instructions that use PSV which are executed
inside a REPEAT loop:
• The following instances will require two instruction
cycles in addition to the specified execution time
of the instruction:
- Execution in the first iteration
- Execution in the last iteration
- Execution prior to exiting the loop due to an
interrupt
- Execution upon re-entering the loop after an
interrupt is serviced
• Any other iteration of the REPEAT loop will allow
the instruction, accessing data using PSV, to
execute in a single cycle.
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
dsPIC30F3010/3011
FIGURE 3-5:
DATA SPACE WINDOW INTO PROGRAM SPACE OPERATION
Program Space
Data Space
0x000100
0x0000
EA<15> = 0
Data
Space
EA
PSVPAG(1)
0x00
8
15
16
15
EA<15> = 1
0x8000
Address
15 Concatenation 23
23
15
0
0x001200
Upper half of Data
Space is mapped
into Program Space
0x003FFE
0xFFFF
Data Read
BSET
MOV
MOV
MOV
CORCON,#2
#0x00, W0
W0, PSVPAG
0x9200, W0
; PSV bit set
; Set PSVPAG register
; Access program memory location
; using a data space access
Note: PSVPAG is an 8-bit register, containing bits<22:15> of the program space address
(i.e., it defines the page in program space to which the upper half of data space is being mapped).
3.2
Data Address Space
The core has two data spaces. The data spaces can be
considered either separate (for some DSP instructions), or as one unified linear address range (for MCU
instructions). The data spaces are accessed using two
Address Generation Units (AGUs) and separate data
paths.
3.2.1
DATA SPACE MEMORY MAP
The data space memory is split into two blocks, X and
Y data space. A key element of this architecture is that
Y space is a subset of X space, and is fully contained
within X space. In order to provide an apparent linear
addressing space, X and Y spaces have contiguous
addresses.
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
When executing any instruction other than one of the
MAC class of instructions, the X block consists of the
64 Kbyte data address space (including all Y
addresses). When executing one of the MAC class of
instructions, the X block consists of the 64 Kbyte data
address space excluding the Y address block (for data
reads only). In other words, all other instructions regard
the entire data memory as one composite address
space. The MAC class instructions extract the Y
address space from data space and address it using
EAs sourced from W10 and W11. The remaining X data
space is addressed using W8 and W9. Both address
spaces are concurrently accessed only with the MAC
class instructions.
A data space memory map is shown in Figure 3-6.
Figure 3-7 shows a graphical summary of how X and Y
data spaces are accessed for MCU and DSP
instructions.
DS70141E-page 27
dsPIC30F3010/3011
FIGURE 3-6:
dsPIC30F3010/3011 DATA SPACE MEMORY MAP
MSB
Address
MSB
2 Kbyte
SFR Space
0x0001
LSB
Address
16 bits
LSB
SFR Space
0x0000
0x07FE
0x0800
0x07FF
0x0801
X Data RAM (X)
1 Kbyte
SRAM Space
0x09FF
0x0A01
0x09FE
0x0A00
3072 Bytes
Near
Data
Space
Y Data RAM (Y)
0x0BFF
0xBFE
0x0C01
0x0C00
0x8001
0x8000
X Data
Unimplemented (X)
Optionally
Mapped
into Program
Memory
0xFFFF
DS70141E-page 28
0xFFFE
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
dsPIC30F3010/3011
DATA SPACE FOR MCU AND DSP (MAC CLASS) INSTRUCTIONS EXAMPLE
SFR SPACE
SFR SPACE
X SPACE
FIGURE 3-7:
Y SPACE
UNUSED
X SPACE
(Y SPACE)
X SPACE
UNUSED
UNUSED
Non-MAC Class Ops (Read/Write)
MAC Class Ops (Write)
MAC Class Ops Read-Only
Indirect EA Using any W
Indirect EA Using W10, W11Indirect EA Using W8, W9
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70141E-page 29
dsPIC30F3010/3011
3.2.2
DATA SPACES
3.2.3
The X data space is used by all instructions and supports all addressing modes. There are separate read
and write data buses. The X read data bus is the return
data path for all instructions that view data space as
combined X and Y address space. It is also the X
address space data path for the dual operand read
instructions (MAC class). The X write data bus is the
only write path to data space for all instructions.
The X data space also supports Modulo Addressing for
all instructions, subject to addressing mode restrictions. Bit-Reversed Addressing is only supported for
writes to X data space.
The Y data space is used in concert with the X data
space by the MAC class of instructions (CLR, ED,
EDAC, MAC, MOVSAC, MPY, MPY.N and MSC) to
provide two concurrent data read paths. No writes
occur across the Y bus. This class of instructions
dedicates two W register pointers, W10 and W11, to
always address Y data space, independent of X data
space, whereas W8 and W9 always address X data
space. Note that during accumulator write back, the
data address space is considered a combination of X
and Y data spaces, so the write occurs across the X
bus. Consequently, the write can be to any address in
the entire data space.
The Y data space can only be used for the data
prefetch operation associated with the MAC class of
instructions. It also supports Modulo Addressing for
automated circular buffers. Of course, all other instructions can access the Y data address space through the
X data path, as part of the composite linear space.
The boundary between the X and Y data spaces is
defined as shown in Figure 3-6 and is not userprogrammable. Should an EA point to data outside its
own assigned address space, or to a location outside
physical memory, an all zero word/byte will be returned.
For example, although Y address space is visible by all
non-MAC instructions using any addressing mode, an
attempt by a MAC instruction to fetch data from that
space, using W8 or W9 (X Space Pointers), will return
0x0000.
TABLE 3-2:
EFFECT OF INVALID
MEMORY ACCESSES
Attempted Operation
Data Returned
EA = an unimplemented address
0x0000
W8 or W9 used to access Y data
space in a MAC instruction
0x0000
W10 or W11 used to access X
data space in a MAC instruction
0x0000
DATA SPACE WIDTH
The core data width is 16 bits. All internal registers are
organized as 16-bit wide words. Data space memory is
organized in byte addressable, 16-bit wide blocks.
3.2.4
DATA ALIGNMENT
To help maintain backward compatibility with PIC®
MCU devices and improve data space memory usage
efficiency, the dsPIC30F instruction set supports both
word and byte operations. Data is aligned in data memory and registers as words, but all data space EAs
resolve to bytes. Data byte reads will read the complete
word, which contains the byte, using the LSb of any EA
to determine which byte to select. The selected byte is
placed onto the LSB of the X data path (no byte
accesses are possible from the Y data path as the MAC
class of instruction can only fetch words). That is, data
memory and registers are organized as two parallel
byte-wide entities with shared (word) address decode,
but separate write lines. Data byte writes only write to
the corresponding side of the array or register which
matches the byte address.
As a consequence of this byte accessibility, all effective
address calculations (including those generated by the
DSP operations, which are restricted to word-sized
data) are internally scaled to step through word-aligned
memory. For example, the core would recognize that
Post-Modified Register Indirect Addressing mode,
[Ws++], will result in a value of Ws + 1 for byte
operations and Ws + 2 for word operations.
All word accesses must be aligned to an even address.
Misaligned word data fetches are not supported, so
care must be taken when mixing byte and word operations, or translating from 8-bit MCU code. Should a misaligned read or write be attempted, an address error
trap will be generated. If the error occurred on a read,
the instruction underway is completed, whereas if it
occurred on a write, the instruction will be executed but
the write will not occur. In either case, a trap will then
be executed, allowing the system and/or user to examine the machine state prior to execution of the address
Fault.
FIGURE 3-8:
15
DATA ALIGNMENT
MSB
87
LSB
0
0001
Byte 1
Byte 0
0000
0003
Byte 3
Byte 2
0002
0005
Byte 5
Byte 4
0004
All effective addresses are 16 bits wide and point to
bytes within the data space. Therefore, the data space
address range is 64 Kbytes or 32K words.
DS70141E-page 30
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
dsPIC30F3010/3011
A sign-extend (SE) instruction is provided to allow
users to translate 8-bit signed data to 16-bit signed
values. Alternatively, for 16-bit unsigned data, users
can clear the MSB of any W register by executing a
zero-extend (ZE) instruction on the appropriate
address.
Although most instructions are capable of operating on
word or byte data sizes, it should be noted that some
instructions, including the DSP instructions, operate
only on words.
3.2.5
NEAR DATA SPACE
An 8 Kbyte ‘near’ data space is reserved in X address
memory space between 0x0000 and 0x1FFF, which is
directly addressable via a 13-bit absolute address field
within all memory direct instructions. The remaining X
address space and all of the Y address space is
addressable indirectly. Additionally, the whole of X data
space is addressable using MOV instructions, which
support memory direct addressing with a 16-bit
address field.
3.2.6
SOFTWARE STACK
The dsPIC DSC device contains a software stack. W15
is used as the Stack Pointer.
The Stack Pointer always points to the first available
free word and grows from lower addresses towards
higher addresses. It pre-decrements for stack pops and
post-increments for stack pushes, as shown in
Figure 3-9. Note that for a PC push during any CALL
instruction, the MSB of the PC is zero-extended before
the push, ensuring that the MSB is always clear.
Note:
A PC push during exception processing
will concatenate the SRL register to the
MSB of the PC prior to the push.
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
There is a Stack Pointer Limit register (SPLIM) associated with the Stack Pointer. SPLIM is uninitialized at
Reset. As is the case for the Stack Pointer, SPLIM<0>
is forced to ‘0’, because all stack operations must be
word-aligned. Whenever an Effective Address (EA) is
generated using W15 as a source or destination
pointer, the address thus generated is compared with
the value in SPLIM. If the contents of the Stack Pointer
(W15) and the SPLIM register are equal and a push
operation is performed, a stack error trap will not occur.
The stack error trap will occur on a subsequent push
operation. Thus, for example, if it is desirable to cause
a stack error trap when the stack grows beyond
address 0x2000 in RAM, initialize the SPLIM with the
value, 0x1FFE.
Similarly, a Stack Pointer underflow (stack error) trap is
generated when the Stack Pointer address is found to
be less than 0x0800, thus preventing the stack from
interfering with the Special Function Register (SFR)
space.
A write to the SPLIM register should not be immediately
followed by an indirect read operation using W15.
FIGURE 3-9:
CALL STACK FRAME
0x0000 15
Stack Grows Towards
Higher Address
All byte loads into any W register are loaded into the
LSB. The MSB is not modified.
0
PC<15:0>
W15 (before CALL)
000000000 PC<22:16>
<Free Word>
W15 (after CALL)
POP: [--W15]
PUSH: [W15++]
DS70141E-page 31
DS70141E-page 32
001A
001C
001E
0020
0022
0024
0026
0028
002A
002C
002E
0030
0032
0034
0036
0038
003A
003C
003E
0040
0042
W13
W14
W15
SPLIM
ACCAL
ACCAH
ACCAU
ACCBL
ACCBH
ACCBU
PCL
PCH
TBLPAG
PSVPAG
RCOUNT
DCOUNT
DOSTARTL
DOSTARTH
DOENDL
DOENDH
SR
OA
—
—
—
—
—
OB
—
—
—
—
—
SA
—
—
—
—
—
SB
—
—
—
—
—
OAB
—
—
—
—
—
Sign-Extension (ACCB<39>)
SAB
—
—
—
—
—
Bit 10
Sign-Extension (ACCA<39>)
Bit 11
DA
—
—
—
—
—
DCOUNT
RCOUNT
—
—
—
PCL
ACCBH
ACCBL
ACCAH
ACCAL
SPLIM
W15
W14
W13
W12
W11
W10
W9
W8
W7
W6
W5
W4
W3
W2
W1
—
DC
—
DOENDL
IPL2
—
—
—
Bit 7
W0/WREG
Bit 8
DOSTARTL
Bit 9
Refer to “dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual” (DS70046) for descriptions of register bit fields.
0018
W12
Bit 12
Note 1:
0016
W11
Bit 13
u = uninitialized bit; — = unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’
0014
W10
Bit 14
Legend:
0010
0012
000E
W8
000C
W6
W7
W9
0008
000A
W4
W5
0004
0006
W2
W3
0000
0002
W0
Bit 15
CORE REGISTER MAP(1)
Address
(Home)
W1
SFR Name
TABLE 3-3:
IPL1
Bit 6
IPL0
Bit 5
Bit 3
RA
N
DOENDH
DOSTARTH
PSVPAG
TBLPAG
PCH
ACCBU
ACCAU
Bit 4
OV
Bit 2
Z
Bit 1
C
0
0
Bit 0
0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0uuu uuuu
uuuu uuuu uuuu uuu0
0000 0000 0uuu uuuu
uuuu uuuu uuuu uuu0
uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu
uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu
0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 1000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000
Reset State
dsPIC30F3010/3011
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
—
0046
0048
XMODSRT
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
—
—
EDT
Bit 11
DL1
Bit 9
BWM<3:0>
DL2
Bit 10
YE<15:1>
YS<15:1>
XE<15:1>
XS<15:1>
DL0
Bit 8
Refer to “dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual” (DS70046) for descriptions of register bit fields.
0052
DISICNT
BREN
—
US
Bit 12
Note 1:
0050
—
—
Bit 13
u = uninitialized bit; — = unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’
004E
YMODEND
XBREV
YMODEN
—
Bit 14
Legend:
004A
004C
XMODEND
YMODSRT
XMODEN
0044
CORCON
MODCON
SFR Name
Bit 15
CORE REGISTER MAP(1) (CONTINUED)
Address
(Home)
TABLE 3-3:
Bit 4
SATDW ACCSAT
Bit 5
YWM<3:0>
SATB
Bit 6
DISICNT<13:0>
XB<14:0>
SATA
Bit 7
IPL3
Bit 3
RND
Bit 1
XWM<3:0>
PSV
Bit 2
1
0
1
0
IF
Bit 0
0000 0000 0000 0000
uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu
uuuu uuuu uuuu uuu1
uuuu uuuu uuuu uuu0
uuuu uuuu uuuu uuu1
uuuu uuuu uuuu uuu0
0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0010 0000
Reset State
dsPIC30F3010/3011
DS70141E-page 33
dsPIC30F3010/3011
NOTES:
DS70141E-page 34
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
dsPIC30F3010/3011
4.0
Note:
ADDRESS GENERATOR UNITS
This data sheet summarizes features of
this group of dsPIC30F devices and is not
intended to be a complete reference
source. For more information on the CPU,
peripherals, register descriptions and general device functionality, refer to the
“dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual”
(DS70046). For more information on the
device instruction set and programming,
refer to the “dsPIC30F/33F Programmer’s
Reference Manual” (DS70157).
The dsPIC DSC core contains two independent
address generator units: the X AGU and Y AGU. The Y
AGU supports word-sized data reads for the DSP MAC
class of instructions only. The dsPIC DSC AGUs
support three types of data addressing:
• Linear Addressing
• Modulo (Circular) Addressing
• Bit-Reversed Addressing
Linear and Modulo Data Addressing modes can be
applied to data space or program space. Bit-Reversed
Addressing is only applicable to data space addresses.
4.1
Instruction Addressing Modes
The addressing modes in Table 4-1 form the basis of
the addressing modes optimized to support the specific
features of individual instructions. The addressing
modes provided in the MAC class of instructions are
somewhat different from those in the other instruction
types.
TABLE 4-1:
4.1.1
FILE REGISTER INSTRUCTIONS
Most file register instructions use a 13-bit address field
(f) to directly address data present in the first
8192 bytes of data memory (near data space). Most file
register instructions employ a working register, W0,
which is denoted as WREG in these instructions. The
destination is typically either the same file register, or
WREG (with the exception of the MUL instruction),
which writes the result to a register or register pair. The
MOV instruction allows additional flexibility and can
access the entire data space during file register
operation.
4.1.2
MCU INSTRUCTIONS
The three-operand MCU instructions are of the form:
Operand 3 = Operand 1 <function> Operand 2
where Operand 1 is always a working register (i.e., the
addressing mode can only be Register Direct), which is
referred to as Wb. Operand 2 can be a W register,
fetched from data memory, or a 5-bit literal. The result
location can be either a W register or an address
location. The following addressing modes are
supported by MCU instructions:
•
•
•
•
•
Register Direct
Register Indirect
Register Indirect Post-Modified
Register Indirect Pre-Modified
5-bit or 10-bit Literal
Note:
Not all instructions support all the addressing modes given above. Individual
instructions may support different subsets
of these addressing modes.
FUNDAMENTAL ADDRESSING MODES SUPPORTED
Addressing Mode
Description
File Register Direct
The address of the file register is specified explicitly.
Register Direct
The contents of a register are accessed directly.
Register Indirect
The contents of Wn forms the EA.
Register Indirect Post-Modified
The contents of Wn forms the EA. Wn is post-modified (incremented or
decremented) by a constant value.
Register Indirect Pre-Modified
Wn is pre-modified (incremented or decremented) by a signed constant value
to form the EA.
Register Indirect with Register Offset The sum of Wn and Wb forms the EA.
Register Indirect with Literal Offset
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
The sum of Wn and a literal forms the EA.
DS70141E-page 35
dsPIC30F3010/3011
4.1.3
MOVE AND ACCUMULATOR
INSTRUCTIONS
Move instructions and the DSP Accumulator class of
instructions provide a greater degree of addressing
flexibility than other instructions. In addition to the
addressing modes supported by most MCU instructions, move and accumulator instructions also support
Register Indirect with Register Offset Addressing
mode, also referred to as Register Indexed mode.
Note:
For the MOV instructions, the addressing
mode specified in the instruction can differ
for the source and destination EA. However, the 4-bit Wb (Register Offset) field is
shared between both source and
destination (but typically only used by
one).
In summary, the following addressing modes are
supported by move and accumulator instructions:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Register Direct
Register Indirect
Register Indirect Post-Modified
Register Indirect Pre-Modified
Register Indirect with Register Offset (Indexed)
Register Indirect with Literal Offset
8-bit Literal
16-bit Literal
Note:
4.1.4
Not all instructions support all the addressing modes given above. Individual
instructions may support different subsets
of these addressing modes.
MAC INSTRUCTIONS
The dual source operand DSP instructions (CLR, ED,
EDAC, MAC, MPY, MPY.N, MOVSAC and MSC), also
referred to as MAC instructions, utilize a simplified set of
addressing modes to allow the user to effectively
manipulate the Data Pointers through register indirect
tables.
The two source operand prefetch registers must be a
member of the set {W8, W9, W10, W11}. For data
reads, W8 and W9 will always be directed to the X
RAGU and W10 and W11 will always be directed to the
Y AGU. The effective addresses generated (before and
after modification) must, therefore, be valid addresses
within X data space for W8 and W9 and Y data space
for W10 and W11.
Note:
In summary, the following addressing modes are
supported by the MAC class of instructions:
•
•
•
•
•
Register Indirect
Register Indirect Post-Modified by 2
Register Indirect Post-Modified by 4
Register Indirect Post-Modified by 6
Register Indirect with Register Offset (Indexed)
4.1.5
OTHER INSTRUCTIONS
Besides the various addressing modes outlined above,
some instructions use literal constants of various sizes.
For example, BRA (branch) instructions use 16-bit
signed literals to specify the branch destination directly,
whereas the DISI instruction uses a 14-bit unsigned
literal field. In some instructions, such as ADD Acc, the
source of an operand or result is implied by the opcode
itself. Certain operations, such as NOP, do not have any
operands.
4.2
Modulo Addressing
Modulo Addressing is a method of providing an automated means to support circular data buffers using
hardware. The objective is to remove the need for software to perform data address boundary checks when
executing tightly looped code, as is typical in many
DSP algorithms.
Modulo Addressing can operate in either data or
program space (since the Data Pointer mechanism is
essentially the same for both). One circular buffer can be
supported in each of the X (which also provides the
pointers into program space) and Y data spaces. Modulo
Addressing can operate on any W register pointer.
However, it is not advisable to use W14 or W15 for
Modulo Addressing, since these two registers are used
as the Stack Frame Pointer and Stack Pointer,
respectively.
In general, any particular circular buffer can only be
configured to operate in one direction, as there are
certain restrictions on the buffer start address (for
incrementing buffers) or end address (for decrementing
buffers) based upon the direction of the buffer.
The only exception to the usage restrictions is for
buffers which have a power-of-2 length. As these
buffers satisfy the start and end address criteria, they
may operate in a Bidirectional mode, (i.e., address
boundary checks will be performed on both the lower
and upper address boundaries).
Register Indirect with Register Offset
Addressing is only available for W9 (in X
space) and W11 (in Y space).
DS70141E-page 36
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
dsPIC30F3010/3011
4.2.1
START AND END ADDRESS
4.2.2
The Modulo Addressing scheme requires that a
starting and an end address be specified and loaded
into the 16-bit Modulo Buffer Address registers:
XMODSRT, XMODEND, YMODSRT and YMODEND
(see Table 3-3).
Note:
Y-space Modulo Addressing EA calculations assume word-sized data (LSb of
every EA is always clear).
The length of a circular buffer is not directly specified. It
is determined by the difference between the
corresponding start and end addresses. The maximum
possible length of the circular buffer is 32K words
(64 Kbytes).
W ADDRESS REGISTER
SELECTION
The Modulo and Bit-Reversed Addressing Control
register MODCON<15:0> contains enable flags, as
well as a W register field to specify the W address
registers. The XWM and YWM fields select which
registers will operate with Modulo Addressing. If
XWM = 15, X RAGU and X WAGU Modulo Addressing
are disabled. Similarly, if YWM = 15, Y AGU Modulo
Addressing is disabled.
The X Address Space Pointer W register (XWM), to
which Modulo Addressing is to be applied, is stored in
MODCON<3:0> (see Table 3-3). Modulo Addressing is
enabled for X data space when XWM is set to any value
other than 15 and the XMODEN bit is set at
MODCON<15>.
The Y Address Space Pointer W register (YWM), to
which Modulo Addressing is to be applied, is stored in
MODCON<7:4>. Modulo Addressing is enabled for Y
data space when YWM is set to any value other than 15
and the YMODEN bit is set at MODCON<14>.
FIGURE 4-1:
MODULO ADDRESSING OPERATION EXAMPLE
Byte
Address
MOV
MOV
MOV
MOV
MOV
MOV
MOV
MOV
DO
MOV
AGAIN:
0x1100
#0x1100,W0
W0, XMODSRT
#0x1163,W0
W0,MODEND
#0x8001,W0
W0,MODCON
#0x0000,W0
#0x1110,W1
AGAIN,#0x31
W0, [W1++]
INC
W0,W0
;set modulo start address
;set modulo end address
;enable W1, X AGU for modulo
;W0 holds buffer fill value
;point W1 to buffer
;fill the 50 buffer locations
;fill the next location
;increment the fill value
0x1163
Start Addr = 0x1100
End Addr = 0x1163
Length = 0x0032 words
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70141E-page 37
dsPIC30F3010/3011
4.2.3
MODULO ADDRESSING
APPLICABILITY
Modulo Addressing can be applied to the Effective
Address (EA) calculation associated with any W register. It is important to realize that the address boundaries check for addresses less than or greater than the
upper (for incrementing buffers) and lower (for decrementing buffers) boundary addresses (not just equal
to). Address changes may, therefore, jump beyond
boundaries and still be adjusted correctly.
Note:
4.3
The modulo corrected effective address is
written back to the register only when PreModify or Post-Modify Addressing mode is
used to compute the effective address.
When an address offset (e.g., [W7 + W2])
is used, Modulo Addressing correction is
performed, but the contents of the register
remains unchanged.
Bit-Reversed Addressing
Bit-Reversed Addressing is intended to simplify data
re-ordering for radix-2 FFT algorithms. It is supported
by the X AGU for data writes only.
The modifier, which may be a constant value or register
contents, is regarded as having its bit order reversed.
The address source and destination are kept in normal
order. Thus, the only operand requiring reversal is the
modifier.
4.3.1
If the length of a bit-reversed buffer is M = 2N bytes,
then the last ‘N’ bits of the data buffer start address
must be zeros.
XB<14:0> is the bit-reversed address modifier or ‘pivot
point’ which is typically a constant. In the case of an
FFT computation, its value is equal to half of the FFT
data buffer size.
Note:
When enabled, Bit-Reversed Addressing will only be
executed for Register Indirect with Pre-Increment or
Post-Increment Addressing and word-sized data
writes. It will not function for any other addressing
mode or for byte-sized data, and normal addresses will
be generated instead. When Bit-Reversed Addressing
is active, the W Address Pointer will always be added
to the address modifier (XB) and the offset associated
with the Register Indirect Addressing mode will be
ignored. In addition, as word-sized data is a
requirement, the LSb of the EA is ignored (and always
clear).
Note:
BIT-REVERSED ADDRESSING
IMPLEMENTATION
Bit-Reversed Addressing is enabled when:
1.
2.
3.
BWM (W register selection) in the MODCON
register is any value other than 15 (the stack can
not be accessed using Bit-Reversed
Addressing) and
the BREN bit is set in the XBREV register and
the addressing mode used is Register Indirect
with Pre-Increment or Post-Increment.
FIGURE 4-2:
All bit-reversed EA calculations assume
word-sized data (LSb of every EA is
always clear). The XB value is scaled
accordingly to generate compatible (byte)
addresses.
Modulo Addressing and Bit-Reversed
Addressing should not be enabled
together. In the event that the user
attempts to do this, Bit-Reversed Addressing will assume priority when active for the
X WAGU, and X WAGU Modulo Addressing will be disabled. However, Modulo
Addressing will continue to function in the
X RAGU.
If Bit-Reversed Addressing has already been enabled
by setting the BREN (XBREV<15>) bit, then a write to
the XBREV register should not be immediately followed
by an indirect read operation using the W register that
has been designated as the Bit-Reversed Pointer.
BIT-REVERSED ADDRESS EXAMPLE
Sequential Address
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8
b7 b6 b5 b4
b3 b2 b1
0
Bit Locations Swapped Left-to-Right
Around Center of Binary Value
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8
b7 b6 b5 b1
b2 b3 b4
0
Bit-Reversed Address
Pivot Point
XB = 0x0008 for a 16-word Bit-Reversed Buffer
DS70141E-page 38
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
dsPIC30F3010/3011
TABLE 4-2:
BIT-REVERSED ADDRESS SEQUENCE (16-ENTRY)
Normal
Address
A3
A2
A1
A0
Bit-Reversed
Address
Decimal
A3
A2
A1
A0
Decimal
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
8
0
0
1
0
2
0
1
0
0
4
0
0
1
1
3
1
1
0
0
12
0
1
0
0
4
0
0
1
0
2
0
1
0
1
5
1
0
1
0
10
0
1
1
0
6
0
1
1
0
6
0
1
1
1
7
1
1
1
0
14
1
0
0
0
8
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
9
1
0
0
1
9
1
0
1
0
10
0
1
0
1
5
1
0
1
1
11
1
1
0
1
13
1
1
0
0
12
0
0
1
1
3
1
1
0
1
13
1
0
1
1
11
1
1
1
0
14
0
1
1
1
7
1
1
1
1
15
1
1
1
1
15
TABLE 4-3:
BIT-REVERSED ADDRESS MODIFIER VALUES FOR XBREV REGISTER
Buffer Size (Words)
XB<14:0> Bit-Reversed Address Modifier Value
512
0x0100
256
0x0080
128
0x0040
64
0x0020
32
0x0010
16
0x0008
8
0x0004
4
0x0002
2
0x0001
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70141E-page 39
dsPIC30F3010/3011
NOTES:
DS70141E-page 40
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
dsPIC30F3010/3011
5.0
Note:
INTERRUPTS
This data sheet summarizes features of
this group of dsPIC30F devices and is not
intended to be a complete reference
source. For more information on the CPU,
peripherals, register descriptions and general device functionality, refer to the
“dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual”
(DS70046). For more information on the
device instruction set and programming,
refer to the “dsPIC30F/33F Programmer’s
Reference Manual” (DS70157).
The dsPIC30F3010/3011 has 29 interrupt sources and
4 processor exceptions (traps), which must be
arbitrated based on a priority scheme.
The CPU is responsible for reading the Interrupt
Vector Table (IVT) and transferring the address contained in the interrupt vector to the program counter.
The interrupt vector is transferred from the program
data bus into the program counter via a 24-bit wide
multiplexer on the input of the program counter.
The Interrupt Vector Table (IVT) and Alternate
Interrupt Vector Table (AIVT) are placed near the
beginning of program memory (0x000004). The IVT
and AIVT are shown in Figure 5-1.
The interrupt controller is responsible for preprocessing the interrupts and processor exceptions,
prior to their being presented to the processor core.
The peripheral interrupts and traps are enabled,
prioritized and controlled using centralized Special
Function Registers (SFR):
• IFS0<15:0>, IFS1<15:0>, IFS2<15:0>
All interrupt request flags are maintained in these
three registers. The flags are set by their respective peripherals or external signals, and they are
cleared via software.
• IEC0<15:0>, IEC1<15:0>, IEC2<15:0>
All interrupt enable control bits are maintained in
these three registers. These control bits are used
to individually enable interrupts from the
peripherals or external signals.
• IPC0<15:0>... IPC11<7:0>
The user-assignable priority level associated with
each of these interrupts is held centrally in these
twelve registers.
• IPL<3:0> The current CPU priority level is
explicitly stored in the IPL bits. IPL<3> is present
in the CORCON register, whereas IPL<2:0> are
present in the STATUS Register (SR) in the
processor core.
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
• INTCON1<15:0>, INTCON2<15:0>
Global interrupt control functions are derived from
these two registers. INTCON1 contains the
control and status flags for the processor
exceptions. The INTCON2 register controls the
external interrupt request signal behavior and the
use of the alternate vector table.
Note:
Interrupt flag bits get set when an interrupt
condition occurs, regardless of the state of
its corresponding enable bit. User
software should ensure the appropriate
Interrupt flag bits are clear prior to
enabling an interrupt.
All interrupt sources can be user-assigned to one of
7 priority levels, 1 through 7, via the IPCx registers.
Each interrupt source is associated with an interrupt
vector, as shown in Table 5-1. Levels 7 and 1 represent the highest and lowest maskable priorities,
respectively.
Note:
Assigning a priority level of 0 to an
interrupt source is equivalent to disabling
that interrupt.
If the NSTDIS bit (INTCON1<15>) is set, nesting of
interrupts is prevented. Thus, if an interrupt is currently
being serviced, processing of a new interrupt is
prevented, even if the new interrupt is of higher priority
than the one currently being serviced.
Note:
The IPL bits become read-only whenever
the NSTDIS bit has been set to ‘1’.
Certain interrupts have specialized control bits for
features like edge or level triggered interrupts, interrupt-on-change, etc. Control of these features remains
within the peripheral module which generates the
interrupt.
The DISI instruction can be used to disable the
processing of interrupts of priorities 6 and lower for a
certain number of instructions, during which the DISI bit
(INTCON2<14>) remains set.
When an interrupt is serviced, the PC is loaded with the
address stored in the vector location in program
memory that corresponds to the interrupt. There are 63
different vectors within the IVT (refer to Figure 5-2).
These vectors are contained in locations 0x000004
through 0x0000FE of program memory (refer to
Figure 5-2). These locations contain 24-bit addresses,
and in order to preserve robustness, an address error
trap will take place should the PC attempt to fetch any
of these words during normal execution. This prevents
execution of random data as a result of accidentally
decrementing a PC into vector space, accidentally
mapping a data space address into vector space or the
PC rolling over to 0x000000 after reaching the end of
implemented program memory space. Execution of a
GOTO instruction to this vector space will also generate
an address error trap.
DS70141E-page 41
dsPIC30F3010/3011
5.1
Interrupt Priority
The user-assignable Interrupt Priority (IP<2:0>) bits for
each individual interrupt source are located in the
3 LSbs of each nibble, within the IPCx register(s). Bit
3 of each nibble is not used and is read as a ‘0’. These
bits define the priority level assigned to a particular
interrupt by the user.
Note:
The user-assignable priority levels start at
0, as the lowest priority, and Level 7, as
the highest priority.
Since more than one interrupt request source may be
assigned to a specific user-assigned priority level, a
means is provided to assign priority within a given level.
This method is called “Natural Order Priority”.
Natural Order Priority is determined by the position of
an interrupt in the vector table, and only affects
interrupt operation when multiple interrupts with the
same user-assigned priority become pending at the
same time.
Table 5-1 lists the interrupt numbers and interrupt
sources for the dsPIC DSC devices and their
associated vector numbers.
Note 1: The natural order priority scheme has 0
as the highest priority and 53 as the
lowest priority.
2:The natural order priority number is the
same as the INT number.
The ability for the user to assign every interrupt to one
of seven priority levels implies that the user can assign
a very high overall priority level to an interrupt with a
low natural order priority. For example, the PWM Fault
A Interrupt can be given a priority of 7. The INT0
(external interrupt 0) may be assigned to priority
Level 1, thus giving it a very low effective priority.
TABLE 5-1:
INT
Number
INTERRUPT VECTOR TABLE
Vector
Number
Interrupt Source
Highest Natural Order Priority
0
8
INT0 – External Interrupt 0
1
9
IC1 – Input Capture 1
2
10
OC1 – Output Compare 1
3
11
T1 – Timer 1
4
12
IC2 – Input Capture 2
5
13
OC2 – Output Compare 2
6
14
T2 – Timer 2
7
15
T3 – Timer 3
8
16
SPI #1
9
17
U1RX – UART1 Receiver
10
18
U1TX – UART1 Transmitter
11
19
ADC – ADC Convert Done
12
20
NVM – NVM Write Complete
13
21
SI2C – I2C™ Slave Interrupt
14
22
MI2C – I2C Master Interrupt
15
23
Input Change Interrupt
16
24
INT1 – External Interrupt 1
17
25
IC7 – Input Capture 7
18
26
IC8 – Input Capture 8
19
27
OC3 – Output Compare 3*
20
28
OC4 – Output Compare 4*
21
29
T4 – Timer 4
22
30
T5 – Timer 5
23
31
INT2 – External Interrupt 2
24
32
U2RX – UART2 Receiver*
25
33
U2TX – UART2 Transmitter*
26
34
Reserved
27
35
Reserved
28
36
Reserved
29
37
Reserved
30
38
Reserved
31
39
Reserved
32
40
Reserved
33
41
Reserved
34
42
Reserved
35
43
Reserved
36
44
Reserved
37
45
Reserved
38
46
Reserved
39
47
PWM – PWM Period Match
40
48
QEI – QEI Interrupt
41
49
Reserved
42
50
Reserved
43
51
FLTA – PWM Fault A
44
52
Reserved
45-53
53-61 Reserved
Lowest Natural Order Priority
* Available on dsPIC30F3011 only
DS70141E-page 42
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
dsPIC30F3010/3011
5.2
Reset Sequence
A Reset is not a true exception, because the interrupt
controller is not involved in the Reset process. The
processor initializes its registers in response to a
Reset, which forces the PC to zero. The processor then
begins program execution at location 0x000000. A
GOTO instruction is stored in the first program memory
location, immediately followed by the address target for
the GOTO instruction. The processor executes the GOTO
to the specified address and then begins operation at
the specified target (start) address.
5.2.1
5.3
Traps
Traps can be considered as non-maskable interrupts,
indicating a software or hardware error, which adhere
to a predefined priority as shown in Figure 5-1. They
are intended to provide the user a means to correct
erroneous operation during debug and when operating
within the application.
Note:
RESET SOURCES
There are 6 sources of error which will cause a device
reset.
• Watchdog Time-out:
The watchdog has timed out, indicating that the
processor is no longer executing the correct flow
of code.
• Uninitialized W Register Trap:
An attempt to use an uninitialized W register as
an Address Pointer will cause a Reset.
• Illegal Instruction Trap:
Attempted execution of any unused opcodes will
result in an illegal instruction trap. Note that a
fetch of an illegal instruction does not result in an
illegal instruction trap if that instruction is flushed
prior to execution due to a flow change.
• Brown-out Reset (BOR):
A momentary dip in the power supply to the
device has been detected, which may result in
malfunction.
• Trap Lockout:
Occurrence of multiple trap conditions
simultaneously will cause a Reset.
If the user does not intend to take corrective action in the event of a trap error
condition, these vectors must be loaded
with the address of a default handler that
simply contains the RESET instruction. If,
on the other hand, one of the vectors
containing an invalid address is called, an
address error trap is generated.
Note that many of these trap conditions can only be
detected when they occur. Consequently, the questionable instruction is allowed to complete prior to trap
exception processing. If the user chooses to recover
from the error, the result of the erroneous action that
caused the trap may have to be corrected.
There are 8 fixed priority levels for traps: Level 8
through Level 15, which implies that the IPL3 is always
set during processing of a trap.
If the user is not currently executing a trap, and he sets
the IPL<3:0> bits to a value of ‘0111’ (Level 7), then all
interrupts are disabled, but traps can still be processed.
5.3.1
TRAP SOURCES
The following traps are provided with increasing
priority. However, since all traps can be nested, priority
has little effect.
Math Error Trap:
The math error trap executes under the following three
circumstances:
1.
2.
3.
4.
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
Should an attempt be made to divide by zero,
the divide operation will be aborted on a cycle
boundary and the trap taken.
If enabled, a math error trap will be taken when
an arithmetic operation on either accumulator A
or B causes an overflow from bit 31 and the
accumulator guard bits are not utilized.
If enabled, a math error trap will be taken when
an arithmetic operation on either accumulator A
or B causes a catastrophic overflow from bit 39
and all saturation is disabled.
If the shift amount specified in a shift instruction
is greater than the maximum allowed shift
amount, a trap will occur.
DS70141E-page 43
dsPIC30F3010/3011
Address Error Trap:
5.3.2
This trap is initiated when any of the following
circumstances occurs:
It is possible that multiple traps can become active
within the same cycle (e.g., a misaligned word stack
write to an overflowed address). In such a case, the
fixed priority shown in Figure 5-2 is implemented,
which may require the user to check if other traps are
pending, in order to completely correct the Fault.
1.
2.
3.
4.
A misaligned data word access is attempted.
A data fetch from our unimplemented data
memory location is attempted.
A data access of an unimplemented program
memory location is attempted.
An instruction fetch from vector space is
attempted.
Note:
5.
6.
In the MAC class of instructions, wherein
the data space is split into X and Y data
space, unimplemented X space includes
all of Y space, and unimplemented Y
space includes all of X space.
Execution of a “BRA #literal” instruction or a
“GOTO #literal” instruction, where literal
is an unimplemented program memory address.
Executing instructions after modifying the PC to
point to unimplemented program memory
addresses. The PC may be modified by loading
a value into the stack and executing a RETURN
instruction.
Stack Error Trap:
HARD AND SOFT TRAPS
‘Soft’ traps include exceptions of priority Level 8
through Level 11, inclusive. The arithmetic error trap
(Level 11) falls into this category of traps.
‘Hard’ traps include exceptions of priority Level 12
through Level 15, inclusive. The address error
(Level 12), stack error (Level 13) and oscillator error
(Level 14) traps fall into this category.
Each hard trap that occurs must be Acknowledged
before code execution of any type may continue. If a
lower priority hard trap occurs while a higher priority
trap is pending, Acknowledged, or is being processed,
a hard trap conflict will occur.
The device is automatically reset in a hard trap conflict
condition. The TRAPR status bit (RCON<15>) is set
when the Reset occurs, so that the condition may be
detected in software.
FIGURE 5-1:
1.
2.
The Stack Pointer is loaded with a value which
is greater than the (user-programmable) limit
value written into the SPLIM register (stack
overflow).
The Stack Pointer is loaded with a value which
is less than 0x0800 (simple stack underflow).
Decreasing
Priority
This trap is initiated under the following conditions:
IVT
Oscillator Fail Trap:
This trap is initiated if the external oscillator fails and
operation becomes reliant on an internal RC backup.
AIVT
DS70141E-page 44
TRAP VECTORS
Reset – GOTO Instruction
Reset – GOTO Address
Reserved
Oscillator Fail Trap Vector
Address Error Trap Vector
Stack Error Trap Vector
Math Error Trap Vector
Reserved Vector
Reserved Vector
Reserved Vector
Interrupt 0 Vector
Interrupt 1 Vector
—
—
—
Interrupt 52 Vector
Interrupt 53 Vector
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Oscillator Fail Trap Vector
Stack Error Trap Vector
Address Error Trap Vector
Math Error Trap Vector
Reserved Vector
Reserved Vector
Reserved Vector
Interrupt 0 Vector
Interrupt 1 Vector
—
—
—
Interrupt 52 Vector
Interrupt 53 Vector
0x000000
0x000002
0x000004
0x000014
0x00007E
0x000080
0x000082
0x000084
0x000094
0x0000FE
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
dsPIC30F3010/3011
5.4
Interrupt Sequence
5.5
All interrupt event flags are sampled in the beginning of
each instruction cycle by the IFSx registers. A pending
Interrupt Request (IRQ) is indicated by the flag bit
being equal to a ‘1’ in an IFSx register. The IRQ will
cause an interrupt to occur if the corresponding bit in
the Interrupt Enable (IECx) register is set. For the
remainder of the instruction cycle, the priorities of all
pending interrupt requests are evaluated.
If there is a pending IRQ with a priority level greater
than the current processor priority level in the IPL bits,
the processor will be interrupted.
The processor then stacks the current program counter
and the low byte of the processor STATUS register
(SRL), as shown in Figure 5-2. The low byte of the
STATUS register contains the processor priority level at
the time, prior to the beginning of the interrupt cycle.
The processor then loads the priority level for this interrupt into the STATUS register. This action will disable
all lower priority interrupts until the completion of the
Interrupt Service Routine (ISR).
FIGURE 5-2:
INTERRUPT STACK
FRAME
Stack Grows Towards
Higher Address
0x0000 15
0
PC<15:0>
SRL IPL3 PC<22:16>
W15 (before CALL)
<Free Word>
W15 (after CALL)
POP : [--W15]
PUSH : [W15++]
In program memory, the Interrupt Vector Table (IVT) is
followed by the Alternate Interrupt Vector Table (AIVT),
as shown in Figure 5-1. Access to the Alternate Vector
Table is provided by the ALTIVT bit in the INTCON2
register. If the ALTIVT bit is set, all interrupt and
exception processes use the alternate vectors instead
of the default vectors. The alternate vectors are
organized the same as the default vectors. The AIVT
supports emulation and debugging efforts by providing
a means to switch between an application and a
support environment without requiring the interrupt
vectors to be reprogrammed. This feature also enables
switching between applications for evaluation of
different software algorithms at run time.
If the AIVT is not required, the program memory
allocated to the AIVT may be used for other purposes.
AIVT is not a protected section and may be freely
programmed by the user.
5.6
2: The IPL3 bit (CORCON<3>) is always
clear when interrupts are being
processed. It is set only during execution
of traps.
The RETFIE (Return from Interrupt) instruction will
unstack the program counter and STATUS registers to
return the processor to its state prior to the interrupt
sequence.
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
Fast Context Saving
A context saving option is available using Shadow
registers. Shadow registers are provided for the DC, N,
OV, Z and C bits in SR, and the registers, W0 through
W3. The shadows are only one level deep. The
Shadow registers are accessible using the PUSH.S
and POP.S instructions only. When the processor
vectors to an interrupt, the PUSH.S instruction can be
used to store the current value of the aforementioned
registers into their respective Shadow registers.
If an ISR of a certain priority uses the PUSH.S and
POP.S instructions for fast context saving, then a
higher priority ISR should not include the same
instructions. Users must save the key registers in
software during a lower priority interrupt if the higher
priority ISR uses fast context saving.
5.7
Note 1: The user can always lower the priority
level by writing a new value into SR. The
Interrupt Service Routine must clear the
interrupt flag bits in the IFSx register
before lowering the processor interrupt
priority, in order to avoid recursive
interrupts.
Alternate Vector Table
External Interrupt Requests
The dsPIC30F3010/3011 interrupt controller supports
three external interrupt request signals, INT0-INT2.
These inputs are edge sensitive; they require a low-tohigh or a high-to-low transition to generate an interrupt
request. The INTCON2 register has five bits, INT0EPINT4EP, that select the polarity of the edge detection
circuitry.
5.8
Wake-up from Sleep and Idle
The interrupt controller may be used to wake-up the
processor from either Sleep or Idle modes if Sleep or
Idle mode is active when the interrupt is generated.
If an enabled interrupt request of sufficient priority is
received by the interrupt controller, then the standard
interrupt request is presented to the processor. At the
same time, the processor will wake-up from Sleep or
Idle and begin execution of the Interrupt Service
Routine needed to process the interrupt request.
DS70141E-page 45
DS70141E-page 46
0090
0094
0096
0098
009A
009C
009E
00A0
00A2
00A4
00A6
00A8
00AA
IEC1
IEC2
IPC0
IPC1
IPC2
IPC3
IPC4
IPC5
IPC6
IPC7
IPC8
IPC9
IPC10
IPC11
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
FLTAIP<2:0>
PWMIP<2:0>
—
—
—
—
—
INT2IP<2:0>
OC3IP<2:0>
—
—
—
—
—
—
NVMIE
—
—
NVMIF
—
—
CNIP<2:0>
—
T31P<2:0>
T1IP<2:0>
—
—
ADIP<2:0>
—
—
—
SI2CIE
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
MI2CIE
—
CNIE
—
SI2CIF
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
FLTAIE
—
ADIE
FLTAIF
—
ADIF
—
—
Bit 11
—
OVBTE
Bit 9
—
U2TXIF
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
SPI1IF
—
—
—
—
—
—
T5IP<2:0>
QEIIF
—
—
—
—
—
—
QEIIE
U2RXIE
SPI1IE
MI2CIP<2:0>
IC8IP<2:0>
—
U2RXIF
U1TXIP<2:0>
T2IP<2:0>
Bit 8
COVTE
OC1IP<2:0>
—
U2TXIE
U1TXIE U1RXIE
—
—
U1TXIF U1RXIF
—
OVATE
Bit 10
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
PWMIE
INT2IE
T3IE
PWMIF
INT2IF
T3IF
—
—
Bit 7
— = unimplemented, read as ‘0’
Refer to “dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual” (DS70046) for descriptions of register bit fields.
008E
IEC0
Legend:
Note 1:
0088
008C
IFS2
—
0086
IFS1
—
—
MI2CIF
0084
IFS0
—
—
—
DISI
—
0082 ALTIVT
Bit 12
Bit 13
Bit 14
CNIF
0080 NSTDIS
Bit 15
INTCON2
ADR
INTERRUPT CONTROLLER REGISTER MAP(1)
INTCON1
SFR
Name
TABLE 5-2:
—
—
—
—
—
T5IE
T2IE
—
T5IF
T2IF
—
—
Bit 6
Bit 4
OC2IP<2:0>
—
—
INT41IP<2:0>
—
—
U2TXIP<2:0>
T4IP<2:0>
IC7IP<2:0>
SI2CIP<2:0>
U1RXIP<2:0>
—
—
—
—
—
OC4IE
IC2IE
—
OC4IF
IC2IF
—
MATHERR
IC1IP<2:0>
—
T4IE
OC2IE
—
T4IF
OC2IF
—
—
Bit 5
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
OC3IE
T1IE
—
OC3IF
T1IF
—
ADDRERR
Bit 3
Bit 1
—
—
—
—
IC8IE
OC1IE
—
IC8IF
OC1IF
INT2EP
—
QEIIP<2:0>
INT3IP<2:0>
—
—
U2RXIP<2:0>
OC4IP<2:0>
INT1IP<2:0>
NVMIP<2:0>
SPI1IP<2:0>
IC2IP<2:0>
INT0IP<2:0>
—
IC7IE
IC1IE
—
IC7IF
IC1IF
INT1EP
STKERR OSCFAIL
Bit 2
0000 0000 0000 0000
Reset State
—
—
—
—
INT1IE
INT0IE
—
INT1IF
INT0IF
0000 0000 0000 0000
0100 0000 0000 0100
0100 0000 0100 0100
0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000
0100 0000 0100 0100
0100 0100 0100 0100
0100 0100 0100 0100
0100 0100 0100 0100
0100 0100 0100 0100
0100 0100 0100 0100
0100 0100 0100 0100
0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000
INT0EP 0000 0000 0000 0000
—
Bit 0
dsPIC30F3010/3011
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
dsPIC30F3010/3011
6.0
FLASH PROGRAM MEMORY
Note:
6.2
This data sheet summarizes features of
this group of dsPIC30F devices and is not
intended to be a complete reference
source. For more information on the CPU,
peripherals, register descriptions and general device functionality, refer to the
“dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual”
(DS70046). For more information on the
device instruction set and programming,
refer to the “dsPIC30F/33F Programmer’s
Reference Manual” (DS70157).
RTSP is accomplished using TBLRD (table read) and
TBLWT (table write) instructions.
With RTSP, the user may erase program memory,
32 instructions (96 bytes) at a time and can write
program memory data, 32 instructions (96 bytes) at a
time.
6.3
2.
6.1
Table Instruction Operation Summary
The TBLRDL and the TBLWTL instructions are used to
read or write to bits<15:0> of program memory.
TBLRDL and TBLWTL can access program memory in
Word or Byte mode.
The dsPIC30F family of devices contains internal
program Flash memory for executing user code. There
are two methods by which the user can program this
memory:
1.
Run-Time Self-Programming
(RTSP)
The TBLRDH and TBLWTH instructions are used to read
or write to bits<23:16> of program memory. TBLRDH
and TBLWTH can access program memory in Word or
Byte mode.
In-Circuit Serial Programming™ (ICSP™)
capabilities
Run-Time Self-Programming (RTSP)
A 24-bit program memory address is formed using
bits<7:0> of the TBLPAG register and the Effective
Address (EA) from a W register specified in the table
instruction, as shown in Figure 6-1.
In-Circuit Serial Programming
(ICSP)
dsPIC30F devices can be serially programmed while in
the end application circuit. This is simply done with two
lines for Programming Clock and Programming Data
(which are named PGC and PGD, respectively), and
three other lines for Power (VDD), Ground (VSS) and
Master Clear (MCLR). This allows customers to manufacture boards with unprogrammed devices, and then
program the microcontroller just before shipping the
product. This also allows the most recent firmware or a
custom firmware to be programmed.
FIGURE 6-1:
ADDRESSING FOR TABLE AND NVM REGISTERS
24 bits
Using
Program
Counter
Program Counter
0
0
NVMADR Reg EA
Using
NVMADR
Addressing
1/0
NVMADRU Reg
8 bits
16 bits
Working Reg EA
Using
Table
Instruction
User/Configuration
Space Select
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
1/0 TBLPAG Reg
8 bits
16 bits
24-bit EA
Byte
Select
DS70141E-page 47
dsPIC30F3010/3011
6.4
RTSP Operation
The dsPIC30F Flash program memory is organized
into rows and panels. Each row consists of 32 instructions or 96 bytes. Each panel consists of 128 rows or
4K x 24 instructions. RTSP allows the user to erase one
row (32 instructions) at a time and to program
32 instructions at one time.
Each panel of program memory contains write latches
that hold 32 instructions of programming data. Prior to
the actual programming operation, the write data must
be loaded into the panel write latches. The data to be
programmed into the panel is loaded in sequential
order into the write latches; instruction 0, instruction 1,
etc. The addresses loaded must always be from an
even group of 32 boundary.
6.5
RTSP Control Registers
The four SFRs used to read and write the program
Flash memory are:
•
•
•
•
NVMCON
NVMADR
NVMADRU
NVMKEY
6.5.1
NVMCON REGISTER
The NVMCON register controls which blocks are to be
erased, which memory type is to be programmed and
the start of the programming cycle.
6.5.2
NVMADR REGISTER
The basic sequence for RTSP programming is to set up
a Table Pointer, then do a series of TBLWT instructions
to load the write latches. Programming is performed by
setting the special bits in the NVMCON register.
32 TBLWTL and four TBLWTH instructions are
required to load the 32 instructions.
The NVMADR register is used to hold the lower two
bytes of the effective address. The NVMADR register
captures the EA<15:0> of the last table instruction that
has been executed and selects the row to write.
All of the table write operations are single-word writes
(2 instruction cycles), because only the table latches
are written.
The NVMADRU register is used to hold the upper byte
of the effective address. The NVMADRU register
captures the EA<23:16> of the last table instruction
that has been executed.
After the latches are written, a programming operation
needs to be initiated to program the data.
The Flash program memory is readable, writable and
erasable during normal operation over the entire VDD
range.
6.5.3
6.5.4
NVMKEY REGISTER
NVMKEY is a write-only register that is used for write
protection. To start a programming or erase sequence,
the user must consecutively write 0x55 and 0xAA to the
NVMKEY register. Refer to Section 6.6 “Programming
Operations” for further details.
Note:
DS70141E-page 48
NVMADRU REGISTER
The user can also directly write to the
NVMADR and NVMADRU registers to
specify a program memory address for
erasing or programming.
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
dsPIC30F3010/3011
6.6
Programming Operations
A complete programming sequence is necessary for
programming or erasing the internal Flash in RTSP
mode. A programming operation is nominally 2 msec in
duration and the processor stalls (waits) until the operation is finished. Setting the WR bit (NVMCON<15>)
starts the operation, and the WR bit is automatically
cleared when the operation is finished.
6.6.1
4.
5.
PROGRAMMING ALGORITHM FOR
PROGRAM FLASH
The user can erase or program one row of program
Flash memory at a time. The general process is:
1.
2.
3.
Read one row of program Flash (32 instruction
words) and store into data RAM as a data
“image”.
Update the data image with the desired new
data.
Erase program Flash row.
a) Set up NVMCON register for multi-word,
program Flash, erase and set WREN bit.
b) Write address of row to be erased into
NVMADRU/NVMDR.
c) Write ‘0x55’ to NVMKEY.
d) Write ‘0xAA’ to NVMKEY.
e) Set the WR bit. This will begin erase cycle.
f) CPU will stall for the duration of the erase
cycle.
g) The WR bit is cleared when erase cycle
ends.
EXAMPLE 6-1:
6.
Write 32 instruction words of data from data
RAM “image” into the program Flash write
latches.
Program 32 instruction words into program
Flash.
a) Set up NVMCON register for multi-word,
program Flash, program and set WREN bit.
b) Write ‘0x55’ to NVMKEY.
c) Write ‘0xAA’ to NVMKEY.
d) Set the WR bit. This will begin program
cycle.
e) CPU will stall for duration of the program
cycle.
f) The WR bit is cleared by the hardware
when program cycle ends.
Repeat steps 1 through 5 as needed to program
desired amount of program Flash memory.
6.6.2
ERASING A ROW OF PROGRAM
MEMORY
Example 6-1 shows a code sequence that can be used
to erase a row (32 instructions) of program memory.
ERASING A ROW OF PROGRAM MEMORY
; Setup NVMCON for erase operation, multi word
; program memory selected, and writes enabled
MOV
#0x4041,W0
;
;
MOV
W0,NVMCON
; Init pointer to row to be ERASED
MOV
#tblpage(PROG_ADDR),W0
;
;
MOV
W0,NVMADRU
MOV
#tbloffset(PROG_ADDR),W0
;
MOV
W0, NVMADR
;
DISI
#5
;
;
MOV
#0x55,W0
;
MOV
W0,NVMKEY
MOV
#0xAA,W1
;
;
MOV
W1,NVMKEY
BSET
NVMCON,#WR
;
NOP
;
NOP
;
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
write
Initialize NVMCON SFR
Initialize PM Page Boundary SFR
Initialize in-page EA[15:0] pointer
Initialize NVMADR SFR
Block all interrupts with priority <7
for next 5 instructions
Write the 0x55 key
Write the 0xAA key
Start the erase sequence
Insert two NOPs after the erase
command is asserted
DS70141E-page 49
dsPIC30F3010/3011
6.6.3
LOADING WRITE LATCHES
Example 6-2 shows a sequence of instructions that
can be used to load the 96 bytes of write latches.
32 TBLWTL and 32 TBLWTH instructions are needed to
load the write latches selected by the Table Pointer.
EXAMPLE 6-2:
LOADING WRITE LATCHES
; Set up a pointer to the first program memory location to be written
; program memory selected, and writes enabled
MOV
#0x0000,W0
;
; Initialize PM Page Boundary SFR
MOV
W0,TBLPAG
MOV
#0x6000,W0
; An example program memory address
; Perform the TBLWT instructions to write the latches
; 0th_program_word
MOV
#LOW_WORD_0,W2
;
MOV
#HIGH_BYTE_0,W3
;
; Write PM low word into program latch
TBLWTL W2,[W0]
; Write PM high byte into program latch
TBLWTH W3,[W0++]
; 1st_program_word
MOV
#LOW_WORD_1,W2
;
MOV
#HIGH_BYTE_1,W3
;
; Write PM low word into program latch
TBLWTL W2,[W0]
TBLWTH W3,[W0++]
; Write PM high byte into program latch
; 2nd_program_word
MOV
#LOW_WORD_2,W2
;
MOV
#HIGH_BYTE_2,W3
;
; Write PM low word into program latch
TBLWTL W2, [W0]
; Write PM high byte into program latch
TBLWTH W3, [W0++]
•
•
•
; 31st_program_word
MOV
#LOW_WORD_31,W2
;
MOV
#HIGH_BYTE_31,W3
;
; Write PM low word into program latch
TBLWTL W2, [W0]
; Write PM high byte into program latch
TBLWTH W3, [W0++]
Note: In Example 6-2, the contents of the upper byte of W3 have no effect.
6.6.4
INITIATING THE PROGRAMMING
SEQUENCE
For protection, the write initiate sequence for NVMKEY
must be used to allow any erase or program operation
to proceed. After the programming command has been
executed, the user must wait for the programming time
until programming is complete. The two instructions
following the start of the programming sequence
should be NOPs.
EXAMPLE 6-3:
INITIATING A PROGRAMMING SEQUENCE
DISI
#5
MOV
MOV
MOV
MOV
BSET
NOP
NOP
#0x55,W0
W0,NVMKEY
#0xAA,W1
W1,NVMKEY
NVMCON,#WR
DS70141E-page 50
; Block all interrupts with priority <7
; for next 5 instructions
;
;
;
;
;
;
Write the 0x55 key
Write the 0xAA key
Start the erase sequence
Insert two NOPs after the erase
command is asserted
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10
—
—
—
Bit 9
—
Bit 7
—
—
—
NVMADR<15:0>
—
Bit 8
Refer to “dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual” (DS70046) for descriptions of register bit fields.
—
—
Bit 13
WRERR
Note 1:
NVMKEY
—
Bit 14
WREN
u = uninitialized bit; — = unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’
0766
NVMADRU
WR
Bit 15
NVM REGISTER MAP(1)
Legend:
0762
0764
NVMADR
0760
Addr.
NVMCON
File Name
TABLE 6-1:
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 3
Bit 2
NVMKEY<7:0>
NVMADR<22:16>
PROGOP<6:0>
Bit 4
Bit 1
Bit 0
All Resets
0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 uuuu uuuu
uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu
0000 0000 0000 0000
dsPIC30F3010/3011
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70141E-page 51
dsPIC30F3010/3011
NOTES:
DS70141E-page 52
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
dsPIC30F3010/3011
7.0
Note:
DATA EEPROM MEMORY
This data sheet summarizes features of
this group of dsPIC30F devices and is not
intended to be a complete reference
source. For more information on the CPU,
peripherals, register descriptions and general device functionality, refer to the
“dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual”
(DS70046). For more information on the
device instruction set and programming,
refer to the “dsPIC30F/33F Programmer’s
Reference Manual” (DS70157).
The data EEPROM memory is readable and writable
during normal operation over the entire VDD range. The
data EEPROM memory is directly mapped in the
program memory address space.
The four SFRs used to read and write the program
Flash memory are used to access data EEPROM
memory as well. As described in Section 4.0
“Address Generator Units”, these registers are:
•
•
•
•
NVMCON
NVMADR
NVMADRU
NVMKEY
The EEPROM data memory allows read and write of
single words and 16-word blocks. When interfacing to
data memory, NVMADR, in conjunction with the
NVMADRU register, is used to address the EEPROM
location being accessed. TBLRDL and TBLWTL instructions are used to read and write data EEPROM. The
dsPIC30F3010/3011 devices have 1 Kbyte (512 words)
of data EEPROM, with an address range from
0x7FFC00 to 0x7FFFFE.
A word write operation should be preceded by an erase
of the corresponding memory location(s). The write
typically requires 2 ms to complete, but the write time
will vary with voltage and temperature.
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
A program or erase operation on the data EEPROM
does not stop the instruction flow. The user is responsible for waiting for the appropriate duration of time
before initiating another data EEPROM write/erase
operation. Attempting to read the data EEPROM while
a programming or erase operation is in progress results
in unspecified data.
Control bit, WR, initiates write operations, similar to
program Flash writes. This bit cannot be cleared, only
set, in software. This bit is cleared in hardware at the
completion of the write operation. The inability to clear
the WR bit in software prevents the accidental or
premature termination of a write operation.
The WREN bit, when set, will allow a write operation.
On power-up, the WREN bit is clear. The WRERR bit is
set when a write operation is interrupted by a MCLR
Reset, or a WDT Time-out Reset, during normal operation. In these situations, following Reset, the user can
check the WRERR bit and rewrite the location. The
address register, NVMADR, remains unchanged.
Note:
7.1
Interrupt flag bit, NVMIF in the IFS0
register, is set when the write is complete.
It must be cleared in software.
Reading the Data EEPROM
A TBLRD instruction reads a word at the current
program word address. This example uses W0 as a
pointer to data EEPROM. The result is placed in
register W4, as shown in Example 7-1.
EXAMPLE 7-1:
MOV
MOV
MOV
TBLRDL
DATA EEPROM READ
#LOW_ADDR_WORD,W0 ; Init Pointer
#HIGH_ADDR_WORD,W1
W1,TBLPAG
[ W0 ], W4
; read data EEPROM
DS70141E-page 53
dsPIC30F3010/3011
7.2
7.2.1
Erasing Data EEPROM
ERASING A BLOCK OF DATA
EEPROM
In order to erase a block of data EEPROM, the
NVMADRU and NVMADR registers must initially
point to the block of memory to be erased. Configure
NVMCON for erasing a block of data EEPROM, and
set the ERASE and WREN bits in the NVMCON register. Setting the WR bit initiates the erase, as shown
in Example 7-2.
EXAMPLE 7-2:
DATA EEPROM BLOCK ERASE
; Select data EEPROM block, ERASE, WREN bits
MOV
#0x4045,W0
MOV
W0,NVMCON
; Initialize NVMCON SFR
; Start erase cycle by setting WR after writing key sequence
DISI
#5
; Block all interrupts with priority <7
; for next 5 instructions
MOV
#0x55,W0
;
; Write the 0x55 key
MOV
W0,NVMKEY
MOV
#0xAA,W1
;
; Write the 0xAA key
MOV
W1,NVMKEY
BSET
NVMCON,#WR
; Initiate erase sequence
NOP
NOP
; Erase cycle will complete in 2mS. CPU is not stalled for the Data Erase Cycle
; User can poll WR bit, use NVMIF or Timer IRQ to determine erasure complete
7.2.2
ERASING A WORD OF DATA
EEPROM
The TBLPAG and NVMADR registers must point to
the block. Select erase a block of data Flash, and set
the ERASE and WREN bits in the NVMCON register.
Setting the WR bit initiates the erase, as shown in
Example 7-3.
EXAMPLE 7-3:
DATA EEPROM WORD ERASE
; Select data EEPROM word, ERASE, WREN bits
MOV
#0x4044,W0
MOV
W0,NVMCON
; Start erase cycle by setting WR after writing key sequence
DISI
#5
; Block all interrupts with priority <7
; for next 5 instructions
MOV
#0x55,W0
;
; Write the 0x55 key
MOV
W0,NVMKEY
MOV
#0xAA,W1
;
; Write the 0xAA key
MOV
W1,NVMKEY
BSET
NVMCON,#WR
; Initiate erase sequence
NOP
NOP
; Erase cycle will complete in 2mS. CPU is not stalled for the Data Erase Cycle
; User can poll WR bit, use NVMIF or Timer IRQ to determine erasure complete
DS70141E-page 54
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
dsPIC30F3010/3011
7.3
Writing to the Data EEPROM
To write an EEPROM data location, the following
sequence must be followed:
1.
2.
3.
Erase data EEPROM word.
a) Select the word, data EEPROM, erase and
set WREN bit in the NVMCON register.
b) Write the address of word to be erased into
the NVMADRU/NVMADR.
c) Enable the NVM interrupt (optional).
d) Write 0x55 to NVMKEY.
e) Write 0xAA to NVMKEY.
f) Set the WR bit. This will begin the erase cycle.
g) Either poll the NVMIF bit or wait for the
NVMIF interrupt.
h) The WR bit is cleared when the erase cycle
ends.
Write the data word into the data EEPROM write
latches.
Program 1 data word into the data EEPROM.
a) Select the word, data EEPROM, program and
set the WREN bit in the NVMCON register.
b) Enable the NVM write done interrupt
(optional).
c) Write 0x55 to NVMKEY.
d) Write 0xAA to NVMKEY.
e) Set the WR bit. This will begin the program
cycle.
f) Either poll the NVMIF bit or wait for the
NVM interrupt.
g) The WR bit is cleared when the write cycle
ends.
EXAMPLE 7-4:
The write will not initiate if the above sequence is not
exactly followed (write 0x55 to NVMKEY, write 0xAA to
NVMCON, then set WR bit) for each word. It is strongly
recommended that interrupts be disabled during this
code segment.
Additionally, the WREN bit in NVMCON must be set to
enable writes. This mechanism prevents accidental
writes to data EEPROM due to unexpected code
execution. The WREN bit should be kept clear at all
times, except when updating the EEPROM. The
WREN bit is not cleared by hardware.
After a write sequence has been initiated, clearing the
WREN bit will not affect the current write cycle. The WR
bit will be inhibited from being set unless the WREN bit
is set. The WREN bit must be set on a previous instruction. Both WR and WREN cannot be set with the same
instruction.
At the completion of the write cycle, the WR bit is
cleared in hardware and the Nonvolatile Memory Write
Complete Interrupt Flag bit (NVMIF) is set. The user
may either enable this interrupt, or poll this bit. NVMIF
must be cleared by software.
7.3.1
WRITING A WORD OF DATA
EEPROM
Once the user has erased the word to be programmed,
then a table write instruction is used to write one write
latch, as shown in Example 7-4.
DATA EEPROM WORD WRITE
; Point to data memory
MOV
#LOW_ADDR_WORD,W0
MOV
#HIGH_ADDR_WORD,W1
MOV
W1,TBLPAG
MOV
#LOW(WORD),W2
TBLWTL
W2,[ W0]
; The NVMADR captures last table access address
; Select data EEPROM for 1 word op
MOV
#0x4004,W0
MOV
W0,NVMCON
; Operate key to allow write operation
DISI
#5
MOV
MOV
MOV
MOV
BSET
NOP
NOP
; Write cycle will
; User can poll WR
#0x55,W0
W0,NVMKEY
#0xAA,W1
W1,NVMKEY
NVMCON,#WR
; Init pointer
; Get data
; Write data
; Block all interrupts with priority <7
; for next 5 instructions
; Write the 0x55 key
; Write the 0xAA key
; Initiate program sequence
complete in 2mS. CPU is not stalled for the Data Write Cycle
bit, use NVMIF or Timer IRQ to determine write complete
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70141E-page 55
dsPIC30F3010/3011
7.3.2
WRITING A BLOCK OF DATA
EEPROM
To write a block of data EEPROM, write to all sixteen
latches first, then set the NVMCON register and
program the block.
EXAMPLE 7-5:
DATA EEPROM BLOCK WRITE
MOV
MOV
MOV
MOV
TBLWTL
MOV
TBLWTL
MOV
TBLWTL
MOV
TBLWTL
MOV
TBLWTL
MOV
TBLWTL
MOV
TBLWTL
MOV
TBLWTL
MOV
TBLWTL
MOV
TBLWTL
MOV
TBLWTL
MOV
TBLWTL
MOV
TBLWTL
MOV
TBLWTL
MOV
TBLWTL
MOV
TBLWTL
MOV
MOV
DISI
#LOW_ADDR_WORD,W0
#HIGH_ADDR_WORD,W1
W1,TBLPAG
#data1,W2
W2,[ W0]++
#data2,W2
W2,[ W0]++
#data3,W2
W2,[ W0]++
#data4,W2
W2,[ W0]++
#data5,W2
W2,[ W0]++
#data6,W2
W2,[ W0]++
#data7,W2
W2,[ W0]++
#data8,W2
W2,[ W0]++
#data9,W2
W2,[ W0]++
#data10,W2
W2,[ W0]++
#data11,W2
W2,[ W0]++
#data12,W2
W2,[ W0]++
#data13,W2
W2,[ W0]++
#data14,W2
W2,[ W0]++
#data15,W2
W2,[ W0]++
#data16,W2
W2,[ W0]++
#0x400A,W0
W0,NVMCON
#5
MOV
MOV
MOV
MOV
BSET
NOP
NOP
#0x55,W0
W0,NVMKEY
#0xAA,W1
W1,NVMKEY
NVMCON,#WR
DS70141E-page 56
; Init pointer
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
Get 1st data
write data
Get 2nd data
write data
Get 3rd data
write data
Get 4th data
write data
Get 5th data
write data
Get 6th data
write data
Get 7th data
write data
Get 8th data
write data
Get 9th data
write data
Get 10th data
write data
Get 11th data
write data
Get 12th data
write data
Get 13th data
write data
Get 14th data
write data
Get 15th data
write data
Get 16th data
write data. The NVMADR captures last table access address.
Select data EEPROM for multi word op
Operate Key to allow program operation
Block all interrupts with priority <7
for next 5 instructions
; Write the 0x55 key
; Write the 0xAA key
; Start write cycle
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
dsPIC30F3010/3011
7.4
Write Verify
Depending on the application, good programming
practice may dictate that the value written to the
memory should be verified against the original value.
This should be used in applications where excessive
writes can stress bits near the specification limit.
7.5
Protection Against Spurious Write
There are conditions when the device may not want to
write to the data EEPROM memory. To protect against
spurious EEPROM writes, various mechanisms have
been built-in. On power-up, the WREN bit is cleared;
also, the Power-up Timer prevents EEPROM write.
The write initiate sequence, and the WREN bit
together, help prevent an accidental write during
brown-out, power glitch or software malfunction.
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70141E-page 57
dsPIC30F3010/3011
NOTES:
DS70141E-page 58
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
dsPIC30F3010/3011
8.0
Note:
I/O PORTS
Writes to the latch, write the latch (LATx). Reads from
the port (PORTx), read the port pins, and writes to the
port pins, write the latch (LATx).
This data sheet summarizes features of
this group of dsPIC30F devices and is not
intended to be a complete reference
source. For more information on the CPU,
peripherals, register descriptions and general device functionality, refer to the
“dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual”
(DS70046).
Any bit and its associated data and control registers
that are not valid for a particular device will be
disabled. That means the corresponding LATx and
TRISx registers and the port pin will read as zeros.
When a pin is shared with another peripheral or function that is defined as an input only, it is nevertheless
regarded as a dedicated port because there is no
other competing source of outputs. An example is the
INT4 pin.
All of the device pins (except VDD, VSS, MCLR and
OSC1/CLKI) are shared between the peripherals and
the parallel I/O ports.
The format of the registers for PORTx is shown in
Table 8-1.
All I/O input ports feature Schmitt Trigger inputs for
improved noise immunity.
8.1
The TRISx register controls the direction of the pins.
The LATx register supplies data to the outputs and is
readable/writable. Reading the PORTx register yields
the state of the input pins, while writing the PORTx
register modifies the contents of the LATx register.
Parallel I/O (PIO) Ports
When a peripheral is enabled and the peripheral is
actively driving an associated pin, the use of the pin as
a general purpose output pin is disabled. The I/O pin
may be read, but the output driver for the parallel port
bit will be disabled. If a peripheral is enabled, but the
peripheral is not actively driving a pin, that pin may be
driven by a port.
A Parallel I/O (PIO) port that shares a pin with a peripheral is, in general, subservient to the peripheral. The
peripheral’s output buffer data and control signals are
provided to a pair of multiplexers. The multiplexers
select whether the peripheral or the associated port
has ownership of the output data and control signals of
the I/O pad cell. Figure 8-2 shows how ports are shared
with other peripherals, and the associated I/O cell (pad)
to which they are connected. Table 8-1 shows the
formats of the registers for the shared ports, PORTB
through PORTF.
All port pins have three registers directly associated
with the operation of the port pin. The Data Direction
register (TRISx) determines whether the pin is an input
or an output. If the data direction bit is a ‘1’, then the pin
is an input. All port pins are defined as inputs after a
Reset. Reads from the latch (LATx), read the latch.
FIGURE 8-1:
BLOCK DIAGRAM OF A DEDICATED PORT STRUCTURE
Dedicated Port Module
Read TRIS
I/O Cell
TRIS Latch
Data Bus
D
WR TRIS
CK
Q
Data Latch
D
WR LAT +
WR PORT
Q
I/O Pad
CK
Read LAT
Read PORT
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70141E-page 59
dsPIC30F3010/3011
FIGURE 8-2:
BLOCK DIAGRAM OF A SHARED PORT STRUCTURE
Output Multiplexers
Peripheral Module
Peripheral Input Data
Peripheral Module Enable
I/O Cell
Peripheral Output Enable
1
Peripheral Output Data
0
PIO Module
1
Output Enable
Output Data
0
Read TRIS
I/O Pad
Data Bus
D
WR TRIS
Q
CK
TRIS Latch
D
WR LAT +
WR PORT
Q
CK
Data Latch
Read LAT
Input Data
Read PORT
8.2
Configuring Analog Port Pins
The use of the ADPCFG and TRIS registers control the
operation of the A/D port pins. The port pins that are
desired as analog inputs must have their corresponding TRIS bit set (input). If the TRIS bit is cleared
(output), the digital output level (VOH or VOL) will be
converted.
When reading the PORT register, all pins configured as
analog input channel will read as cleared (a low level).
Pins configured as digital inputs will not convert an
analog input. Analog levels on any pin that is defined as
a digital input (including the ANx pins), may cause the
input buffer to consume current that exceeds the
device specifications.
DS70141E-page 60
8.2.1
I/O PORT WRITE/READ TIMING
One instruction cycle is required between a port
direction change or port write operation and a read
operation of the same port. Typically this instruction
would be a NOP.
EXAMPLE 8-1:
MOV
0xFF00, W0
MOV
NOP
BTSS
W0, TRISBB
PORTB, #13
PORT WRITE/READ
EXAMPLE
;
;
;
;
;
Configure PORTB<15:8>
as inputs
and PORTB<7:0> as outputs
Delay 1 cycle
Next Instruction
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
02CC TRISC15 TRISC14 TRISC13
02CE
02D0
02D2
02D4
02D6
02D8
02DA
02DC
02DE
02E0
02E2
PORTC
LATC
TRISD
PORTD
LATD
TRISE
PORTE
LATE
TRISF
PORTF
LATF
RC14
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Bit 9
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
—
—
—
LATE8
RE8
TRISE8
—
—
—
—
—
—
LATB8
RB8
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
LATB7
RB7
—
—
—
—
—
—
LATB4
RB4
—
—
—
LATB2
RB2
—
—
—
LATB1
RB1
—
—
—
LATB0
RB0
LATD3
RD3
LATD2
RD2
LATD1
RD1
LATD0
RD0
TRISD3 TRISD2 TRISD1 TRISD0
—
—
—
LATB3
RB3
LATE5
RE5
LATE4
RE4
LATE3
RE3
LATE2
RE2
LATE1
RE1
LATE0
RE0
TRISE5 TRISE4 TRISE3 TRISE2 TRISE1 TRISE0
—
—
—
—
—
—
LATB5
RB5
LATF6
RF6
LATF5
RF5
LATF4
RF4
LATF3
RF3
LATF2
RF2
LATF1
RF1
LATF0
RF0
TRISF6 TRISF5 TRISF4 TRISF3 TRISF2 TRISF1 TRISF0
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
LATB6
RB6
TRISB8 TRISB7 TRISB6 TRISB5 TRISB4 TRISB3 TRISB2 TRISB1 TRISB0
Bit 8
Reset State
0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0111 1111
0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0001 0011 1111
0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 1111
0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000
1110 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0001 1111 1111
Refer to “dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual” (DS70046) for descriptions of register bit fields. Not all peripherals, and therefore their bit positions, are available on this device.
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Bit 10
Note 1:
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Bit 11
— = unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
LATC13
RC13
—
—
—
Bit 12
Legend:
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
LATC14
—
LATC15
RC15
—
—
—
TRISC
—
02CA
—
LATB
—
—
02C6
—
Bit 13
02C8
Bit 14
Bit 15
PORTB
Addr.
dsPIC30F3011 PORT REGISTER MAP(1)
TRISB
SFR
Name
TABLE 8-1:
dsPIC30F3010/3011
DS70141E-page 61
02CC TRISC15 TRISC14 TRISC13
02CE
02D0
02D2
02D4
02D6
02D8
02DA
02DC
02EE
02E0
02E2
PORTC
LATC
DS70141E-page 62
TRISD
PORTD
LATD
TRISE
PORTE
LATE
TRISF
PORTF
LATF
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Bit 9
—
—
—
LATE8
RE8
TRISE8
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Bit 8
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Bit 7
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Bit 6
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
—
—
—
—
—
—
LATB4
RB4
—
—
—
—
—
—
LATB3
RB3
—
—
—
—
—
—
LATB2
RB2
—
—
—
LATB0
RB0
LATD1
RD1
LATD0
RD0
TRISD1 TRISD0
—
—
—
LATB1
RB1
—
—
—
LATE5
RE5
—
—
—
LATE4
RE4
LATE2
RE2
LATF3
RF3
LATF2
RF2
TRISF3 TRISF2
LATE3
RE3
—
—
—
LATE1
RE1
—
—
—
LATE0
RE0
TRISE5 TRISE4 TRISE3 TRISE2 TRISE1 TRISE0
—
—
—
—
—
—
LATB5
RB5
TRISB5 TRISB4 TRISB3 TRISB2 TRISB1 TRISB0
Bit 5
Reset State
0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 1100
0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0001 0011 1111
0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0011
0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000
1110 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0011 1111
Refer to “dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual” (DS70046) for descriptions of register bit fields. Not all peripherals, and therefore their bit positions, are available on this device.
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Bit 10
Note 1:
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Bit 11
— = unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
LATC13
RC13
—
—
—
Bit 12
Legend:
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
LATC14
RC14
—
—
LATC15
RC15
—
—
TRISC
—
02CB
—
LATB
—
—
02C6
02C8
—
Bit 13
TRISB
Bit 14
Bit 15
Addr.
dsPIC30F3010 PORT REGISTER MAP(1)
PORTB
SFR
Name
TABLE 8-2:
dsPIC30F3010/3011
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
dsPIC30F3010/3011
8.3
Input Change Notification Module
The input change notification module provides the
dsPIC30F devices the ability to generate interrupt
requests to the processor in response to a Change-OfState (COS) on selected input pins. This module is
capable of detecting input Change-Of-States, even in
Sleep mode, when the clocks are disabled. There are
10 external signals (CN0 through CN7, CN17 and
CN18) that may be selected (enabled) for generating
an interrupt request on a Change-Of-State.
Please refer to the Pin Diagrams for CN pin locations.
TABLE 8-3:
INPUT CHANGE NOTIFICATION REGISTER MAP (BITS 7-0)(1)
SFR Name
Addr.
CNEN1
00C0
CN7IE
CN6IE
CN5IE
CN4IE
CN3IE
CN2IE
CNPU1
00C4
CN7PUE
CN6PUE
CN5PUE
CN4PUE
CN3PUE
CN2PUE
Note 1:
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Reset State
CN1IE
CN0IE
0000 0000 0000 0000
CN1PUE
CN0PUE
0000 0000 0000 0000
Refer to “dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual” (DS70046) for descriptions of register bit fields.
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70141E-page 63
dsPIC30F3010/3011
NOTES:
DS70141E-page 64
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
dsPIC30F3010/3011
9.0
Note:
TIMER1 MODULE
This data sheet summarizes features of
this group of dsPIC30F devices and is not
intended to be a complete reference
source. For more information on the CPU,
peripherals, register descriptions and general device functionality, refer to the
“dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual”
(DS70046).
This section describes the 16-bit general purpose
Timer1 module and associated operational modes.
Figure 9-1 depicts the simplified block diagram of the
16-bit Timer1 module.
Note:
Timer1 is a ‘Type A’ timer. Please refer to
the specifications for a Type A timer in Section 23.0 “Electrical Characteristics” of
this document.
The following sections provide a detailed description,
including setup and control registers along with associated block diagrams for the operational modes of the
timers.
The Timer1 module is a 16-bit timer which can serve as
the time counter for the Real-time Clock (RTC), or operate as a free-running interval timer/counter. The 16-bit
timer has the following modes:
• 16-bit Timer
• 16-bit Synchronous Counter
• 16-bit Asynchronous Counter
Further, the following operational characteristics are
supported:
These operating modes are determined by setting the
appropriate bit(s) in the 16-bit SFR, T1CON. Figure 9-1
presents a block diagram of the 16-bit timer module.
16-Bit Timer Mode: In the 16-Bit Timer mode, the
timer increments on every instruction cycle up to a
match value, preloaded into the Period register, PR1,
then resets to ‘0’ and continues to count.
When the CPU goes into the Idle mode, the timer will
stop incrementing unless the TSIDL (T1CON<13>)
bit = 0. If TSIDL = 1, the timer module logic will resume
the incrementing sequence upon termination of the
CPU Idle mode.
16-bit Synchronous Counter Mode: In the 16-bit
Synchronous Counter mode, the timer increments on
the rising edge of the applied external clock signal,
which is synchronized with the internal phase clocks.
The timer counts up to a match value preloaded in PR1,
then resets to ‘0’ and continues.
When the CPU goes into the Idle mode, the timer will
stop incrementing, unless the respective TSIDL bit = 0.
If TSIDL = 1, the timer module logic will resume the
incrementing sequence upon termination of the CPU
Idle mode.
16-Bit Asynchronous Counter Mode: In the 16-Bit
Asynchronous Counter mode, the timer increments on
every rising edge of the applied external clock signal.
The timer counts up to a match value preloaded in PR1,
then resets to ‘0’ and continues.
When the timer is configured for the Asynchronous mode
of operation and the CPU goes into the Idle mode, the
timer will stop incrementing if TSIDL = 1.
• Timer gate operation
• Selectable prescaler settings
• Timer operation during CPU Idle and Sleep
modes
• Interrupt on 16-bit Period register match or falling
edge of external gate signal
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70141E-page 65
dsPIC30F3010/3011
FIGURE 9-1:
16-BIT TIMER1 MODULE BLOCK DIAGRAM (TYPE A TIMER)
PR1
Equal
Comparator x 16
TSYNC
1
Reset
Sync
TMR1
0
0
1
Q
D
Q
CK
TGATE
TCS
TGATE
SOSCO/
T1CK
1X
LPOSCEN
SOSCI
9.1
Timer Gate Operation
The 16-bit timer can be placed in the Gated Time
Accumulation mode. This mode allows the internal TCY
to increment the respective timer when the gate input
signal (T1CK pin) is asserted high. Control bit, TGATE
(T1CON<6>), must be set to enable this mode. The
timer must be enabled (TON = 1) and the timer clock
source set to internal (TCS = 0).
When the CPU goes into the Idle mode, the timer will
stop incrementing unless TSIDL = 0. If TSIDL = 1, the
timer will resume the incrementing sequence upon
termination of the CPU Idle mode.
9.2
TGATE
T1IF
Event Flag
Timer Prescaler
The input clock (FOSC/4 or external clock) to the 16-bit
Timer has a prescale option of 1:1, 1:8, 1:64 and 1:256,
selected by control bits, TCKPS<1:0> (T1CON<5:4>).
The prescaler counter is cleared when any of the
following occurs:
Gate
Sync
0 1
TCY
TCKPS<1:0>
TON
2
Prescaler
1, 8, 64, 256
00
9.3
Timer Operation During Sleep
Mode
During CPU Sleep mode, the timer will operate if:
• The timer module is enabled (TON = 1) and
• The timer clock source is selected as external
(TCS = 1) and
• The TSYNC bit (T1CON<2>) is asserted to a logic
‘0’, which defines the external clock source as
asynchronous
When all three conditions are true, the timer will
continue to count up to the Period register and be reset
to 0x0000.
When a match between the timer and the Period
register occurs, an interrupt can be generated, if the
respective timer interrupt enable bit is asserted.
• a write to the TMR1 register
• clearing of the TON bit (T1CON<15>)
• device Reset such as POR and BOR
However, if the timer is disabled (TON = 0), then the
timer prescaler cannot be reset since the prescaler
clock is halted.
TMR1 is not cleared when T1CON is written. It is
cleared by writing to the TMR1 register.
DS70141E-page 66
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
dsPIC30F3010/3011
9.4
Timer Interrupt
9.5.1
The 16-bit timer has the ability to generate an interrupt
on period match. When the timer count matches the
Period register, the T1IF bit is asserted and an interrupt
will be generated, if enabled. The T1IF bit must be
cleared in software. The Timer Interrupt Flag, T1IF, is
located in the IFS0 Control register in the interrupt
controller.
When the Gated Time Accumulation mode is enabled,
an interrupt will also be generated on the falling edge of
the gate signal (at the end of the accumulation cycle).
RTC OSCILLATOR OPERATION
When the TON = 1, TCS = 1 and TGATE = 0, the timer
increments on the rising edge of the 32 kHz LP oscillator output signal, up to the value specified in the Period
register, and is then reset to ‘0’.
The TSYNC bit must be asserted to a logic ‘0’
(Asynchronous mode) for correct operation.
Enabling LPOSCEN (OSCCON<1>) will disable the
normal Timer and Counter modes and enable a timer
carry-out wake-up event.
Enabling an interrupt is accomplished via the
respective Timer Interrupt Enable bit, T1IE. The timer
interrupt enable bit is located in the IEC0 Control
register in the interrupt controller.
When the CPU enters Sleep mode, the RTC will
continue to operate, provided the 32 kHz external
crystal oscillator is active and the control bits have not
been changed. The TSIDL bit should be cleared to ‘0’
in order for RTC to continue operation in Idle mode.
9.5
9.5.2
Real-Time Clock
Timer1, when operating in Real-Time Clock (RTC)
mode, provides time-of-day and event time-stamping
capabilities. Key operational features of the RTC are:
•
•
•
•
Operation from 32 kHz LP oscillator
8-bit prescaler
Low power
Real-Time Clock interrupts
These operating modes are determined by setting the
appropriate bit(s) in the T1CON control register
FIGURE 9-2:
RTC INTERRUPTS
When an interrupt event occurs, the respective
interrupt flag, T1IF, is asserted and an interrupt will be
generated, if enabled. The T1IF bit must be cleared in
software. The respective Timer Interrupt Flag, T1IF, is
located in the IFS0 register in the interrupt controller.
Enabling an interrupt is accomplished via the
respective Timer Interrupt Enable bit, T1IE. The timer
interrupt enable bit is located in the IEC0 Control
register in the interrupt controller.
RECOMMENDED
COMPONENTS FOR
TIMER1 LP OSCILLATOR
RTC
C1
SOSCI
32.768 kHz
XTAL
dsPIC30FXXXX
SOSCO
C2
R
C1 = C2 = 18 pF; R = 100K
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70141E-page 67
—
TSIDL
—
Bit 12
—
Bit 11
—
Bit 10
—
Bit 9
—
Bit 7
Bit 6
—
TGATE
Period Register 1
Timer1 Register
Bit 8
u = uninitialized bit; — = unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’
TON
Bit 13
Refer to “dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual” (DS70046) for descriptions of register bit fields.
T1CON
Bit 14
Legend:
0104
PR1
Bit 15
TIMER1 REGISTER MAP(1)
Note 1:
0100
0102
TMR1
Addr.
SFR Name
TABLE 9-1:
Bit 4
TCKPS1 TCKPS0
Bit 5
—
Bit 3
TSYNC
Bit 2
TCS
Bit 1
—
Bit 0
0000 0000 0000 0000
1111 1111 1111 1111
uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu
Reset State
dsPIC30F3010/3011
DS70141E-page 68
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
dsPIC30F3010/3011
10.0
Note:
TIMER2/3 MODULE
This data sheet summarizes features of
this group of dsPIC30F devices and is not
intended to be a complete reference
source. For more information on the CPU,
peripherals, register descriptions and general device functionality, refer to the
“dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual”
(DS70046).
This section describes the 32-bit general purpose timer
module (Timer2/3) and associated operational modes.
Figure 10-1 depicts the simplified block diagram of the
32-bit Timer2/3 module. Figure 10-2 and Figure 10-3
show Timer2/3 configured as two independent 16-bit
timers; Timer2 and Timer3, respectively.
Note:
Timer2 is a ‘Type B’ timer and Timer3 is a
‘Type C’ timer. Please refer to the
appropriate timer type in Section 23.0
“Electrical Characteristics” of this
document.
The Timer2/3 module is a 32-bit timer, which can be
configured as two 16-bit timers, with selectable operating modes. These timers are utilized by other
peripheral modules such as:
• Input Capture
• Output Compare/Simple PWM
The following sections provide a detailed description,
including setup and control registers, along with
associated block diagrams for the operational modes of
the timers.
The 32-bit timer has the following modes:
• Two independent 16-bit timers (Timer2 and
Timer3) with all 16-bit operating modes (except
Asynchronous Counter mode)
• Single 32-bit timer operation
• Single 32-bit synchronous counter
Further, the following operational characteristics are
supported:
•
•
•
•
•
ADC Event Trigger
Timer Gate Operation
Selectable Prescaler Settings
Timer Operation during Idle and Sleep modes
Interrupt on a 32-Bit Period Register Match
These operating modes are determined by setting the
appropriate bit(s) in the 16-bit T2CON and T3CON
SFRs.
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
For 32-bit timer/counter operation, Timer2 is the lsw
and Timer3 is the msw of the 32-bit timer.
Note:
For 32-bit timer operation, T3CON control
bits are ignored. Only T2CON control bits
are used for setup and control. Timer2
clock and gate inputs are utilized for the
32-bit timer module, but an interrupt is
generated with the Timer3 Interrupt Flag
(T3IF) and the interrupt is enabled with the
Timer3 Interrupt Enable bit (T3IE).
16-Bit Mode: In the 16-bit mode, Timer2 and Timer3
can be configured as two independent 16-bit timers.
Each timer can be set up in either 16-bit Timer mode or
16-bit Synchronous Counter mode. See Section 9.0
“Timer1 Module” for details on these two operating
modes.
The only functional difference between Timer2 and
Timer3 is that Timer2 provides synchronization of the
clock prescaler output. This is useful for high-frequency
external clock inputs.
32-Bit Timer Mode: In the 32-Bit Timer mode, the
timer increments on every instruction cycle up to a
match value, preloads into the combined 32-bit Period
register, PR3/PR2, then resets to ‘0’ and continues to
count.
For synchronous 32-bit reads of the Timer2/Timer3
pair, reading the lsw (TMR2 register) will cause the
msw to be read and latched into a 16-bit holding
register, termed TMR3HLD.
For synchronous 32-bit writes, the holding register
(TMR3HLD) must first be written to. When followed by
a write to the TMR2 register, the contents of TMR3HLD
will be transferred and latched into the MSB of the
32-bit timer (TMR3).
32-Bit Synchronous Counter Mode: In the 32-Bit
Synchronous Counter mode, the timer increments on
the rising edge of the applied external clock signal,
which is synchronized with the internal phase clocks.
The timer counts up to a match value preloaded in the
combined 32-bit Period register, PR3/PR2, then resets
to ‘0’ and continues.
When the timer is configured for the Synchronous
Counter mode of operation and the CPU goes into the
Idle mode, the timer will stop incrementing unless the
TSIDL (T2CON<13>) bit = 0. If TSIDL = 1, the timer
module logic will resume the incrementing sequence
upon termination of the CPU Idle mode.
DS70141E-page 69
dsPIC30F3010/3011
FIGURE 10-1:
32-BIT TIMER2/3 BLOCK DIAGRAM
Data Bus<15:0>
TMR3HLD
16
Write TMR2
16
Read TMR2
16
Reset
TMR3
TMR2
MSB
LSB
Sync
ADC Event Trigger
Equal
Comparator x 32
PR3
T3IF
Event Flag
PR2
0
1
D
Q
CK
TGATE(T2CON<6>)
TCS
TGATE
TGATE
(T2CON<6>)
Q
T2CK
1X
Gate
Sync
TCY
Note:
01
TON
TCKPS<1:0>
2
Prescaler
1, 8, 64, 256
00
Timer Configuration bit, T32 T2CON(<3>), must be set to ‘1’ for a 32-bit timer/counter operation. All control
bits are respective to the T2CON register.
DS70141E-page 70
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
dsPIC30F3010/3011
FIGURE 10-2:
16-BIT TIMER2 BLOCK DIAGRAM (TYPE B TIMER)
PR2
Equal
Reset
Comparator x 16
TMR2
Sync
0
T2IF
Event Flag
1
Q
D
Q
CK
TGATE
TCS
TGATE
TGATE
T2CK
1X
Gate
Sync
TCKPS<1:0>
2
Prescaler
1, 8, 64, 256
01
TCY
FIGURE 10-3:
TON
00
16-BIT TIMER3 BLOCK DIAGRAM (TYPE C TIMER)
PR3
ADC Event Trigger
Equal
Reset
T3IF
Event Flag
Comparator x 16
TMR3
0
1
Q
D
Q
CK
TCS
TGATE
TGATE
TGATE
Sync
1X
01
TCY
Note:
TON
TCKPS<1:0>
2
Prescaler
1, 8, 64, 256
00
The dsPIC30F3010/3011 devices do not have external pin inputs to Timer3. In these devices, the following
modes should not be used:
1. TCS = 1
2. TCS = 0 and TGATE = 1 (Gated Time Accumulation)
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70141E-page 71
dsPIC30F3010/3011
10.1
Timer Gate Operation
The 32-bit timer can be placed in the Gated Time
Accumulation mode. This mode allows the internal TCY
to increment the respective timer when the gate input
signal (T2CK pin) is asserted high. Control bit, TGATE
(T2CON<6>), must be set to enable this mode. When
in this mode, Timer2 is the originating clock source.
The TGATE setting is ignored for Timer3. The timer
must be enabled (TON = 1) and the timer clock source
set to internal (TCS = 0).
The falling edge of the external signal terminates the
count operation, but does not reset the timer. The user
must reset the timer in order to start counting from zero.
10.2
ADC Event Trigger
When a match occurs between the 32-bit timer (TMR3/
TMR2) and the 32-bit combined Period register (PR3/
PR2), a special ADC trigger event signal is generated
by Timer3.
10.3
10.4
Timer Operation During Sleep
Mode
During CPU Sleep mode, the timer will not operate,
because the internal clocks are disabled.
10.5
Timer Interrupt
The 32-bit timer module can generate an interrupt-onperiod match, or on the falling edge of the external gate
signal. When the 32-bit timer count matches the
respective 32-bit Period register, or the falling edge of
the external “gate” signal is detected, the T3IF bit
(IFS0<7>) is asserted and an interrupt will be generated if enabled. In this mode, the T3IF interrupt flag is
used as the source of the interrupt. The T3IF bit must
be cleared in software.
Enabling an interrupt is accomplished via the
respective Timer Interrupt Enable bit, T3IE (IEC0<7>).
Timer Prescaler
The input clock (FOSC/4 or external clock) to the timer
has a prescale option of 1:1, 1:8, 1:64 and 1:256,
selected by control bits, TCKPS<1:0> (T2CON<5:4>
and T3CON<5:4>). For the 32-bit timer operation, the
originating clock source is Timer2. The prescaler
operation for Timer3 is not applicable in this mode. The
prescaler counter is cleared when any of the following
occurs:
• a write to the TMR2/TMR3 register
• clearing either of the TON (T2CON<15> or
T3CON<15>) bits to ‘0’
• device Reset such as POR and BOR
However, if the timer is disabled (TON = 0), then the
Timer2 prescaler cannot be reset, since the prescaler
clock is halted.
TMR2/TMR3 is not cleared when T2CON/T3CON is
written.
DS70141E-page 72
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
0112
T2CON
T3CON
TON
TON
—
—
TSIDL
TSIDL
—
—
—
—
Bit 9
Bit 7
Timer2 Register
Bit 8
Bit 6
Bit 5
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
TGATE
TGATE
Period Register 3
Period Register 2
Timer3 Register
Bit 4
TCKPS1 TCKPS0
TCKPS1 TCKPS0
Timer3 Holding Register (For 32-bit timer operations only)
Bit 10
Refer to “dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual” (DS70046) for descriptions of register bit fields.
0110
PR3
Bit 11
Note 1:
010E
PR2
Bit 12
u = uninitialized bit; — = unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’
010C
TMR3
Bit 13
Legend:
0108
010A
TMR3HLD
Bit 14
Bit 15
0106
SFR Name Addr.
TMR2
TIMER2/3 REGISTER MAP(1)
TABLE 10-1:
—
T32
Bit 3
—
—
Bit 2
TCS
TCS
Bit 1
—
—
Bit 0
Reset State
0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000
1111 1111 1111 1111
1111 1111 1111 1111
uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu
uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu
uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu
dsPIC30F3010/3011
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70141E-page 73
dsPIC30F3010/3011
NOTES:
DS70141E-page 74
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
dsPIC30F3010/3011
11.0
Note:
TIMER4/5 MODULE
The Timer4/5 module is similar in operation to the
Timer 2/3 module. However, there are some
differences, which are as follows:
This data sheet summarizes features of
this group of dsPIC30F devices and is not
intended to be a complete reference
source. For more information on the CPU,
peripherals, register descriptions and general device functionality, refer to the
“dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual”
(DS70046).
• The Timer4/5 module does not support the ADC
event trigger feature
• Timer4/5 can not be utilized by other peripheral
modules such as input capture and output compare
The operating modes of the Timer4/5 module are
determined by setting the appropriate bit(s) in the 16-bit
T4CON and T5CON SFRs.
This section describes the second 32-bit general
purpose timer module (Timer4/5) and associated
operational modes. Figure 11-1 depicts the simplified
block diagram of the 32-bit Timer4/5 module.
Figure 11-2 and Figure 11-3 show Timer4/5 configured
as two independent 16-bit timers, Timer4 and Timer5,
respectively.
Note:
For 32-bit timer/counter operation, Timer4 is the lsw
and Timer5 is the msw of the 32-bit timer.
Note:
For 32-bit timer operation, T5CON control
bits are ignored. Only T4CON control bits
are used for setup and control. Timer4
clock and gate inputs are utilized for the
32-bit timer module, but an interrupt is
generated with the Timer5 Interrupt Flag
(T5IF) and the interrupt is enabled with the
Timer5 Interrupt Enable bit (T5IE).
Timer4 is a ‘Type B’ timer and Timer5 is a
‘Type C’ timer. Please refer to the
appropriate timer type in Section 23.0
“Electrical Characteristics” of this
document.
FIGURE 11-1:
32-BIT TIMER4/5 BLOCK DIAGRAM
Data Bus<15:0>
TMR5HLD
16
Write TMR4
16
Read TMR4
16
Reset
Equal
TMR5
TMR4
MSB
LSB
Comparator x 32
PR5
PR4
0
1
TGATE
(T4CON<6>)
Q
D
Q
CK
TGATE(T4CON<6>)
TCS
TGATE
T5IF
Event Flag
Sync
1x
Note:
Gate
Sync
01
TCY
00
TCKPS<1:0>
TON
2
Prescaler
1, 8, 64, 256
Timer configuration bit, T32 T4CON(<3>), must be set to ‘1’ for a 32-bit timer/counter operation. All
control bits are respective to the T4CON register.
The dsPIC30F3010/3011 devices do not have external pin inputs to Timer4 or Timer5. In these devices,
the following modes should not be used:
1. TCS = 1
2. TCS = 0 and TGATE = 1 (Gated Time Accumulation)
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70141E-page 75
dsPIC30F3010/3011
FIGURE 11-2:
16-BIT TIMER4 BLOCK DIAGRAM (TYPE B TIMER)
PR4
Equal
Reset
TMR4
Sync
0
1
Q
D
Q
CK
TGATE
TCS
TGATE
TGATE
T4IF
Event Flag
Comparator x 16
TCKPS<1:0>
TON
2
1x
Gate
Sync
TCY
Note:
DS70141E-page 76
01
Prescaler
1, 8, 64, 256
00
The dsPIC30F3010/3011 devices do not have external pin inputs to Timer4 or Timer5. In these devices,
the following modes should not be used:
1. TCS = 1
2. TCS = 0 and TGATE = 1 (Gated Time Accumulation)
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
dsPIC30F3010/3011
FIGURE 11-3:
16-BIT TIMER5 BLOCK DIAGRAM (TYPE C TIMER)
PR5
Equal
ADC Event Trigger
Reset
TMR5
0
1
Q
D
Q
CK
TGATE
TCS
TGATE
Sync
TGATE
T5IF
Event Flag
Comparator x 16
Note:
2
1x
01
TCY
TCKPS<1:0>
TON
Prescaler
1, 8, 64, 256
00
The dsPIC30F3010/3011 devices do not have external pin inputs to Timer4 or Timer5. In these devices,
the following modes should not be used:
1. TCS = 1
2. TCS = 0 and TGATE = 1 (Gated Time Accumulation)
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70141E-page 77
DS70141E-page 78
011E
0120
T4CON
T5CON
TON
TON
—
—
TSIDL
TSIDL
—
—
Bit 12
—
—
Bit 11
Bit 9
Bit 7
Bit 6
Timer4 Register
Bit 8
Bit 5
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
TGATE
TGATE
Period Register 5
Period Register 4
Timer5 Register
TCKPS1
TCKPS1
Timer5 Holding Register (For 32-bit operations only)
Bit 10
Refer to “dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual” (DS70046) for descriptions of register bit fields.
011C
PR5
Bit 13
Note 1:
011A
PR4
Bit 14
u = uninitialized bit; — = unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’
0118
TMR5
Bit 15
TIMER4/5 REGISTER MAP(1)
Legend:
0114
0116
TMR5HLD
Addr.
TMR4
SFR Name
TABLE 11-1:
TCKPS0
TCKPS0
Bit 4
—
T45
Bit 3
—
—
Bit 2
TCS
TCS
Bit 1
—
—
Bit 0
0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000
1111 1111 1111 1111
1111 1111 1111 1111
uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu
uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu
uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu
Reset State
dsPIC30F3010/3011
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
dsPIC30F3010/3011
12.0
INPUT CAPTURE MODULE
Note:
The key operational features of the input capture
module are:
This data sheet summarizes features of
this group of dsPIC30F devices and is not
intended to be a complete reference
source. For more information on the CPU,
peripherals, register descriptions and general device functionality, refer to the
“dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual”
(DS70046).
• Simple Capture Event mode
• Timer2 and Timer3 mode selection
• Interrupt on input capture event
These operating modes are determined by setting
the appropriate bits in the ICxCON register
(where x = 1,2,...,N).
Note:
This section describes the input capture module and
associated operational modes. The features provided by
this module are useful in applications requiring
frequency (period) and pulse measurement. Figure 12-1
depicts a block diagram of the input capture module.
Input capture is useful for such modes as:
The dsPIC30F3010/3011 devices have
four capture channels. The channels are
designated IC1, IC2, IC7 and IC8 to
maintain software compatibility with other
dsPIC30F devices.
• Frequency/Period/Pulse Measurements
• Additional Sources of External Interrupts
FIGURE 12-1:
INPUT CAPTURE MODE BLOCK DIAGRAM
From General Purpose Timer Module
T3_CNT
T2_CNT
16
ICx
Pin
Prescaler
1, 4, 16
3
1
Edge
Detection
Logic
Clock
Synchronizer
16
0
ICTMR
FIFO
R/W
Logic
ICM<2:0>
Mode Select
ICxBUF
ICBNE, ICOV
ICI<1:0>
ICxCON
Data Bus
Note:
Interrupt
Logic
Set Flag
ICxIF
Where ‘x’ is shown, reference is made to the registers or bits associated to the respective input capture
channels, 1 through N.
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70141E-page 79
dsPIC30F3010/3011
12.1
Simple Capture Event Mode
The simple capture events in the dsPIC30F product
family are:
•
•
•
•
•
Capture every falling edge
Capture every rising edge
Capture every 4th rising edge
Capture every 16th rising edge
Capture every rising and falling edge
These simple Input Capture modes are configured by
setting the appropriate bits, ICM<2:0> (ICxCON<2:0>).
12.1.1
CAPTURE PRESCALER
There are four input capture prescaler settings, specified by bits, ICM<2:0> (ICxCON<2:0>). Whenever the
capture channel is turned off, the prescaler counter will
be cleared. In addition, any Reset will clear the
prescaler counter.
12.1.2
CAPTURE BUFFER OPERATION
Each capture channel has an associated FIFO buffer,
which is four 16-bit words deep. There are two status
flags, which provide status on the FIFO buffer:
• ICBNE — Input Capture Buffer Not Empty
• ICOV — Input Capture Overflow
The ICBNE will be set on the first input capture event
and remain set until all capture events have been read
from the FIFO. As each word is read from the FIFO, the
remaining words are advanced by one position within
the buffer.
In the event that the FIFO is full with four capture
events and a fifth capture event occurs prior to a read
of the FIFO, an overflow condition will occur and the
ICOV bit will be set to a logic ‘1’. The fifth capture event
is lost and is not stored in the FIFO. No additional
events will be captured till all four events have been
read from the buffer.
If a FIFO read is performed after the last read and no
new capture event has been received, the read will
yield indeterminate results.
12.1.3
TIMER2 AND TIMER3 SELECTION
MODE
Each capture channel can select between one of two
timers for the time base, Timer2 or Timer3.
Selection of the timer resource is accomplished
through SFR bit, ICTMR (ICxCON<7>). Timer3 is the
default timer resource available for the input capture
module.
12.1.4
HALL SENSOR MODE
When the input capture module is set for capture on
every edge, rising and falling, ICM<2:0> = 001, the
following operations are performed by the input
capture logic:
• The input capture interrupt flag is set on every
edge, rising and falling.
• The interrupt on Capture Mode Setting bits,
ICI<1:0>, is ignored, since every capture
generates an interrupt.
• A capture overflow condition is not generated in
this mode.
12.2
Input Capture Operation During
Sleep and Idle Modes
An input capture event will generate a device wake-up
or interrupt, if enabled, if the device is in CPU Idle or
Sleep mode.
Independent of the timer being enabled, the input
capture module will wake-up from the CPU Sleep or Idle
mode when a capture event occurs if ICM<2:0> = 111
and the interrupt enable bit is asserted. The same wakeup can generate an interrupt if the conditions for
processing the interrupt have been satisfied. The wakeup feature is useful as a method of adding extra external
pin interrupts.
12.2.1
INPUT CAPTURE IN CPU SLEEP
MODE
CPU Sleep mode allows input capture module operation with reduced functionality. In the CPU Sleep
mode, the ICI<1:0> bits are not applicable, and the
input capture module can only function as an external
interrupt source.
The capture module must be configured for interrupt
only on the rising edge (ICM<2:0> = 111) in order for
the input capture module to be used while the device
is in Sleep mode. The prescale settings of 4:1 or 16:1
are not applicable in this mode.
DS70141E-page 80
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
dsPIC30F3010/3011
12.2.2
INPUT CAPTURE IN CPU IDLE
MODE
CPU Idle mode allows input capture module operation
with full functionality. In the CPU Idle mode, the Interrupt mode selected by the ICI<1:0> bits is applicable, as
well as the 4:1 and 16:1 capture prescale settings,
which are defined by control bits, ICM<2:0>. This mode
requires the selected timer to be enabled. Moreover, the
ICSIDL bit must be asserted to a logic ‘0’.
If the input capture module is defined as ICM<2:0> = 111
in CPU Idle mode, the input capture pin will serve only as
an external interrupt pin.
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
12.3
Input Capture Interrupts
The input capture channels have the ability to generate
an interrupt based upon the selected number of
capture events. The selection number is set by control
bits, ICI<1:0> (ICxCON<6:5>).
Each channel provides an interrupt flag (ICxIF) bit. The
respective capture channel interrupt flag is located in
the corresponding IFSx register.
Enabling an interrupt is accomplished via the respective Input Capture Channel Interrupt Enable (ICxIE) bit.
The capture interrupt enable bit is located in the
corresponding IEC Control register.
DS70141E-page 81
DS70141E-page 82
015A
015C
015E
IC7CON
IC8BUF
IC8CON
—
—
—
—
—
ICSIDL
ICSIDL
ICSIDL
—
—
—
—
Bit 12
—
—
—
—
Bit 11
—
—
—
—
Bit 10
—
—
—
—
Bit 8
Bit 7
ICTMR
ICTMR
ICTMR
—
ICTMR
Input 8 Capture Register
—
Input 7 Capture Register
—
Input 2 Capture Register
—
Input 1 Capture Register
Bit 9
Refer to “dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual” (DS70046) for descriptions of register bit fields.
0158
IC7BUF
—
ICSIDL
Bit 13
Note 1:
0146
IC2CON
—
Bit 14
u = uninitialized bit; — = unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’
0144
IC2BUF
—
Bit 15
INPUT CAPTURE REGISTER MAP(1)
Legend:
0140
0142
IC1BUF
Addr.
IC1CON
SFR Name
TABLE 12-1:
Bit 5
ICI<1:0>
ICI<1:0>
ICI<1:0>
ICI<1:0>
Bit 6
ICOV
ICOV
ICOV
ICOV
Bit 4
ICBNE
ICBNE
ICBNE
ICBNE
Bit 3
Bit 2
ICM<2:0>
ICM<2:0>
ICM<2:0>
ICM<2:0>
Bit 1
Bit 0
0000 0000 0000 0000
uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu
0000 0000 0000 0000
uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu
0000 0000 0000 0000
uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu
0000 0000 0000 0000
uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu
Reset State
dsPIC30F3010/3011
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
dsPIC30F3010/3011
13.0
OUTPUT COMPARE MODULE
Note:
The key operational features of the output compare
module include:
This data sheet summarizes features of
this group of dsPIC30F devices and is not
intended to be a complete reference
source. For more information on the CPU,
peripherals, register descriptions and general device functionality, refer to the
“dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual”
(DS70046).
•
•
•
•
•
•
This section describes the output compare module and
associated operational modes. The features provided
by this module are useful in applications requiring
operational modes such as:
• Generation of Variable Width Output Pulses
• Power Factor Correction
Figure 13-1 depicts a block diagram of the output
compare module.
FIGURE 13-1:
Timer2 and Timer3 Selection mode
Simple Output Compare Match mode
Dual Output Compare Match mode
Simple PWM mode
Output Compare during Sleep and Idle modes
Interrupt on Output Compare/PWM Event
These operating modes are determined by setting the
appropriate bits in the 16-bit OCxCON SFR (where
x = 1,2,3,...,N). The dsPIC30F3010/3011 devices have
4/2 compare channels, respectively.
OCxRS and OCxR in the figure represent the Dual
Compare registers. In the Dual Compare mode, the
OCxR register is used for the first compare and OCxRS
is used for the second compare.
OUTPUT COMPARE MODE BLOCK DIAGRAM
Set Flag bit
OCxIF
OCxRS
Output
Logic
OCxR
3
OCM<2:0>
Mode Select
Comparator
S Q
R
OCx
Output Enable
OCFA
(for x = 1, 2, 3 or 4)
0
1
OCTSEL
0
1
From GP Timer Module
TMR2<15:0
Note:
TMR3<15:0>
T2P2_MATCH
T3P3_MATCH
Where ‘x’ is shown, reference is made to the registers associated with the respective output compare channels,
1 through N.
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70141E-page 83
dsPIC30F3010/3011
13.1
Timer2 and Timer3 Selection Mode
Each output compare channel can select between one
of two 16-bit timers: Timer2 or Timer3.
The selection of the timers is controlled by the OCTSEL
bit (OCxCON<3>). Timer2 is the default timer resource
for the output compare module.
13.2
Simple Output Compare Match
Mode
When control bits, OCM<2:0> (OCxCON<2:0>) = 001,
010 or 011, the selected output compare channel is
configured for one of three simple output compare
match modes:
• Compare forces I/O pin low
• Compare forces I/O pin high
• Compare toggles I/O pin
Dual Output Compare Match Mode
When control bits, OCM<2:0> (OCxCON<2:0>) = 100
or 101, the selected output compare channel is configured for one of two Dual Output Compare modes,
which are:
• Single Output Pulse mode
• Continuous Output Pulse mode
13.3.1
For the user to configure the module for the generation
of a single output pulse, the following steps are
required (assuming timer is off):
TCY.
• Determine instruction cycle time,
• Calculate desired pulse width value based on TCY.
• Calculate time to start pulse from timer start value
of 0x0000.
• Write pulse-width start and stop times into OCxR
and OCxRS Compare registers (x denotes
channel 1, 2, ...,N).
• Set Timer Period register to value equal to, or
greater than, value in OCxRS Compare register.
• Set OCM<2:0> = 100.
• Enable timer, TON (TxCON<15>) = 1.
To initiate another single pulse, issue another write to
set OCM<2:0> = 100.
DS70141E-page 84
• Determine instruction cycle time, TCY.
• Calculate desired pulse value based on TCY.
• Calculate timer to start pulse-width from timer
start value of 0x0000.
• Write pulse-width start and stop times into OCxR
and OCxRS (x denotes channel 1, 2, ...,N)
Compare registers, respectively.
• Set Timer Period register to value equal to, or
greater than, value in OCxRS Compare register.
• Set OCM<2:0> = 101.
• Enable timer, TON (TxCON<15>) = 1.
Simple PWM Mode
When control bits, OCM<2:0> (OCxCON<2:0>) = 110
or 111, the selected output compare channel is configured for the PWM mode of operation. When configured
for the PWM mode of operation, OCxR is the main latch
(read-only) and OCxRS is the secondary latch. This
enables glitchless PWM transitions.
The user must perform the following steps in order to
configure the output compare module for PWM
operation:
1.
2.
3.
SINGLE PULSE MODE
CONTINUOUS PULSE MODE
For the user to configure the module for the generation
of a continuous stream of output pulses, the following
steps are required:
13.4
The OCxR register is used in these modes. The OCxR
register is loaded with a value and is compared to the
selected incrementing timer count. When a compare
occurs, one of these Compare Match modes occurs. If
the counter resets to zero before reaching the value in
OCxR, the state of the OCx pin remains unchanged.
13.3
13.3.2
4.
Set the PWM period by writing to the appropriate
Period register.
Set the PWM duty cycle by writing to the OCxRS
register.
Configure the output compare module for PWM
operation.
Set the TMRx prescale value and enable the
timer, TON (TxCON<15>) = 1.
13.4.1
INPUT PIN FAULT PROTECTION
FOR PWM
When control bits, OCM<2:0> (OCxCON<2:0>) = 111,
the selected output compare channel is again configured for the PWM mode of operation, with the additional feature of input Fault protection. While in this
mode, if a logic ‘0’ is detected on the OCFA/B pin, the
respective PWM output pin is placed in the highimpedance input state. The OCFLT bit (OCxCON<4>)
indicates whether a Fault condition has occurred. This
state will be maintained until both of the following
events have occurred:
• The external Fault condition has been removed.
• The PWM mode has been re-enabled by writing
to the appropriate control bits.
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
dsPIC30F3010/3011
13.4.2
PWM PERIOD
When the selected TMRx is equal to its respective
Period register, PRx, the following four events occur on
the next increment cycle:
The PWM period is specified by writing to the PRx
register. The PWM period can be calculated using
Equation 13-1.
EQUATION 13-1:
• TMRx is cleared.
• The OCx pin is set.
- Exception 1: If PWM duty cycle is 0x0000,
the OCx pin will remain low.
- Exception 2: If duty cycle is greater than PRx,
the pin will remain high.
• The PWM duty cycle is latched from OCxRS into
OCxR.
• The corresponding timer interrupt flag is set.
PWM PERIOD
PWM period = [(PRx) + 1] • 4 • TOSC •
(TMRx prescale value)
PWM frequency is defined as 1/[PWM period].
See Figure 13-1 for key PWM period comparisons.
Timer3 is referred to in the figure for clarity.
FIGURE 13-1:
PWM OUTPUT TIMING
Period
Duty Cycle
TMR3 = PR3
T3IF = 1
(Interrupt Flag)
OCxR = OCxRS
13.5
TMR3 = PR3
T3IF = 1
(Interrupt Flag)
OCxR = OCxRS
TMR3 = Duty Cycle (OCxR)
Output Compare Operation During
CPU Sleep Mode
When the CPU enters the Sleep mode, all internal
clocks are stopped. Therefore, when the CPU enters
the Sleep state, the output compare channel will drive
the pin to the active state that was observed prior to
entering the CPU Sleep state.
For example, if the pin was high when the CPU
entered the Sleep state, the pin will remain high. Likewise, if the pin was low when the CPU entered the
Sleep state, the pin will remain low. In either case, the
output compare module will resume operation when
the device wakes up.
13.6
Output Compare Operation During
CPU Idle Mode
When the CPU enters the Idle mode, the output
compare module can operate with full functionality.
TMR3 = Duty Cycle (OCxR)
13.7
Output Compare Interrupts
The output compare channels have the ability to
generate an interrupt on a compare match for
whichever Match mode has been selected.
For all modes except the PWM mode, when a compare
event occurs, the respective interrupt flag (OCxIF) is
asserted and an interrupt will be generated, if enabled.
The OCxIF bit is located in the corresponding IFS
register, and must be cleared in software. The interrupt
is enabled via the respective Compare Interrupt Enable
(OCxIE) bit, located in the corresponding IEC register.
For the PWM mode, when an event occurs, the respective Timer Interrupt Flag (T2IF or T3IF) is asserted and
an interrupt will be generated, if enabled. The TxIF bit
is located in the IFS0 register, and must be cleared in
software. The interrupt is enabled via the respective
Timer Interrupt Enable bit (T2IE or T3IE), located in the
IEC0 register. The output compare interrupt flag is
never set during the PWM mode of operation.
The output compare channel will operate during the
CPU Idle mode if the OCSIDL bit (OCxCON<13>) is at
logic ‘0’ and the selected time base (Timer2 or Timer3)
is enabled and the TSIDL bit of the selected timer is
set to logic ‘0’.
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70141E-page 85
DS70141E-page 86
— = unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’
Refer to “dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual” (DS70046) for descriptions of register bit fields.
These registers are not available on dsPIC30F3010 devices.
Legend:
Note 1:
2:
—
—
OCSIDL
—
—
—
—
0196
—
OC4CON(2)
—
0194
OCSIDL
OC4R(2)
—
0192
—
0190
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Output Compare 4 Main Register
Output Compare 4 Secondary Register
—
Output Compare 3 Main Register
—
—
—
—
Bit 5
Output Compare 3 Secondary Register
—
OC4RS(2)
—
—
Output Compare 2 Main Register
OC3CON(2)
—
—
018E
—
—
Output Compare 1 Main Register
OC3R(2)
OCSIDL
Bit 6
Output Compare 2 Secondary Register
—
018C
—
—
OC3RS(2)
—
—
018A
—
OC2CON
OCSIDL
Bit 7
0186
—
Bit 8
Output Compare 1 Secondary Register
Bit 9
0188
—
Bit 10
OC2R
OC1CON
Bit 11
OC2RS
0182
0184
OC1R
Bit 12
0180
Bit 13
Bit 15
Addr.
SFR Name
OC1RS
Bit 14
OUTPUT COMPARE REGISTER MAP(1)
TABLE 13-1:
OCFLT
OCFLT
OCFLT
OCFLT
Bit 4
OCTSEL
OCTSEL
OCTSEL
OCTSEL
Bit 3
Bit 2
OCM<2:0>
OCM<2:0>
OCM<2:0>
OCM<2:0>
Bit 1
Bit 0
Reset State
0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000
dsPIC30F3010/3011
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
dsPIC30F3010/3011
14.0
QUADRATURE ENCODER
INTERFACE (QEI) MODULE
Note:
The operational features of the QEI include:
• Three input channels for two phase signals and
index pulse
• 16-bit up/down position counter
• Count direction status
• Position Measurement (x2 and x4) mode
• Programmable digital noise filters on inputs
• Alternate 16-Bit Timer/Counter mode
• Quadrature Encoder Interface interrupts
This data sheet summarizes features of
this group of dsPIC30F devices and is not
intended to be a complete reference
source. For more information on the CPU,
peripherals, register descriptions and general device functionality, refer to the
“dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual”
(DS70046).
These operating modes are determined by setting the
appropriate bits QEIM<2:0> (QEICON<10:8>).
Figure 14-1 depicts the Quadrature Encoder Interface
block diagram.
This section describes the Quadrature Encoder
Interface (QEI) module and associated operational
modes. The QEI module provides the interface to
incremental encoders for obtaining mechanical position
data.
FIGURE 14-1:
QUADRATURE ENCODER INTERFACE BLOCK DIAGRAM
TQCKPS<1:0>
Sleep Input
TQCS
TCY
Synchronize
0
Det
1
2
Prescaler
1, 8, 64, 256
1
QEIM<2:0>
0
TQGATE
Programmable
Digital Filter
QEA
UPDN_SRC
0
QEICON<11>
2
Quadrature
Encoder
Interface Logic
QEB
Programmable
Digital Filter
INDX
Programmable
Digital Filter
Q
CK
Q
QEIIF
Event
Flag
16-Bit Up/Down Counter
(POSCNT)
Reset
Comparator/
Zero Detect
3
QEIM<2:0>
Mode Select
1
D
Equal
Max Count Register
(MAXCNT)
Up/Down(1)
3
Note
1:
In dsPIC30F3010/3011, the UPDN pin is not available. Up/Down logic bit can still be polled by software.
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70141E-page 87
dsPIC30F3010/3011
14.1
Quadrature Encoder Interface
Logic
A typical incremental (a.k.a. optical) encoder has three
outputs: Phase A, Phase B and an index pulse. These
signals are useful and often required in position and
speed control of ACIM and SR motors.
The two channels, Phase A (QEA) and Phase B (QEB),
have a unique relationship. If Phase A leads Phase B,
then the direction (of the motor) is deemed positive or
forward. If Phase A lags Phase B, then the direction (of
the motor) is deemed negative or reverse.
A third channel, termed index pulse, occurs once per
revolution and is used as a reference to establish an
absolute position. The index pulse coincides with
Phase A and Phase B, both low.
14.2
16-Bit Up/Down Position Counter
Mode
The 16-bit up/down counter counts up or down on
every count pulse, which is generated by the difference
of the Phase A and Phase B input signals. The counter
acts as an integrator, whose count value is proportional
to position. The direction of the count is determined by
the UPDN signal, which is generated by the
Quadrature Encoder Interface logic.
14.2.1
POSITION COUNTER ERROR
CHECKING
Position count error checking in the QEI is provided for
and indicated by the CNTERR bit (QEICON<15>). The
error checking only applies when the position counter
is configured for Reset on the Index Pulse modes
(QEIM<2:0> = 110 or 100). In these modes, the
contents of the POSCNT register are compared with
the values (0xFFFF or MAXCNT + 1, depending on
direction). If these values are detected, an error condition is generated by setting the CNTERR bit and a QEI
count error interrupt is generated. The QEI count error
interrupt can be disabled by setting the CEID bit
(DFLTCON<8>). The position counter continues to
count encoder edges after an error has been detected.
The POSCNT register continues to count up/down until
a natural rollover/underflow. No interrupt is generated
for the natural rollover/underflow event. The CNTERR
bit is a read/write bit and reset in software by the user.
DS70141E-page 88
14.2.2
POSITION COUNTER RESET
The Position Counter Reset Enable bit, POSRES
(QEI<2>), controls whether the position counter is reset
when the index pulse is detected. This bit is only
applicable when QEIM<2:0> = 100 or 110.
If the POSRES bit is set to ‘1’, then the position counter
is reset when the index pulse is detected. If the
POSRES bit is set to ‘0’, then the position counter is not
reset when the index pulse is detected. The position
counter will continue counting up or down, and will be
reset on the rollover or underflow condition.
When selecting the INDX signal to reset the Position
Counter (POSCNT), the user has to specify the states
on QEA and QEB input pins. These states have to be
matched in order for a Reset to occur. These states are
selected by the IMV<1:0> bits in the DFLTCON
register.
The IMV<1:0> (Index Match Value) bits allow the user
to specify the state of the QEA and QEB input pins
during an index pulse when the POSCNT register is to
be reset.
In x4 Quadrature Count mode:
IMV1 = Required state of Phase B input signal for
match on index pulse
IMV0 = Required state of Phase A input signal for
match on index pulse
In x2 Quadrature Count mode:
IMV1 = Selects phase input signal for index state
match (0 = Phase A, 1 = Phase B)
IMV0 = Required state of the selected phase input
signal for match on index pulse
The interrupt is still generated on the detection of the
index pulse and not on the position counter overflow/
underflow.
14.2.3
COUNT DIRECTION STATUS
As mentioned in the previous section, the QEI logic
generates an UPDN signal based upon the relationship
between Phase A and Phase B. In addition to the output pin, the state of this internal UPDN signal is
supplied to a SFR bit, UPDN (QEICON<11>), as a
read-only bit.
Note:
QEI pins are multiplexed with analog inputs.
The user must insure that all QEI associated pins are set as digital inputs in the
ADPCFG register.
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
dsPIC30F3010/3011
14.3
Position Measurement Mode
There are two measurement modes which are supported and are termed x2 and x4. These modes are
selected by the QEIM<2:0> mode select bits located in
SFR, QEICON<10:8>.
When control bits, QEIM<2:0> = 100 or 101, the x2
Measurement mode is selected and the QEI logic only
looks at the Phase A input for the position counter
increment rate. Every rising and falling edge of the
Phase A signal causes the position counter to be incremented or decremented. The Phase B signal is still
utilized for the determination of the counter direction,
just as in the x4 Measurement mode.
Within the x2 Measurement mode, there are two
variations of how the position counter is reset:
1.
2.
Position counter reset by detection of index
pulse, QEIM<2:0> = 100.
Position counter reset by match with MAXCNT,
QEIM<2:0> = 101.
When control bits, QEIM<2:0> = 110 or 111, the x4
Measurement mode is selected and the QEI logic looks
at both edges of the Phase A and Phase B input
signals. Every edge of both signals causes the position
counter to increment or decrement.
Within the x4 Measurement mode, there are two
variations of how the position counter is reset:
1.
2.
Position counter reset by detection of index
pulse, QEIM<2:0> = 110.
Position counter reset by match with MAXCNT,
QEIM<2:0> = 111.
The x4 Measurement mode provides for finer resolution data (more position counts) for determining motor
position.
14.4
14.5
When the QEI module is not configured for the QEI
mode, QEIM<2:0> = 001, the module can be configured as a simple 16-bit timer/counter. The setup and
control of the auxiliary timer is accomplished through
the QEICON SFR register. This timer functions identically to Timer1. The QEA pin is used as the timer clock
input.
When configured as a timer, the POSCNT register
serves as the Timer Count register and the MAXCNT
register serves as the Period register. When a Timer/
Period register match occurs, the QEI interrupt flag will
be asserted.
The only exception between the general purpose
timers and this timer is the added feature of external
up/down input select. When the UPDN pin is asserted
high, the timer will increment up. When the UPDN pin
is asserted low, the timer will be decremented.
Note:
The filter ensures that the filtered output signal is not
permitted to change until a stable value has been
registered for three consecutive clock cycles.
For the QEA, QEB and INDX pins, the clock divide
frequency for the digital filter is programmed by bits,
QECK<2:0> (DFLTCON<6:4>), and are derived from
the base instruction cycle, TCY.
Changing the operational mode (i.e., from
QEI to timer or vice versa), will not affect
the Timer/Position Count register contents.
The UPDN control/status bit (QEICON<11>) can be
used to select the count direction state of the Timer
register. When UPDN = 1, the timer will count up. When
UPDN = 0, the timer will count down.
In addition, control bit, UPDN_SRC (QEICON<0>),
determines whether the timer count direction state is
based on the logic state written into the UPDN control/
status bit (QEICON<11>), or the QEB pin state. When
UPDN_SRC = 1, the timer count direction is controlled
from the QEB pin. Likewise, when UPDN_SRC = 0, the
timer count direction is controlled by the UPDN bit.
Note:
Programmable Digital Noise
Filters
The digital noise filter section is responsible for rejecting noise on the incoming capture or quadrature
signals. Schmitt Trigger inputs and a three-clock cycle
delay filter combine to reject low level noise and large,
short duration noise spikes that typically occur in noise
prone applications, such as a motor system.
Alternate 16-Bit Timer/Counter
14.6
14.6.1
This timer does not support the External
Asynchronous Counter mode of operation.
If using an external clock source, the clock
will automatically be synchronized to the
internal instruction cycle.
QEI Module Operation During CPU
Sleep Mode
QEI OPERATION DURING CPU
SLEEP MODE
The QEI module will be halted during the CPU Sleep
mode.
14.6.2
TIMER OPERATION DURING CPU
SLEEP MODE
During CPU Sleep mode, the timer will not operate,
because the internal clocks are disabled.
To enable the filter output for channels, QEA, QEB and
INDX, the QEOUT bit must be ‘1’. The filter network for
all channels is disabled on POR and BOR.
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70141E-page 89
dsPIC30F3010/3011
14.7
QEI Module Operation During CPU
Idle Mode
Since the QEI module can function as a Quadrature
Encoder Interface, or as a 16-bit timer, the following
section describes operation of the module in both
modes.
14.7.1
QEI OPERATION DURING CPU IDLE
MODE
When the CPU is placed in the Idle mode, the QEI
module will operate if the QEISIDL bit
(QEICON<13>) = 0. This bit defaults to a logic ‘0’
upon executing POR and BOR. For halting the QEI
module during the CPU Idle mode, QEISIDL should
be set to ‘1’.
14.7.2
TIMER OPERATION DURING CPU
IDLE MODE
When the CPU is placed in the Idle mode and the QEI
module is configured in the 16-Bit Timer mode, the
16-bit timer will operate if the QEISIDL bit (QEICON<13>) = 0. This bit defaults to a logic ‘0’ upon
executing POR and BOR. For halting the timer module
during the CPU Idle mode, QEISIDL should be set
to ‘1’.
14.8
Quadrature Encoder Interface
Interrupts
The Quadrature Encoder Interface has the ability to
generate an interrupt on occurrence of the following
events:
• Interrupt on 16-bit up/down position counter
rollover/underflow
• Detection of qualified index pulse, or if CNTERR
bit is set
• Timer period match event (overflow/underflow)
• Gate accumulation event
The QEI Interrupt Flag bit, QEIIF, is asserted upon
occurrence of any of the above events. The QEIIF bit
must be cleared in software. QEIIF is located in the
IFS2 register.
Enabling an interrupt is accomplished via the respective enable bit, QEIIE. The QEIIE bit is located in the
IEC2 register.
If the QEISIDL bit is cleared, the timer will function
normally as if the CPU Idle mode had not been
entered.
DS70141E-page 90
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
Bit 15
Maximun Count<15:0>
PCFG8 PCFG7 PCFG6
Refer to “dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual” (DS70046) for descriptions of register bit fields.
—
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Reset State
PCFG5
PCFG4
QECK0
PCFG3
—
PCFG2
—
PCFG1
—
PCFG0
—
0000 0000 0000 0000
1111 1111 1111 1111
0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000
TQGATE TQCKPS1 TQCKPS0 POSRES TQCS UPDN_SRC 0000 0000 0000 0000
Bit 5
QEOUT QECK2 QECK1
—
Bit 6
Position Counter<15:0>
CEID
— = unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’
—
IMV0
Note 1:
—
Bit 7
QEIM1 QEIM0 SWPAB
Bit 8
Legend:
—
IMV1
QEIM2
Bit 9
0128
—
—
UPDN
Bit 10
02A8
—
—
INDX
Bit 11
ADPCFG
—
—
QEISIDL
—
—
Bit 12
MAXCNT
0126
POSCNT
—
Bit 13
Bit 14
QEI REGISTER MAP(1)
0122 CNTERR
Addr.
DFLTCON 0124
QEICON
SFR
Name
TABLE 14-1:
dsPIC30F3010/3011
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70141E-page 91
dsPIC30F3010/3011
NOTES:
DS70141E-page 92
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
dsPIC30F3010/3011
15.0
Note:
MOTOR CONTROL PWM
MODULE
This data sheet summarizes features of
this group of dsPIC30F devices and is not
intended to be a complete reference
source. For more information on the CPU,
peripherals, register descriptions and general device functionality, refer to the
“dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual”
(DS70046).
This module simplifies the task of generating multiple,
synchronized Pulse-Width Modulated (PWM) outputs.
In particular, the following power and motion control
applications are supported by the PWM module:
•
•
•
•
Three-Phase AC Induction Motor
Switched Reluctance (SR) Motor
Brushless DC (BLDC) Motor
Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)
The PWM module has the following features:
• 6 PWM I/O pins with 3 duty cycle generators
• Up to 16-bit resolution
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
•
•
•
•
‘On-the-Fly’ PWM frequency changes
Edge and Center-Aligned Output modes
Single Pulse Generation mode
Interrupt support for asymmetrical updates in
Center-Aligned mode
• Output override control for Electrically
Commutative Motor (ECM) operation
• ‘Special Event’ comparator for scheduling other
peripheral events
• Fault pins to optionally drive each of the PWM
output pins to a defined state
This module contains 3 duty cycle generators,
numbered 1 through 3. The module has 6 PWM output
pins, numbered PWM1H/PWM1L through PWM3H/
PWM3L. The six I/O pins are grouped into high/low
numbered pairs, denoted by the suffix H or L,
respectively. For complementary loads, the low PWM
pins are always the complement of the corresponding
high I/O pins.
The PWM module allows several modes of operation
which are beneficial for specific power control
applications.
DS70141E-page 93
dsPIC30F3010/3011
FIGURE 15-1:
PWM MODULE BLOCK DIAGRAM
PWMCON1
PWM Enable and Mode SFRs
PWMCON2
DTCON1
Dead-Time Control SFRs
FLTACON
Fault Pin Control SFRs
OVDCON
PWM Manual
Control SFR
PWM Generator #3
16-Bit Data Bus
PDC3 Buffer
PDC3
Comparator
PWM Generator
#2
PTMR
Channel 2 Dead-Time
Generator and
Override Logic
Comparator
PWM Generator
#1
PTPER
PWM3H
Channel 3 Dead-Time
Generator and
Override Logic
PWM3L
Output
Driver
Block
Channel 1 Dead-Time
Generator and
Override Logic
PWM2H
PWM2L
PWM1H
PWM1L
FLTA
PTPER Buffer
PTCON
Comparator
SEVTDIR
SEVTCMP
Special Event
Postscaler
Special Event Trigger
PTDIR
PWM Time Base
Note:
Details of PWM Generator #1 and #2 not shown for clarity.
DS70141E-page 94
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
dsPIC30F3010/3011
15.1
PWM Time Base
The PWM time base is provided by a 15-bit timer with
a prescaler and postscaler. The time base is accessible
via the PTMR SFR. PTDIR (PTMR<15>) is a read-only
status bit that indicates the present count direction of
the PWM time base. If PTDIR is cleared, PTMR is
counting upwards. If PTDIR is set, PTMR is counting
downwards. The PWM time base is configured via the
PTCON SFR. The time base is enabled/disabled by
setting/clearing the PTEN bit in the PTCON SFR.
PTMR is not cleared when the PTEN bit is cleared in
software.
The PTPER SFR sets the counting period for PTMR.
The user must write a 15-bit value to PTPER<14:0>.
When the value in PTMR<14:0> matches the value in
PTPER<14:0>, the time base will either reset to 0, or
reverse the count direction on the next occurring clock
cycle. The action taken depends on the operating
mode of the time base.
Note:
If the Period register is set to 0x0000, the
timer will stop counting, and the interrupt
and the Special Event Trigger will not be
generated, even if the special event value
is also 0x0000. The module will not update
the Period register if it is already at
0x0000; therefore, the user must disable
the module in order to update the Period
register.
The PWM time base can be configured for four different
modes of operation:
•
•
•
•
Free-Running mode
Single-Shot mode
Continuous Up/Down Count mode
Continuous Up/Down Count mode with interrupts
for double updates
These four modes are selected by the PTMOD<1:0>
bits in the PTCON SFR. The Continuous Up/Down
Count modes support center-aligned PWM generation.
The Single-Shot mode allows the PWM module to support pulse control of certain Electronically Commutative
Motors (ECMs).
The interrupt signals generated by the PWM time base
depend on the mode selection bits (PTMOD<1:0>) and
the postscaler bits (PTOPS<3:0>) in the PTCON SFR.
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
15.1.1
FREE-RUNNING MODE
In the Free-Running mode, the PWM time base counts
upwards until the value in the Time Base Period
register (PTPER) is matched. The PTMR register is
reset on the following input clock edge and the time
base will continue to count upwards as long as the
PTEN bit remains set.
When the PWM time base is in the Free-Running mode
(PTMOD<1:0> = 00), an interrupt event is generated
each time a match with the PTPER register occurs and
the PTMR register is reset to zero. The postscaler
selection bits may be used in this mode of the timer to
reduce the frequency of the interrupt events.
15.1.2
SINGLE-SHOT MODE
In the Single-Shot mode, the PWM time base begins
counting upwards when the PTEN bit is set. When the
value in the PTMR register matches the PTPER register, the PTMR register will be reset on the following
input clock edge and the PTEN bit will be cleared by the
hardware to halt the time base.
When the PWM time base is in the Single-Shot mode
(PTMOD<1:0> = 01), an interrupt event is generated
when a match with the PTPER register occurs, the
PTMR register is reset to zero on the following input
clock edge, and the PTEN bit is cleared. The postscaler
selection bits have no effect in this mode of the timer.
15.1.3
CONTINUOUS UP/DOWN COUNT
MODES
In the Continuous Up/Down Count modes, the PWM
time base counts upwards until the value in the PTPER
register is matched. The timer will begin counting
downwards on the following input clock edge. The
PTDIR bit in the PTCON SFR is read-only and
indicates the counting direction. The PTDIR bit is set
when the timer counts downwards.
In the Continuous Up/Down Count mode
(PTMOD<1:0> = 10), an interrupt event is generated
each time the value of the PTMR register becomes
zero and the PWM time base begins to count upwards.
The postscaler selection bits may be used in this mode
of the timer to reduce the frequency of the interrupt
events.
DS70141E-page 95
dsPIC30F3010/3011
15.1.4
DOUBLE-UPDATE MODE
15.2
PWM Period
In the Double-Update mode (PTMOD<1:0> = 11), an
interrupt event is generated each time the PTMR register is equal to zero, as well as each time a period match
occurs. The postscaler selection bits have no effect in
this mode of the timer.
PTPER is a 15-bit register and is used to set the
counting period for the PWM time base. PTPER is a
double- buffered register. The PTPER buffer contents
are loaded into the PTPER register at the following
instances:
The Double-Update mode provides two additional
functions to the user. First, the control loop bandwidth
is doubled because the PWM duty cycles can be
updated, twice per period. Second, asymmetrical
center-aligned PWM waveforms can be generated,
which are useful for minimizing output waveform
distortion in certain motor control applications.
• Free-Running and Single-Shot modes: When the
PTMR register is reset to zero after a match with
the PTPER register.
• Continuous Up/Down Count modes: When the
PTMR register is zero.
Note:
15.1.5
Programming a value of 0x0001 in the
Period register could generate a continuous interrupt pulse, and hence, must be
avoided.
PWM TIME BASE PRESCALER
The input clock to PTMR (FOSC/4), has prescaler
options of 1:1, 1:4, 1:16, or 1:64, selected by control
bits, PTCKPS<1:0> in the PTCON SFR. The prescaler
counter is cleared when any of the following occurs:
• a write to the PTMR register
• a write to the PTCON register
• any device Reset
The PTMR register is not cleared when PTCON is
written.
15.1.6
The value held in the PTPER buffer is automatically
loaded into the PTPER register when the PWM time
base is disabled (PTEN = 0).
The PWM period
Equation 15-1:
EQUATION 15-1:
The postscaler counter is cleared when any of the
following occurs:
• a write to the PTMR register
• a write to the PTCON register
• any device Reset
determined
using
PWM PERIOD
(FREE-RUNNING MODE)
(PTMR Prescale Value)
If the PWM time base is configured for one of the
Continuous Up/Down Count modes, the PWM period is
given by Equation 15-2.
EQUATION 15-2:
TPWM =
PWM PERIOD (UP/DOWN
COUNTING MODE)
2 • TCY • (PTPER + 0.75)
(PTMR Prescale Value)
The maximum resolution (in bits) for a given device
oscillator and PWM frequency can be determined using
Equation 15-3:
EQUATION 15-3:
The PTMR register is not cleared when PTCON is written.
Resolution =
DS70141E-page 96
be
TCY • (PTPER + 1)
TPWM =
PWM TIME BASE POSTSCALER
The match output of PTMR can optionally be postscaled through a 4-bit postscaler (which gives a 1:1 to
1:16 scaling).
can
PWM RESOLUTION
log (2 • TPWM / TCY)
log (2)
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
dsPIC30F3010/3011
15.3
Edge-Aligned PWM
Edge-aligned PWM signals are produced by the module
when the PWM time base is in the Free-Running or
Single-Shot mode. For edge-aligned PWM outputs, the
output has a period specified by the value in PTPER
and a duty cycle specified by the appropriate Duty Cycle
register (see Figure 15-2). The PWM output is driven
active at the beginning of the period (PTMR = 0) and is
driven inactive when the value in the Duty Cycle register
matches PTMR.
If the value in a particular Duty Cycle register is zero,
then the output on the corresponding PWM pin will be
inactive for the entire PWM period. In addition, the output on the PWM pin will be active for the entire PWM
period if the value in the Duty Cycle register is greater
than the value held in the PTPER register.
FIGURE 15-2:
EDGE-ALIGNED PWM
New Duty Cycle Latched
PTPER
CENTER-ALIGNED PWM
Period/2
PTPER
PTMR
Value
Duty
Cycle
0
Period
15.5
PWM Duty Cycle Comparison
Units
There are three 16-bit Special Function Registers
(PDC1, PDC2 and PDC3) used to specify duty cycle
values for the PWM module.
PTMR
Value
The value in each Duty Cycle register determines the
amount of time that the PWM output is in the active
state. The Duty Cycle registers are 16 bits wide. The
LSb of a Duty Cycle register determines whether the
PWM edge occurs in the beginning. Thus, the PWM
resolution is effectively doubled.
Duty Cycle
15.5.1
0
Period
15.4
FIGURE 15-3:
Center-Aligned PWM
Center-aligned PWM signals are produced by the
module when the PWM time base is configured in a
Continuous Up/Down Count mode (see Figure 15-3).
The PWM compare output is driven to the active state
when the value of the Duty Cycle register matches the
value of PTMR and the PWM time base is counting
downwards (PTDIR = 1). The PWM compare output is
driven to the inactive state when the PWM time base is
counting upwards (PTDIR = 0) and the value in the
PTMR register matches the duty cycle value.
If the value in a particular Duty Cycle register is zero,
then the output on the corresponding PWM pin will be
inactive for the entire PWM period. In addition, the output on the PWM pin will be active for the entire PWM
period if the value in the Duty Cycle register is equal to
the value held in the PTPER register.
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
DUTY CYCLE REGISTER BUFFERS
The three PWM Duty Cycle registers are doublebuffered to allow glitchless updates of the PWM
outputs. For each duty cycle, there is a Duty Cycle register that is accessible by the user and a second Duty
Cycle register that holds the actual compare value
used in the present PWM period.
For edge-aligned PWM output, a new duty cycle value
will be updated whenever a match with the PTPER
register occurs and PTMR is reset. The contents of the
duty cycle buffers are automatically loaded into the
Duty Cycle registers when the PWM time base is
disabled (PTEN = 0) and the UDIS bit is cleared in
PWMCON2.
When the PWM time base is in the Continuous Up/
Down Count mode, new duty cycle values are updated
when the value of the PTMR register is zero and the
PWM time base begins to count upwards. The contents
of the duty cycle buffers are automatically loaded into
the Duty Cycle registers when the PWM time base is
disabled (PTEN = 0).
DS70141E-page 97
dsPIC30F3010/3011
When the PWM time base is in the Continuous Up/
Down Count mode with double updates, new duty cycle
values are updated when the value of the PTMR register is zero, and when the value of the PTMR register
matches the value in the PTPER register. The contents
of the duty cycle buffers are automatically loaded into
the Duty Cycle registers when the PWM time base is
disabled (PTEN = 0).
15.7.1
15.6
The amount of dead time provided by the dead-time
unit is selected by specifying the input clock prescaler
value and a 6-bit unsigned value.
Complementary PWM Operation
In the Complementary mode of operation, each pair of
PWM outputs is obtained by a complementary PWM
signal. A dead time may be optionally inserted during
device switching, when both outputs are inactive for a
short period (Refer to Section 15.7 “Dead-Time
Generators”).
In Complementary mode, the duty cycle comparison
units are assigned to the PWM outputs as follows:
• PDC1 register controls PWM1H/PWM1L outputs
• PDC2 register controls PWM2H/PWM2L outputs
• PDC3 register controls PWM3H/PWM3L outputs
The Complementary mode is selected for each PWM
I/O pin pair by clearing the appropriate PMODx bit in the
PWMCON1 SFR. The PWM I/O pins are set to
Complementary mode by default upon a device Reset.
15.7
Dead-Time Generators
Dead-time generation may be provided when any of the
PWM I/O pin pairs are operating in the Complementary
Output mode. The PWM outputs use push-pull drive circuits. Due to the inability of the power output devices to
switch instantaneously, some amount of time must be
provided between the turn-off event of one PWM output
in a complementary pair and the turn-on event of the
other transistor.
DEAD-TIME GENERATORS
Each complementary output pair for the PWM module
has a 6-bit down counter that is used to produce the
dead-time insertion. As shown in Figure 15-4, each
dead-time unit has a rising and falling edge detector
connected to the duty cycle comparison output.
15.7.2
DEAD-TIME RANGES
Four input clock prescaler selections have been provided to allow a suitable range of dead time, based on
the device operating frequency. The dead-time clock
prescaler values are selected using the DTAPS<1:0>
control bits in the DTCON1 SFR. One of four clock
prescaler options (TCY, 2 TCY, 4 TCY or 8 TCY) may be
selected.
After the prescaler value is selected, the dead time is
adjusted by loading 6-bit unsigned values into the
DTCON1 SFR.
The dead-time unit prescaler is cleared on the following
events:
• On a load of the down timer due to a duty cycle
comparison edge event.
• On a write to the DTCON1 register.
• On any device Reset.
Note:
The user should not modify the DTCON1
value while the PWM module is operating
(PTEN = 1). Unexpected results may
occur.
The PWM module allows two different dead times to be
programmed. These two dead times may be used in
one of two methods described below to increase user
flexibility:
• The PWM output signals can be optimized for
different turn-off times in the high side and low
side transistors in a complementary pair of
transistors. The first dead time is inserted
between the turn-off event of the lower transistor
of the complementary pair and the turn-on event
of the upper transistor. The second dead time is
inserted between the turn-off event of the upper
transistor and the turn-on event of the lower
transistor.
• The two dead times can be assigned to individual
PWM I/O pin pairs. This operating mode allows
the PWM module to drive different transistor/load
combinations with each complementary PWM I/O
pin pair.
DS70141E-page 98
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
dsPIC30F3010/3011
FIGURE 15-4:
DEAD-TIME TIMING DIAGRAM
Duty Cycle Generator
PWMxH
PWMxL
Dead Time
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
Dead Time
DS70141E-page 99
dsPIC30F3010/3011
15.8
Independent PWM Output
An Independent PWM Output mode is required for
driving certain types of loads. A particular PWM output
pair is in the Independent Output mode when the
corresponding PMOD bit in the PWMCON1 register is
set. No dead-time control is implemented between
adjacent PWM I/O pins when the module is operating
in the Independent mode and both I/O pins are allowed
to be active simultaneously.
In the Independent mode, each duty cycle generator is
connected to both of the PWM I/O pins in an output
pair. By using the associated Duty Cycle register and
the appropriate bits in the OVDCON register, the user
may select the following signal output options for each
PWM I/O pin operating in the Independent mode:
• I/O pin outputs PWM signal
• I/O pin inactive
• I/O pin active
15.9
Single Pulse PWM Operation
The PWM module produces single pulse outputs when
the PTCON control bits, PTMOD<1:0> = 10. Only
edge-aligned outputs may be produced in the Single
Pulse mode. In Single Pulse mode, the PWM I/O pin(s)
are driven to the active state when the PTEN bit is set.
When a match with a Duty Cycle register occurs, the
PWM I/O pin is driven to the inactive state. When a
match with the PTPER register occurs, the PTMR
register is cleared, all active PWM I/O pins are driven
to the inactive state, the PTEN bit is cleared and an
interrupt is generated.
DS70141E-page 100
15.10 PWM Output Override
The PWM output override bits allow the user to
manually drive the PWM I/O pins to specified logic
states, independent of the duty cycle comparison units.
All control bits associated with the PWM output override function are contained in the OVDCON register.
The upper half of the OVDCON register contains six
bits, POVDxH<3:1> and POVDxL<3:1>, that determine
which PWM I/O pins will be overridden. The lower half
of the OVDCON register contains six bits,
POUTxH<3:1> and POUTxL<3:1>, that determine the
state of the PWM I/O pins when a particular output is
overridden via the POVD bits.
15.10.1
COMPLEMENTARY OUTPUT MODE
When a PWMxL pin is driven active via the OVDCON
register, the output signal is forced to be the complement of the corresponding PWMxH pin in the pair.
Dead-time insertion is still performed when PWM
channels are overridden manually.
15.10.2
OVERRIDE SYNCHRONIZATION
If the OSYNC bit in the PWMCON2 register is set, all
output overrides performed via the OVDCON register
are synchronized to the PWM time base. Synchronous
output overrides occur at the following times:
• Edge-Aligned mode, when PTMR is zero.
• Center-Aligned modes, when PTMR is zero and
when the value of PTMR matches PTPER.
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
dsPIC30F3010/3011
15.11 PWM Output and Polarity Control
15.12.2
There are three device Configuration bits associated
with the PWM module that provide PWM output pin
control:
The FLTACON Special Function Register has 6 bits
that determine the state of each PWM I/O pin when it is
overridden by a Fault input. When these bits are
cleared, the PWM I/O pin is driven to the inactive state.
If the bit is set, the PWM I/O pin will be driven to the
active state. The active and inactive states are referenced to the polarity defined for each PWM I/O pin
(HPOL and LPOL polarity control bits).
• HPOL Configuration bit
• LPOL Configuration bit
• PWMPIN Configuration bit
These three bits in the FBORPOR Configuration
register (see Section 20.6 “Device Configuration
Registers”) work in conjunction with the PWM Enable
bits (PENxH and PENxL) located in the PWMCON1
SFR. The Configuration bits and PWM enable bits
ensure that the PWM pins are in the correct states after
a device Reset occurs. The PWMPIN Configuration bit
allows the PWM module outputs to be optionally
enabled on a device Reset. If PWMPIN = 0, the PWM
outputs will be driven to their inactive states at Reset. If
PWMPIN = 1 (default), the PWM outputs will be tristated. The HPOL bit specifies the polarity for the
PWMxH outputs, whereas the LPOL bit specifies the
polarity for the PWMxL outputs.
15.11.1
OUTPUT PIN CONTROL
The PENxH<3:1> and PENxL<3:1> control bits in the
PWMCON1 SFR enable each high PWM output pin
and each low PWM output pin, respectively. If a
particular PWM output pin is not enabled, it is treated
as a general purpose I/O pin.
15.12 PWM Fault Pin
There is one Fault pin (FLTA) associated with the PWM
module. When asserted, this pin can optionally drive
each of the PWM I/O pins to a defined state.
15.12.1
FAULT PIN ENABLE BITS
The FLTACON SFR has three control bits that determine whether a particular pair of PWM I/O pins is to be
controlled by the Fault input pin. To enable a
specific PWM I/O pin pair for Fault overrides, the
corresponding bit should be set in the FLTACON
register.
FAULT STATES
A special case exists when a PWM module I/O pair is
in the Complementary mode and both pins are programmed to be active on a Fault condition. The
PWMxH pin always has priority in the Complementary
mode, so that both I/O pins cannot be driven active
simultaneously.
15.12.3
FAULT INPUT MODES
The Fault input pin has two modes of operation:
• Latched Mode: When the Fault pin is driven low,
the PWM outputs will go to the states defined in
the FLTACON register. The PWM outputs will
remain in this state until the Fault pin is driven
high and the corresponding interrupt flag has
been cleared in software. When both of these
actions have occurred, the PWM outputs will
return to normal operation at the beginning of the
next PWM cycle or half-cycle boundary. If the
interrupt flag is cleared before the Fault condition
ends, the PWM module will wait until the Fault pin
is no longer asserted to restore the outputs.
• Cycle-by-Cycle Mode: When the Fault input pin
is driven low, the PWM outputs remain in the
defined Fault states for as long as the Fault pin is
held low. After the Fault pin is driven high, the
PWM outputs return to normal operation at the
beginning of the following PWM cycle or
half-cycle boundary.
The operating mode for the Fault input pin is selected
using the FLTAM control bit in the FLTACON Special
Function Register.
The Fault pin can be controlled manually in software.
If all enable bits are cleared in the FLTACON register,
then the corresponding Fault input pin has no effect on
the PWM module and the pin may be used as a general
purpose interrupt or I/O pin.
Note:
The Fault pin logic can operate independent of the PWM logic. If all the enable bits
in the FLTACON register are cleared, then
the Fault pin could be used as a general
purpose interrupt pin. The Fault pin has an
interrupt vector, interrupt flag bit and
interrupt priority bits associated with it.
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70141E-page 101
dsPIC30F3010/3011
15.13 PWM Update Lockout
15.14.1
For a complex PWM application, the user may need to
write up to three Duty Cycle registers and the Time
Base Period register, PTPER, at a given time. In some
applications, it is important that all buffer registers be
written before the new duty cycle and period values are
loaded for use by the module.
The PWM Special Event Trigger has a postscaler that
allows a 1:1 to 1:16 postscale ratio. The postscaler is
configured by writing the SEVOPS<3:0> control bits in
the PWMCON2 SFR.
The PWM update lockout feature is enabled by setting
the UDIS control bit in the PWMCON2 SFR. The UDIS
bit affects all Duty Cycle Buffer registers and the PWM
Time Base Period buffer, PTPER. No duty cycle
changes or period value changes will have effect while
UDIS = 1.
15.14 PWM Special Event Trigger
The PWM module has a Special Event Trigger that
allows A/D conversions to be synchronized to the PWM
time base. The A/D sampling and conversion time may
be programmed to occur at any point within the PWM
period. The Special Event Trigger allows the user to
minimize the delay between the time when A/D conversion results are acquired and the time when the duty
cycle value is updated.
The PWM Special Event Trigger has an SFR named
SEVTCMP, and five control bits to control its operation.
The PTMR value for which a Special Event Trigger
should occur is loaded into the SEVTCMP register.
When the PWM time base is in a Continuous Up/Down
Count mode, an additional control bit is required to
specify the counting phase for the Special Event Trigger. The count phase is selected using the SEVTDIR
control bit in the SEVTCMP SFR. If the SEVTDIR bit is
cleared, the Special Event Trigger will occur on the
upward counting cycle of the PWM time base. If the
SEVTDIR bit is set, the Special Event Trigger will occur
on the downward count cycle of the PWM time base.
The SEVTDIR control bit has no effect unless the PWM
time base is configured for a Continuous Up/Down
Count mode.
DS70141E-page 102
SPECIAL EVENT TRIGGER
POSTSCALER
The special event output postscaler is cleared on the
following events:
• Any write to the SEVTCMP register
• Any device Reset
15.15 PWM Operation During CPU Sleep
Mode
The Fault A input pin has the ability to wake the CPU
from Sleep mode. The PWM module generates an
interrupt if the Fault pin is driven low while in Sleep.
15.16 PWM Operation During CPU Idle
Mode
The PTCON SFR contains a PTSIDL control bit. This
bit determines if the PWM module will continue to
operate or stop when the device enters Idle mode. If
PTSIDL = 0, the module will continue to operate. If
PTSIDL = 1, the module will stop operation as long as
the CPU remains in Idle mode.
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
01C6 SEVTDIR
SEVTCMP
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
—
—
SEVOPS<3:0>
—
Bit 5
PTOPS<3:0>
Bit 6
—
—
—
—
Refer to “dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual” (DS70046) for descriptions of register bit fields.
PWM Duty Cycle 3 Register
PWM Duty Cycle 2 Register
PWM Duty Cycle 1 Register
POVD3H POVD3L POVD2H POVD2L POVD1H POVD1L
—
PEN3H
DTAPS<1:0>
—
—
—
—
PEN1H
Bit 4
Bit 2
—
PEN3L
—
FAEN3
Dead-Time A Value
—
—
PTCKPS<1:0>
Bit 3
Bit 0
FAEN2
OSYNC
PEN2L
FAEN1
UDIS
PEN1L
PTMOD<1:0>
Bit 1
0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 1111 1111
0111 1111 1111 1111
0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000
Reset State
0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000
POUT3H POUT3L POUT2H POUT2L POUT1H POUT1L 1111 1111 0000 0000
—
—
PEN2H
PWM Special Event Compare Register
PTMOD3 PTMOD2 PTMOD1
Note 1:
01DA
PDC3
—
—
—
—
— = unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’
01D8
PDC2
—
—
—
—
—
Bit 7
FAOV3H FAOV3L FAOV2H FAOV2L FAOV1H FAOV1L FLTAM
—
—
—
—
Bit 8
Legend:
01D4
01D6
PDC1
—
—
01D0
FLTACON
OVDCON
—
—
01CC
DTCON1
—
—
PWMCON2 01CA
—
PWMCON1 01C8
—
—
Bit 9
PWM Time Base Period Register
PTSIDL
Bit 10
—
01C4
—
Bit 11
PWM Timer Count Value
PTPER
PTEN
PTMR
Bit 12
PTDIR
01C0
01C2
PTCON
Bit 13
Bit 15
SFR Name Addr.
Bit 14
PWM REGISTER MAP(1)
TABLE 15-1:
dsPIC30F3010/3011
DS70141E-page 103
dsPIC30F3010/3011
NOTES:
DS70141E-page 104
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
dsPIC30F3010/3011
16.0
Note:
SPI MODULE
This data sheet summarizes features of
this group of dsPIC30F devices and is not
intended to be a complete reference
source. For more information on the CPU,
peripherals, register descriptions and general device functionality, refer to the
“dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual”
(DS70046).
The Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) module is a
synchronous serial interface. It is useful for
communicating with other peripheral devices, such as
EEPROMs, shift registers, display drivers and A/D
converters or other microcontrollers. It is compatible
with SPI and SIOP interfaces available on some other
microcontrollers.
16.1
Operating Function Description
The SPI module consists of a 16-bit shift register,
SPI1SR, used for shifting data in and out, and a buffer
register, SPI1BUF. A Control register, SPI1CON,
configures the module. Additionally, a status register,
SPI1STAT, indicates various status conditions.
The serial interface consists of 4 pins: SDI1 (Serial
Data Input), SDO1 (Serial Data Output), SCK1 (Shift
Clock Input or Output) and SS1 (Active-Low Slave
Select).
In Master mode operation, SCK1 is a clock output, but
in Slave mode, it is a clock input.
A series of eight (8) or sixteen (16) clock pulses shifts
out bits from the SPI1SR to the SDO1 pin and
simultaneously shifts in data from the SDI1 pin. An
interrupt is generated when the transfer is complete
and the corresponding interrupt flag bit (SPI1IF) is set.
This interrupt can be disabled through an interrupt
enable bit (SPI1IE).
The receive operation is double-buffered. When a
complete byte is received, it is transferred from
SPI1SR to SPI1BUF.
If the receive buffer is full when new data is being
transferred from SPI1SR to SPI1BUF, the module will
set the SPIROV bit, indicating an overflow condition.
The transfer of the data from SPI1SR to SPI1BUF will
not be completed and the new data will be lost. The
module will not respond to SCL transitions while
SPIROV is ‘1’, effectively disabling the module until
SPI1BUF is read by user software.
contents of the transmit buffer are moved to SPI1SR.
The received data is thus placed in SPI1BUF and the
transmit data in SPI1SR is ready for the next transfer.
Note:
Both the transmit buffer (SPI1TXB) and
the receive buffer (SPI1RXB) are mapped
to the same register address, SPI1BUF.
In Master mode, the clock is generated by prescaling
the system clock. Data is transmitted as soon as a
value is written to SPI1BUF. The interrupt is generated
at the middle of the transfer of the last bit.
In Slave mode, data is transmitted and received as
external clock pulses appear on SCKx. Again, the
interrupt is generated when the last bit is latched. If
SSx control is enabled, then transmission and
reception are enabled only when SSx = low. The
SDOx output will be disabled in SSx mode with SSx
high.
The clock provided to the module is (FOSC/4). This
clock is then prescaled by the primary (PPRE<1:0>)
and the secondary (SPRE<2:0>) prescale factors. The
CKE bit determines whether transmit occurs on transition from active clock state to Idle clock state, or vice
versa. The CKP bit selects the Idle state (high or low)
for the clock.
16.1.1
WORD AND BYTE
COMMUNICATION
A control bit, MODE16 (SPI1CON<10>), allows the
module to communicate in either 16-bit or 8-bit mode.
16-bit operation is identical to 8-bit operation, except
that the number of bits transmitted is 16 instead of 8.
The user software must disable the module prior to
changing the MODE16 bit. The SPI module is reset
when the MODE16 bit is changed by the user.
A basic difference between 8-bit and 16-bit operation is
that the data is transmitted out of bit 7 of the SPIxSR for
8-bit operation, and data is transmitted out of bit 15 of
the SPIxSR for 16-bit operation. In both modes, data is
shifted into bit 0 of the SPIxSR.
16.1.2
SDO1 DISABLE
A control bit, DISSDO, is provided to the SPI1CON
register to allow the SDO1 output to be disabled. This
will allow the SPI module to be connected in an input
only configuration. SDOx can also be used for general
purpose I/O.
Transmit writes are also double-buffered. The user
writes to SPI1BUF. When the master or slave transfer
is completed, the contents of the shift register
(SPI1SR) are moved to the receive buffer. If any transmit data has been written to the buffer register, the
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70141E-page 105
dsPIC30F3010/3011
16.2
Framed SPI Support
the SS1 pin is an input or an output (i.e., whether the
module receives or generates the frame synchronization pulse). The frame pulse is an active-high pulse for
a single SPI clock cycle. When frame synchronization
is enabled, the data transmission starts only on the
subsequent transmit edge of the SPI clock.
The module supports a basic framed SPI protocol in
Master or Slave mode. The control bit, FRMEN,
enables framed SPI support and causes the SS1 pin to
perform the Frame Synchronization (FSYNC) pulse
function. The control bit, SPIFSD, determines whether
FIGURE 16-1:
SPI BLOCK DIAGRAM
Internal
Data Bus
Read
Write
SPI1BUF
SPI1BUF
Transmit
Receive
SPI1SR
SDI1
bit 0
SDO1
Shift
clock
Clock
Control
SSx & FSYNC
Control
SS1
Edge
Select
Secondary
Prescaler
1:1 – 1:8
SCK1
Primary
Prescaler
1, 4, 16, 64
FCY
Enable Master Clock
FIGURE 16-2:
SPI MASTER/SLAVE CONNECTION
SPI Master
SPI Slave
SDOx
SDIy
Serial Input Buffer
(SPIxBUF)
SDIx
Shift Register
(SPIxSR)
MSb
Serial Input Buffer
(SPIyBUF)
LSb
Shift Register
(SPIySR)
MSb
SCKx
PROCESSOR 1
SDOy
Serial Clock
LSb
SCKy
PROCESSOR 2
Note: x = 1 or 2, y = 1 or 2.
DS70141E-page 106
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
dsPIC30F3010/3011
16.3
Slave Select Synchronization
The SS1 pin allows a Synchronous Slave mode. The
SPI must be configured in SPI Slave mode with SS1
pin control enabled (SSEN = 1). When the SS1 pin is
low, transmission and reception are enabled and the
SDO1 pin is driven. When the SS1 pin goes high, the
SDO1 pin is no longer driven. Also, the SPI module is
resynchronized and all counters/control circuitry are
reset. Therefore, when the SS1 pin is asserted low
again, transmission/reception will begin at the MSb,
even if SS1 has been deasserted in the middle of a
transmit/receive.
16.4
SPI Operation During CPU Sleep
Mode
During Sleep mode, the SPI module is shut down. If
the CPU enters Sleep mode while an SPI transaction
is in progress, then the transmission and reception is
aborted.
The transmitter and receiver will stop in Sleep mode.
However, register contents are not affected by
entering or exiting Sleep mode.
16.5
SPI Operation During CPU Idle
Mode
When the device enters Idle mode, all clock sources
remain functional. The SPISIDL bit (SPI1STAT<13>)
selects if the SPI module will stop or continue on Idle.
If SPISIDL = 0, the module will continue to operate
when the CPU enters Idle mode. If SPISIDL = 1, the
module will stop when the CPU enters Idle mode.
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70141E-page 107
—
—
—
Bit 10
DISSDO MODE16
—
Bit 11
CKE
—
Bit 8
SSEN
—
Bit 7
CKP
SPIROV
Bit 6
Transmit and Receive Buffer
SMP
—
Bit 9
Refer to “dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual” (DS70046) for descriptions of register bit fields.
SPIFSD
SPISIDL
—
FRMEN
Bit 12
Note 1:
SPI1BUF
—
SPIEN
Bit 13
Bit 14
— = unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’
0224
SPI1CON
Bit 15
SPI1 REGISTER MAP(1)
Legend:
0220
0222
SPI1STAT
Addr.
SFR
Name
TABLE 16-1:
MSTEN
—
Bit 5
SPRE2
—
Bit 4
SPRE1
—
Bit 3
SPRE0
—
Bit 2
PPRE1
SPITBF
Bit 1
Reset State
PPRE0
0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000
SPIRBF 0000 0000 0000 0000
Bit 0
dsPIC30F3010/3011
DS70141E-page 108
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
dsPIC30F3010/3011
17.0
Note:
I2C™ MODULE
17.1.1
This data sheet summarizes features of
this group of dsPIC30F devices and is not
intended to be a complete reference
source. For more information on the CPU,
peripherals, register descriptions and general device functionality, refer to the
“dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual”
(DS70046).
The Inter-Integrated Circuit (I2C™) module provides
complete hardware support for both Slave and MultiMaster modes of the I2C serial communication
standard with a 16-bit interface.
This module offers the following key features:
• I2C interface supporting both master and slave
operation.
• I2C Slave mode supports 7 and 10-bit addressing.
• I2C Master mode supports 7 and 10-bit addressing.
• I2C port allows bidirectional transfers between
master and slaves.
• Serial clock synchronization for I2C port can be
used as a handshake mechanism to suspend and
resume serial transfer (SCLREL control).
• I2C supports multi-master operation; detects bus
collision and will arbitrate accordingly.
17.1
Operating Function Description
The hardware fully implements all the master and
slave functions of the I2C Standard and Fast mode
specifications, as well as 7 and 10-bit addressing.
Thus, the I2C module can operate either as a slave or
a master on an I2C bus.
FIGURE 17-1:
VARIOUS I2C MODES
The following types of I2C operation are supported:
•
•
•
I2C Slave operation with 7-bit addressing
I2C Slave operation with 10-bit addressing
I2C Master operation with 7 or 10-bit addressing
See the I2C programmer’s model in Figure 17-1.
17.1.2
PIN CONFIGURATION IN I2C MODE
I2C has a 2-pin interface; pin SCL is clock and pin SDA
is data.
17.1.3
I2C REGISTERS
I2CCON and I2CSTAT are control and status registers,
respectively. The I2CCON register is readable and
writable. The lower 6 bits of I2CSTAT are read-only.
The remaining bits of the I2CSTAT are read/write.
I2CRSR is the shift register used for shifting data,
whereas I2CRCV is the buffer register to which data
bytes are written, or from which data bytes are read.
I2CRCV is the receive buffer, as shown in Figure 17-1.
I2CTRN is the transmit register to which bytes are
written during a transmit operation, as shown in
Figure 17-2.
The I2CADD register holds the slave address. A status
bit, ADD10, indicates 10-Bit Addressing mode. The
I2CBRG acts as the Baud Rate Generator (BRG)
reload value.
In receive operations, I2CRSR and I2CRCV together
form a double-buffered receiver. When I2CRSR
receives a complete byte, it is transferred to I2CRCV
and an interrupt pulse is generated. During
transmission, the I2CTRN is not double-buffered.
Note:
Following a Restart condition in 10-bit
mode, the user only needs to match the
first 7-bit address.
PROGRAMMER’S MODEL
I2CRCV (8 bits)
bit 7
bit 0
bit 7
bit 0
I2CTRN (8 bits)
I2CBRG (9 bits)
bit 8
bit 0
I2CCON (16 bits)
bit 15
bit 0
bit 15
bit 0
I2CSTAT (16 bits)
I2CADD (10 bits)
bit 9
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
bit 0
DS70141E-page 109
dsPIC30F3010/3011
FIGURE 17-2:
I2C™ BLOCK DIAGRAM
Internal
Data Bus
I2CRCV
SCL
Read
Shift
Clock
I2CRSR
LSB
SDA
Addr_Match
Match Detect
Write
I2CADD
Read
Start and
Stop bit Detect
I2CSTAT
Write
Control Logic
Start, Restart,
Stop bit Generate
Write
I2CCON
Collision
Detect
Acknowledge
Generation
Clock
Stretching
Read
Read
Write
I2CTRN
LSB
Shift
Clock
Read
Reload
Control
BRG Down
Counter
DS70141E-page 110
Write
I2CBRG
FCY
Read
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
dsPIC30F3010/3011
17.2
I2C Module Addresses
The I2CADD register contains the Slave mode
addresses. The register is a 10-bit register.
If the A10M bit (I2CCON<10>) is ‘0’, the address is
interpreted by the module as a 7-bit address. When an
address is received, it is compared to the 7 LSbs of the
I2CADD register.
If the A10M bit is ‘1’, the address is assumed to be a
10-bit address. When an address is received, it will be
compared with the binary value, ‘11110 A9 A8’
(where A9 and A8 are two Most Significant bits of
I2CADD). If that value matches, the next address will
be compared with the Least Significant 8 bits of
I2CADD, as specified in the 10-bit addressing protocol.
17.3.2
If the R_W bit received is a ‘0’ during an address
match, then Receive mode is initiated. Incoming bits
are sampled on the rising edge of SCL. After 8 bits are
received, if I2CRCV is not full or I2COV is not set,
I2CRSR is transferred to I2CRCV. ACK is sent on the
ninth clock.
If the RBF flag is set, indicating that I2CRCV is still
holding data from a previous operation (RBF = 1), then
ACK is not sent; however, the interrupt pulse is generated. In the case of an overflow, the contents of the
I2CRSR are not loaded into the I2CRCV.
Note:
The 7-bit I2C slave addresses supported by the
dsPIC30F are shown in Table 17-1.
TABLE 17-1:
SLAVE RECEPTION
7-BIT I2C™ SLAVE
ADDRESSES
The I2CRCV will be loaded if the I2COV
bit = 1 and the RBF flag = 0. In this case,
a read of the I2CRCV was performed, but
the user did not clear the state of the
I2COV bit before the next receive
occurred. The Acknowledgement is not
sent (ACK = 1) and the I2CRCV is
updated.
0x00
General Call Address or Start Byte
0x01-0x03
Reserved
17.4
0x04-0x07
HS mode Master Codes
0x08-0x77
Valid 7-Bit Addresses
In 10-bit mode, the basic receive and transmit operations are the same as in the 7-bit mode. However, the
criteria for address match is more complex.
0x78-0x7b
Valid 10-Bit Addresses (lower 7 bits)
0x7c-0x7f
Reserved
17.3
I2C 7-Bit Slave Mode Operation
Once enabled (I2CEN = 1), the slave module will wait
for a Start bit to occur (i.e., the I2C module is ‘Idle’).
Following the detection of a Start bit, 8 bits are shifted
into I2CRSR and the address is compared against
I2CADD. In 7-bit mode (A10M = 0), bits I2CADD<6:0>
are compared against I2CRSR<7:1> and I2CRSR<0>
is the R_W bit. All incoming bits are sampled on the
rising edge of SCL.
If an address match occurs, an Acknowledgement will
be sent, and the Slave Event Interrupt Flag (SI2CIF) is
set on the falling edge of the ninth (ACK) bit. The
address match does not affect the contents of the
I2CRCV buffer or the RBF bit.
17.3.1
SLAVE TRANSMISSION
If the R_W bit received is a ‘1’, then the serial port will
go into Transmit mode. It will send an ACK on the ninth
bit and then hold SCL to ‘0’ until the CPU responds by
writing to I2CTRN. SCL is released by setting the
SCLREL bit, and 8 bits of data are shifted out. Data bits
are shifted out on the falling edge of SCL, such that
SDA is valid during SCL high. The interrupt pulse is
sent on the falling edge of the ninth clock pulse,
regardless of the status of the ACK received from the
master.
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
I2C 10-Bit Slave Mode Operation
The I2C specification dictates that a slave must be
addressed for a write operation, with two address bytes
following a Start bit.
The A10M bit is a control bit that signifies that the
address in I2CADD is a 10-bit address rather than a
7-bit address. The address detection protocol for the
first byte of a message address is identical for 7-bit
and 10-bit messages, but the bits being compared are
different.
I2CADD holds the entire 10-bit address. Upon receiving an address following a Start bit, I2CRSR <7:3> is
compared against a literal ‘11110’ (the default 10-bit
address) and I2CRSR<2:1> are compared against
I2CADD<9:8>. If a match occurs and if R_W = 0, the
interrupt pulse is sent. The ADD10 bit will be cleared to
indicate a partial address match. If a match fails or
R_W = 1, the ADD10 bit is cleared and the module
returns to the Idle state.
The low byte of the address is then received and compared with I2CADD<7:0>. If an address match occurs,
the interrupt pulse is generated and the ADD10 bit is
set, indicating a complete 10-bit address match. If an
address match did not occur, the ADD10 bit is cleared
and the module returns to the Idle state.
DS70141E-page 111
dsPIC30F3010/3011
17.4.1
10-BIT MODE SLAVE
TRANSMISSION
Once a slave is addressed in this fashion, with the full
10-bit address (we will refer to this state as
“PRIOR_ADDR_MATCH”), the master can begin sending
data bytes for a slave reception operation.
17.4.2
10-BIT MODE SLAVE RECEPTION
Once addressed, the master can generate a Repeated
Start, reset the high byte of the address and set the
R_W bit without generating a Stop bit, thus initiating a
slave transmit operation.
17.5
Automatic Clock Stretch
In the Slave modes, the module can synchronize buffer
reads and writes to the master device by clock
stretching.
17.5.1
In Slave Transmit modes, clock stretching is always
performed, irrespective of the STREN bit.
Clock synchronization takes place following the ninth
clock of the transmit sequence. If the device samples
an ACK on the falling edge of the ninth clock, and if the
TBF bit is still clear, then the SCLREL bit is automatically cleared. The SCLREL being cleared to ‘0’ will
assert the SCL line low. The user’s ISR must set the
SCLREL bit before transmission is allowed to
continue. By holding the SCL line low, the user has
time to service the ISR and load the contents of the
I2CTRN before the master device can initiate another
transmit sequence.
Note 1: If the user loads the contents of I2CTRN,
setting the TBF bit before the falling edge
of the ninth clock, the SCLREL bit will not
be cleared and clock stretching will not
occur.
2: The SCLREL bit can be set in software,
regardless of the state of the TBF bit.
RECEIVE CLOCK STRETCHING
The STREN bit in the I2CCON register can be used to
enable clock stretching in Slave Receive mode. When
the STREN bit is set, the SCL pin will be held low at
the end of each data receive sequence.
17.5.3
Note 1: If the user reads the contents of the
I2CRCV, clearing the RBF bit before the
falling edge of the ninth clock, the
SCLREL bit will not be cleared and clock
stretching will not occur.
2: The SCLREL bit can be set in software,
regardless of the state of the RBF bit. The
user should be careful to clear the RBF bit
in the ISR before the next receive
sequence in order to prevent an overflow
condition.
TRANSMIT CLOCK STRETCHING
Both 10-Bit and 7-Bit Transmit modes implement clock
stretching by asserting the SCLREL bit after the falling
edge of the ninth clock if the TBF bit is cleared,
indicating the buffer is empty.
17.5.2
Clock stretching takes place following the ninth clock of
the receive sequence. On the falling edge of the ninth
clock at the end of the ACK sequence, if the RBF bit is
set, the SCLREL bit is automatically cleared, forcing the
SCL output to be held low. The user’s ISR must set the
SCLREL bit before reception is allowed to continue. By
holding the SCL line low, the user has time to service
the ISR and read the contents of the I2CRCV before the
master device can initiate another receive sequence.
This will prevent buffer overruns from occurring.
17.5.4
CLOCK STRETCHING DURING
10-BIT ADDRESSING (STREN = 1)
Clock stretching takes place automatically during the
addressing sequence. Because this module has a
register for the entire address, it is not necessary for
the protocol to wait for the address to be updated.
After the address phase is complete, clock stretching
will occur on each data receive or transmit sequence
as was described earlier.
17.6
Software Controlled Clock
Stretching (STREN = 1)
When the STREN bit is ‘1’, the SCLREL bit may be
cleared by software to allow software to control the
clock stretching. The logic will synchronize writes to
the SCLREL bit with the SCL clock. Clearing the
SCLREL bit will not assert the SCL output until the
module detects a falling edge on the SCL output and
SCL is sampled low. If the SCLREL bit is cleared by
the user while the SCL line has been sampled low, the
SCL output will be asserted (held low). The SCL output will remain low until the SCLREL bit is set, and all
other devices on the I2C bus have deasserted SCL.
This ensures that a write to the SCLREL bit will not
violate the minimum high time requirement for SCL.
If the STREN bit is ‘0’, a software write to the SCLREL
bit will be disregarded and have no effect on the
SCLREL bit.
CLOCK STRETCHING DURING
7-BIT ADDRESSING (STREN = 1)
When the STREN bit is set in Slave Receive mode,
the SCL line is held low when the buffer register is full.
The method for stretching the SCL output is the same
for both 7 and 10-Bit Addressing modes.
DS70141E-page 112
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
dsPIC30F3010/3011
17.7
Interrupts
The I2C module generates two interrupt flags, MI2CIF
(I2C Master Interrupt Flag) and SI2CIF (I2C Slave
Interrupt Flag). The MI2CIF interrupt flag is activated
on completion of a master message event. The SI2CIF
interrupt flag is activated on detection of a message
directed to the slave.
17.8
Slope Control
2
The I C standard requires slope control on the SDA
and SCL signals for Fast mode (400 kHz). The control
bit, DISSLW, enables the user to disable slew rate
control, if desired. It is necessary to disable the slew
rate control for 1 MHz mode.
17.9
IPMI Support
The control bit, IPMIEN, enables the module to support
Intelligent Peripheral Management Interface (IPMI).
When this bit is set, the module accepts and acts upon
all addresses.
17.10 General Call Address Support
The general call address can address all devices.
When this address is used, all devices should, in
theory, respond with an Acknowledgement.
The general call address is one of eight addresses
reserved for specific purposes by the I2C protocol. It
consists of all ‘0’s with R_W = 0.
The general call address is recognized when the General Call Enable (GCEN) bit is set (I2CCON<7> = 1).
Following a Start bit detection, 8 bits are shifted into
I2CRSR and the address is compared with I2CADD,
and is also compared with the general call address
which is fixed in hardware.
If a general call address match occurs, the I2CRSR is
transferred to the I2CRCV after the eighth clock, the
RBF flag is set, and on the falling edge of the ninth bit
(ACK bit), the Master Event Interrupt Flag (MI2CIF) is
set.
When the interrupt is serviced, the source for the
interrupt can be checked by reading the contents of the
I2CRCV to determine if the address was device-specific,
or a general call address.
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
17.11 I2C Master Support
As a master device, six operations are supported:
• Assert a Start condition on SDA and SCL
• Assert a Restart condition on SDA and SCL
• Write to the I2CTRN register initiating
transmission of data/address
• Generate a Stop condition on SDA and SCL
• Configure the I2C port to receive data
• Generate an ACK condition at the end of a
received byte of data
17.12 I2C Master Operation
The master device generates all of the serial clock
pulses and the Start and Stop conditions. A transfer is
ended with a Stop condition or with a Repeated Start
condition. Since the Repeated Start condition is also
the beginning of the next serial transfer, the I2C bus will
not be released.
In Master Transmitter mode, serial data is output
through SDA, while SCL outputs the serial clock. The
first byte transmitted contains the slave address of the
receiving device (7 bits) and the data direction bit. In
this case, the data direction bit (R_W) is logic ‘0’. Serial
data is transmitted 8 bits at a time. After each byte is
transmitted, an ACK bit is received. Start and Stop
conditions are output to indicate the beginning and the
end of a serial transfer.
In Master Receive mode, the first byte transmitted
contains the slave address of the transmitting device
(7 bits) and the data direction bit. In this case, the data
direction bit (R_W) is logic ‘1’. Thus, the first byte
transmitted is a 7-bit slave address, followed by a ‘1’ to
indicate the receive bit. Serial data is received via
SDA, while SCL outputs the serial clock. Serial data is
received 8 bits at a time. After each byte is received,
an ACK bit is transmitted. Start and Stop conditions
indicate the beginning and end of transmission.
17.12.1
I2C MASTER TRANSMISSION
Transmission of a data byte, a 7-bit address or the
second half of a 10-bit address is accomplished by
simply writing a value to I2CTRN register. The user
should only write to I2CTRN when the module is in a
Wait state. This action will set the Buffer Full Flag (TBF)
and allow the Baud Rate Generator to begin counting
and start the next transmission. Each bit of address/
data will be shifted out onto the SDA pin after the falling
edge of SCL is asserted. The Transmit Status Flag,
TRSTAT (I2CSTAT<14>), indicates that a master
transmit is in progress.
DS70141E-page 113
dsPIC30F3010/3011
17.12.2
I2C MASTER RECEPTION
Master mode reception is enabled by programming the
Receive Enable (RCEN) bit (I2CCON<3>). The I2C
module must be Idle before the RCEN bit is set; otherwise, the RCEN bit will be disregarded. The Baud Rate
Generator begins counting, and on each rollover, the
state of the SCL pin toggles, and data is shifted into the
I2CRSR on the rising edge of each clock.
If a transmit was in progress when the bus collision
occurred, the transmission is halted, the TBF flag is
cleared, the SDA and SCL lines are deasserted and a
value can now be written to I2CTRN. When the user
services the I2C master event Interrupt Service
Routine, if the I2C bus is free (i.e., the P bit is set), the
user can resume communication by asserting a Start
condition.
In I2C Master mode, the reload value for the BRG is
located in the I2CBRG register. When the BRG is
loaded with this value, the BRG counts down to ‘0’ and
stops until another reload has taken place. If clock
arbitration is taking place, for instance, the BRG is
reloaded when the SCL pin is sampled high.
If a Start, Restart, Stop or Acknowledge condition was
in progress when the bus collision occurred, the condition is aborted, the SDA and SCL lines are deasserted
and the respective control bits in the I2CCON register
are cleared to ‘0’. When the user services the bus
collision Interrupt Service Routine, and if the I2C bus is
free, the user can resume communication by asserting
a Start condition.
As per the I2C standard, FSCL may be 100 kHz or
400 kHz. However, the user can specify any baud rate
up to 1 MHz. I2CBRG values of ‘0’ or ‘1’ are illegal.
The Master will continue to monitor the SDA and SCL
pins, and if a Stop condition occurs, the MI2CIF bit will
be set.
EQUATION 17-1:
A write to the I2CTRN will start the transmission of data
at the first data bit, regardless of where the transmitter
left off when bus collision occurred.
17.12.3
BAUD RATE GENERATOR (BRG)
I2CBRG =
17.12.4
I2CBRG VALUE
CY
( FFSCL
–
FCY
1,111,111
)
–1
CLOCK ARBITRATION
Clock arbitration occurs when the master deasserts the
SCL pin (SCL allowed to float high) during any receive,
transmit or Restart/Stop condition. When the SCL pin is
allowed to float high, the Baud Rate Generator is
suspended from counting until the SCL pin is actually
sampled high. When the SCL pin is sampled high, the
Baud Rate Generator is reloaded with the contents of
I2CBRG and begins counting. This ensures that the
SCL high time will always be at least one BRG rollover
count in the event that the clock is held low by an
external device.
17.12.5
MULTI-MASTER COMMUNICATION,
BUS COLLISION AND BUS
ARBITRATION
Multi-master operation support is achieved by bus
arbitration. When the master outputs address/data bits
onto the SDA pin, arbitration takes place when the
master outputs a ‘1’ on SDA, by letting SDA float high
while another master asserts a ‘0’. When the SCL pin
floats high, data should be stable. If the expected data
on SDA is a ‘1’ and the data sampled on the SDA
pin = 0, then a bus collision has taken place. The
master will set the MI2CIF pulse and reset the master
portion of the I2C port to its Idle state.
DS70141E-page 114
In a Multi-Master environment, the interrupt generation
on the detection of Start and Stop conditions allows the
determination of when the bus is free. Control of the I2C
bus can be taken when the P bit is set in the I2CSTAT
register, or the bus is Idle and the S and P bits are
cleared.
17.13 I2C Module Operation During CPU
Sleep and Idle Modes
17.13.1
I2C OPERATION DURING CPU
SLEEP MODE
When the device enters Sleep mode, all clock sources
to the module are shut down and stay at logic ‘0’. If
Sleep occurs in the middle of a transmission, and the
state machine is partially into a transmission as the
clocks stop, then the transmission is aborted. Similarly,
if Sleep occurs in the middle of a reception, then the
reception is aborted.
17.13.2
I2C OPERATION DURING CPU IDLE
MODE
For the I2C, the I2CSIDL bit selects if the module will
stop on Idle or continue on Idle. If I2CSIDL = 0, the
module will continue operation on assertion of the Idle
mode. If I2CSIDL = 1, the module will stop on Idle.
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
I2CADD
I2CEN
—
ACKSTAT
—
—
TRSTAT
—
—
—
—
—
Bit 11
—
—
—
—
—
—
I2CSIDL SCLREL IPMIEN
—
—
—
Bit 12
—
BCL
A10M
—
—
—
Bit 10
GCSTAT
DISSLW
—
—
—
Bit 9
ADD10
SMEN
—
—
Bit 8
Refer to “dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual” (DS70046) for descriptions of register bit fields.
020A
I2CSTAT
—
—
—
Bit 13
Note 1:
0208
I2CCON
—
—
—
Bit 14
— = unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’
0206
I2CBRG
—
Bit 15
I2C™ REGISTER MAP(1)
Legend:
0202
0204
I2CTRN
0200
I2CRCV
SFR Name Addr.
TABLE 17-2:
IWCOL
GCEN
Bit 7
I2COV
STREN
Bit 6
PEN
RSEN
Bit 1
SEN
Bit 0
Reset State
P
ACKEN
S
RCEN
R_W
RBF
TBF
0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000
0001 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 1111 1111
Address Register
D_A
ACKDT
Bit 2
Transmit Register
Bit 3
0000 0000 0000 0000
Bit 4
Receive Register
Baud Rate Generator
Bit 5
dsPIC30F3010/3011
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70141E-page 115
dsPIC30F3010/3011
NOTES:
DS70141E-page 116
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
dsPIC30F3010/3011
18.0
UNIVERSAL ASYNCHRONOUS
RECEIVER TRANSMITTER
(UART) MODULE
Note:
18.1
The key features of the UART module are:
•
•
•
•
This data sheet summarizes features of
this group of dsPIC30F devices and is not
intended to be a complete reference
source. For more information on the CPU,
peripherals, register descriptions and general device functionality, refer to the
“dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual”
(DS70046).
•
•
•
•
•
This section describes the Universal Asynchronous
Receiver/Transmitter Communications module.
•
•
FIGURE 18-1:
UART Module Overview
Full-duplex, 8 or 9-bit data communication
Even, odd or no parity options (for 8-bit data)
One or two Stop bits
Fully integrated Baud Rate Generator with 16-bit
prescaler
Baud rates range from 38 bps to 1.875 Mbps at a
30 MHz instruction rate
4-word deep transmit data buffer
4-word deep receive data buffer
Parity, framing and buffer overrun error detection
Support for interrupt only on address detect
(9th bit = 1)
Separate transmit and receive interrupts
Loopback mode for diagnostic support
UART TRANSMITTER BLOCK DIAGRAM
Internal Data Bus
Control and Status bits
Write
UTX8
Write
UxTXREG Low Byte
Transmit Control
– Control TSR
– Control Buffer
– Generate Flags
– Generate Interrupt
Load TSR
UxTXIF
UTXBRK
Data
Transmit Shift Register (UxTSR)
‘0’ (Start)
UxTX
‘1’ (Stop)
Parity
Parity
Generator
16 Divider
16x Baud Clock
from Baud Rate
Generator
Control
Signals
Note:
x = 1 or 2
dsPIC30F3010 only has UART1.
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70141E-page 117
dsPIC30F3010/3011
FIGURE 18-2:
UART RECEIVER BLOCK DIAGRAM
Internal Data Bus
16
Write
Read
Read Read
UxMODE
URX8
Write
UxSTA
UxRXREG Low Byte
Receive Buffer Control
– Generate Flags
– Generate Interrupt
– Shift Data Characters
UxRX
0
· Start bit Detect
· Parity Check
· Stop bit Detect
· Shift Clock Generation
· Wake Logic
Control
Signals
FERR
Load RSR
to Buffer
Receive Shift Register
(UxRSR)
1
PERR
8-9
LPBACK
From UxTX
16 Divider
16x Baud Clock from
Baud Rate Generator
UxRXIF
DS70141E-page 118
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
dsPIC30F3010/3011
18.2
18.2.1
Enabling and Setting Up UART
ENABLING THE UART
The UART module is enabled by setting the UARTEN
bit in the UxMODE register (where x = 1 or 2). Once
enabled, the UxTX and UxRX pins are configured as an
output and an input respectively, overriding the TRIS
and LATCH register bit settings for the corresponding
I/O port pins. The UxTX pin is at logic ‘1’ when no
transmission is taking place.
18.2.2
18.3
18.3.1
Disabling the UART module resets the buffers to
empty states. Any data characters in the buffers are
lost and the baud rate counter is reset.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Set up the UART:
First, the data length, parity and number of Stop
bits must be selected. Then, the transmit and
receive interrupt enable and priority bits are set
up in the UxMODE and UxSTA registers. Also,
the appropriate baud rate value must be written
to the UxBRG register.
Enable the UART by setting the UARTEN bit
(UxMODE<15>).
Set the UTXEN bit (UxSTA<10>), thereby
enabling a transmission.
Write the byte to be transmitted to the lower byte
of UxTXREG. The value will be transferred to the
Transmit Shift register (UxTSR) immediately
and the serial bit stream will start shifting out
during the next rising edge of the baud clock.
Alternatively, the data byte may be written while
UTXEN = 0, following which, the user may set
UTXEN. This will cause the serial bit stream to
begin immediately because the baud clock will
start from a cleared state.
A transmit interrupt will be generated depending
on the value of the interrupt control bit, UTXISEL
(UxSTA<15>).
All error and status flags associated with the UART
module are reset when the module is disabled. The
URXDA, OERR, FERR, PERR, UTXEN, UTXBRK and
UTXBF bits are cleared, whereas RIDLE and TRMT
are set. Other control bits, including ADDEN,
URXISEL<1:0>, UTXISEL, as well as the UxMODE
and UxBRG registers, are not affected.
5.
Clearing the UARTEN bit while the UART is active will
abort all pending transmissions and receptions and
reset the module as defined above. Re-enabling the
UART will restart the UART in the same configuration.
18.3.2
18.2.3
ALTERNATE I/O
The alternate I/O function is enabled by setting the
ALTIO bit (U1MODE<10>). If ALTIO = 1, the UxATX and
UxARX pins (alternate transmit and alternate receive
pins, respectively) are used by the UART module
instead of the UxTX and UxRX pins. If ALTIO = 0, the
UxTX and UxRX pins are used by the UART module.
18.2.4
SETTING UP DATA, PARITY AND
STOP BIT SELECTIONS
Control bits, PDSEL<1:0> in the UxMODE register, are
used to select the data length and parity used in the
transmission. The data length may either be 8 bits with
even, odd or no parity, or 9 bits with no parity.
The STSEL bit determines whether one or two Stop bits
will be used during data transmission.
The default (power-on) setting of the UART is 8 bits, no
parity, 1 Stop bit (typically represented as 8, N, 1).
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
TRANSMITTING IN 8-BIT DATA
MODE
The following steps must be performed in order to
transmit 8-bit data:
DISABLING THE UART
The UART module is disabled by clearing the
UARTEN bit in the UxMODE register. This is the
default state after any Reset. If the UART is disabled,
all I/O pins operate as port pins under the control of
the LATCH and TRIS bits of the corresponding port
pins.
Transmitting Data
TRANSMITTING IN 9-BIT DATA
MODE
The sequence of steps involved in the transmission of
9-bit data is similar to 8-bit transmission, except that a
16-bit data word (of which the upper 7 bits are always
clear) must be written to the UxTXREG register.
18.3.3
TRANSMIT BUFFER (UXTXB)
The transmit buffer is 9 bits wide and 4 characters
deep. Including the Transmit Shift register (UxTSR),
the user effectively has a 5-deep FIFO (First In First
Out) buffer. The UTXBF Status bit (UxSTA<9>)
indicates whether the transmit buffer is full.
If a user attempts to write to a full buffer, the new data
will not be accepted into the FIFO, and no data shift
will occur within the buffer. This enables recovery from
a buffer overrun condition.
The FIFO is reset during any device Reset, but is not
affected when the device enters or wakes up from a
power-saving mode.
DS70141E-page 119
dsPIC30F3010/3011
18.3.4
TRANSMIT INTERRUPT
The transmit interrupt flag (U1TXIF or U2TXIF) is
located in the corresponding Interrupt Flag register.
The transmitter generates an edge to set the UxTXIF
bit. The condition for generating the interrupt depends
on the UTXISEL control bit:
a)
b)
If UTXISEL = 0, an interrupt is generated when a
word is transferred from the transmit buffer to the
Transmit Shift register (UxTSR). This implies that
the transmit buffer has at least one empty word.
If UTXISEL = 1, an interrupt is generated when
a word is transferred from the transmit buffer to
the Transmit Shift register (UxTSR) and the
transmit buffer is empty.
Switching between the two interrupt modes during
operation is possible and sometimes offers more
flexibility.
18.3.5
TRANSMIT BREAK
Setting the UTXBRK bit (UxSTA<11>) will cause the
UxTX line to be driven to logic ‘0’. The UTXBRK bit
overrides all transmission activity. Therefore, the user
should generally wait for the transmitter to be Idle
before setting UTXBRK.
To send a Break character, the UTXBRK bit must be
set by software and must remain set for a minimum of
13 baud clock cycles. The UTXBRK bit is then cleared
by software to generate Stop bits. The user must wait
for a duration of at least one or two baud clock cycles
in order to ensure a valid Stop bit(s) before reloading
the UxTXB or starting other transmitter activity. Transmission of a Break character does not generate a
transmit interrupt.
18.4
18.4.1
RECEIVING IN 8-BIT OR 9-BIT DATA
MODE
2.
3.
4.
5.
Set up the UART (see Section 18.3.1 “Transmitting in 8-Bit Data Mode” and Section 18.3.2 “Transmitting in 9-Bit Data Mode”).
Enable the UART (see Section 18.3.1 “Transmitting in 8-Bit Data Mode” and Section 18.3.2
“Transmitting in 9-Bit Data Mode”).
A receive interrupt will be generated when one
or more data words have been received,
depending on the receive interrupt settings
specified by the URXISEL bits (UxSTA<7:6>).
Read the OERR bit to determine if an overrun
error has occurred. The OERR bit must be reset
in software.
Read the received data from UxRXREG. The act
of reading UxRXREG will move the next word to
the top of the receive FIFO, and the PERR and
FERR values will be updated.
DS70141E-page 120
RECEIVE BUFFER (UXRXB)
The receive buffer is 4 words deep. Including the
Receive Shift register (UxRSR), the user effectively
has a 5-word deep FIFO buffer.
URXDA (UxSTA<0>) = 1 indicates that the receive
buffer has data available. URXDA = 0 implies that the
buffer is empty. If a user attempts to read an empty
buffer, the old values in the buffer will be read and no
data shift will occur within the FIFO.
The FIFO is reset during any device Reset. It is not
affected when the device enters or wakes up from a
power-saving mode.
18.4.3
RECEIVE INTERRUPT
The receive interrupt flag (U1RXIF or U2RXIF) can be
read from the corresponding Interrupt Flag register.
The interrupt flag is set by an edge generated by the
receiver. The condition for setting the receive interrupt
flag depends on the settings specified by the
URXISEL<1:0> (UxSTA<7:6>) control bits.
a)
b)
c)
Receiving Data
The following steps must be performed while receiving
8-bit or 9-bit data:
1.
18.4.2
If URXISEL<1:0> = 00 or 01, an interrupt is
generated every time a data word is transferred
from the Receive Shift register (UxRSR) to the
receive buffer. There may be one or more
characters in the receive buffer.
If URXISEL<1:0> = 10, an interrupt is generated
when a word is transferred from the Receive
Shift register (UxRSR) to the receive buffer,
which, as a result of the transfer, contains
3 characters.
If URXISEL<1:0> = 11, an interrupt is set when
a word is transferred from the Receive Shift
register (UxRSR) to the receive buffer, which, as
a result of the transfer, contains 4 characters
(i.e., becomes full).
Switching between the Interrupt modes during operation is possible, though generally not advisable during
normal operation.
18.5
18.5.1
Reception Error Handling
RECEIVE BUFFER OVERRUN
ERROR (OERR BIT)
The OERR bit (UxSTA<1>) is set if all of the following
conditions occur:
a)
b)
c)
The receive buffer is full.
The Receive Shift register is full, but unable to
transfer the character to the receive buffer.
The Stop bit of the character in the UxRSR is
detected, indicating that the UxRSR needs to
transfer the character to the buffer.
Once OERR is set, no further data is shifted in UxRSR
(until the OERR bit is cleared in software or a Reset
occurs). The data held in UxRSR and UxRXREG
remains valid.
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
dsPIC30F3010/3011
18.5.2
FRAMING ERROR (FERR)
The FERR bit (UxSTA<2>) is set if a ‘0’ is detected
instead of a Stop bit. If two Stop bits are selected, both
Stop bits must be ‘1’; otherwise, FERR will be set. The
read-only FERR bit is buffered along with the received
data; it is cleared on any Reset.
18.5.3
PARITY ERROR (PERR)
The PERR bit (UxSTA<3>) is set if the parity of the
received word is incorrect. This error bit is applicable
only if a Parity mode (odd or even) is selected. The
read-only PERR bit is buffered along with the received
data bytes; it is cleared on any Reset.
18.5.4
IDLE STATUS
When the receiver is active (i.e., between the initial
detection of the Start bit and the completion of the Stop
bit), the RIDLE bit (UxSTA<4>) is ‘0’. Between the
completion of the Stop bit and detection of the next
Start bit, the RIDLE bit is ‘1’, indicating that the UART
is Idle.
18.5.5
RECEIVE BREAK
The receiver will count and expect a certain number of
bit times based on the values programmed in the
PDSEL (UxMODE<2:1>) and STSEL (UxMODE<0>)
bits.
If the break is longer than 13 bit times, the reception is
considered complete after the number of bit times
specified by PDSEL and STSEL. The URXDA bit is
set, FERR is set, zeros are loaded into the receive
FIFO, interrupts are generated, if appropriate and the
RIDLE bit is set.
When the module receives a long Break signal and the
receiver has detected the Start bit, the data bits and
the invalid Stop bit (which sets the FERR), the receiver
must wait for a valid Stop bit before looking for the next
Start bit. It cannot assume that the Break condition on
the line is the next Start bit.
Break is regarded as a character containing all 0’s,
with the FERR bit set. The Break character is loaded
into the buffer. No further reception can occur until a
Stop bit is received. Note that RIDLE goes high when
the Stop bit has not been received yet.
18.6
Address Detect Mode
Setting the ADDEN bit (UxSTA<5>) enables the
Address Detect mode, in which a 9th bit (URX8) value
of ‘1’ identifies the received word as an address rather
than data. This mode is only applicable for 9-bit data
communication. The URXISEL control bit does not
have any impact on interrupt generation in this mode,
since an interrupt (if enabled) will be generated every
time the received word has the 9th bit set.
18.7
Loopback Mode
Setting the LPBACK bit enables this special mode in
which the UxTX pin is internally connected to the UxRX
pin. When configured for the Loopback mode, the
UxRX pin is disconnected from the internal UART
receive logic. However, the UxTX pin still functions as
in a normal operation.
To select this mode:
a)
b)
c)
Configure UART for desired mode of operation.
Set LPBACK = 1 to enable Loopback mode.
Enable transmission as defined in Section 18.3
“Transmitting Data”.
18.8
Baud Rate Generator
The UART has a 16-bit Baud Rate Generator to allow
maximum flexibility in baud rate generation. The Baud
Rate Generator register (UxBRG) is readable and
writable. The baud rate is computed as follows:
BRG = 16-bit value held in UxBRG register
(0 through 65535)
FCY = Instruction Clock Rate (1/TCY)
The baud rate is given by Equation 18-1.
EQUATION 18-1:
BAUD RATE
Baud Rate = FCY/(16*(BRG+1))
Therefore, maximum baud rate possible is
FCY/16 (if BRG = 0),
and the minimum baud rate possible is
FCY/(16 * 65536).
With a full 16-bit Baud Rate Generator, at 30 MIPs
operation, the minimum baud rate achievable is
28.5 bps.
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70141E-page 121
dsPIC30F3010/3011
18.9
Auto Baud Support
To allow the system to determine baud rates of
received characters, the input can be optionally linked
to a selected capture input. To enable this mode, the
user must program the input capture module to detect
the falling and rising edges of the Start bit.
18.10.2
UART OPERATION DURING CPU
IDLE MODE
For the UART, the USIDL bit selects if the module will
stop operation when the device enters Idle mode, or
whether the module will continue on Idle. If USIDL = 0,
the module will continue operation during Idle mode. If
USIDL = 1, the module will stop on Idle.
18.10 UART Operation During CPU
Sleep and Idle Modes
18.10.1
UART OPERATION DURING CPU
SLEEP MODE
When the device enters Sleep mode, all clock sources
to the module are shut down and stay at logic ‘0’. If
entry into Sleep mode occurs while a transmission is
in progress, then the transmission is aborted. The
UxTX pin is driven to logic ‘1’. Similarly, if entry into
Sleep mode occurs while a reception is in progress,
then the reception is aborted. The UxSTA, UxMODE,
Transmit and Receive registers and buffers, and the
UxBRG register are not affected by Sleep mode.
If the WAKE bit (UxMODE<7>) is set before the device
enters Sleep mode, then a falling edge on the UxRX
pin will generate a receive interrupt. The Receive
Interrupt Select Mode bit (URXISEL) has no effect for
this function. If the receive interrupt is enabled, then
this will wake-up the device from Sleep. The UARTEN
bit must be set in order to generate a wake-up
interrupt.
DS70141E-page 122
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
0212
0214
U1RXREG
U1BRG
—
—
—
—
—
URX8
UTX8
TRMT
Bit 7
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
—
Bit 10
—
—
—
—
UTXBRK UTXEN
—
Bit 11
—
—
UTXBF
—
Bit 9
Bit 5
ABAUD
LPBACK
Bit 6
ABAUD
Bit 5
PERR
—
Bit 3
RIDLE
—
Bit 4
PERR
—
Bit 3
Receive Register
Transmit Register
RIDLE
—
Bit 4
Receive Register
Transmit Register
URXISEL1 URXISEL0 ADDEN
WAKE
Bit 7
Baud Rate Generator Prescaler
URX8
UTX8
TRMT
—
Bit 8
Refer to “dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual” (DS70046) for descriptions of register bit fields.
—
—
—
—
Bit 12
Note 1:
—
—
—
USIDL
Bit 13
u = uninitialized bit; — = unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’
021E
U2BRG
—
—
—
—
—
—
Bit 14
UTXISEL
UARTEN
Bit 15
UART2 REGISTER MAP(1) (NOT AVAILABLE ON dsPIC30F3010)
Legend:
021A
021C
0218
U2STA
U2RXREG
0216
U2MODE
U2TXREG
Addr.
SFR
Name
TABLE 18-2:
Bit 6
LPBACK
URXISEL1 URXISEL0 ADDEN
WAKE
Baud Rate Generator Prescaler
UTXBF
—
Bit 8
Refer to “dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual” (DS70046) for descriptions of register bit fields.
—
—
—
Bit 9
Note 1:
—
Bit 10
ALTIO
UTXBRK UTXEN
—
Bit 11
u = uninitialized bit; — = unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’
—
—
—
—
Bit 12
Legend:
—
—
—
—
—
—
0210
UTXISEL
020E
U1STA
U1TXREG
Bit 13
USIDL
—
Bit 14
Bit 15
UARTEN
020C
SFR Name Addr.
U1MODE
UART1 REGISTER MAP(1)
TABLE 18-1:
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Reset State
Bit 1
OERR
FERR
OERR
PDSEL1 PDSEL0
Bit 2
FERR
Reset State
0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 000u uuuu uuuu
URXDA 0000 0001 0001 0000
STSEL 0000 0000 0000 0000
Bit 0
0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 000u uuuu uuuu
URXDA 0000 0001 0001 0000
PDSEL1 PDSEL0 STSEL 0000 0000 0000 0000
dsPIC30F3010/3011
DS70141E-page 123
dsPIC30F3010/3011
NOTES:
DS70141E-page 124
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
dsPIC30F3010/3011
19.0
Note:
10-BIT HIGH-SPEED ANALOGTO-DIGITAL CONVERTER
(ADC) MODULE
This data sheet summarizes features of
this group of dsPIC30F devices and is not
intended to be a complete reference
source. For more information on the CPU,
peripherals, register descriptions and general device functionality, refer to the
“dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual”
(DS70046).
The 10-bit high-speed Analog-to-Digital Converter
(ADC) allows conversion of an analog input signal to a
10-bit digital number. This module is based on a Successive Approximation Register (SAR) architecture,
and provides a maximum sampling rate of 1 Msps. The
ADC module has 16 analog inputs which are multiplexed into four sample and hold amplifiers. The output
of the sample and hold is the input into the converter,
which generates the result. The analog reference voltages are software selectable to either the device supply voltage (AVDD/AVSS) or the voltage level on the
(VREF+/VREF-) pin. The ADC has a unique feature of
being able to operate while the device is in Sleep
mode.
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
The ADC module has six 16-bit registers:
•
•
•
•
•
•
A/D Control Register 1 (ADCON1)
A/D Control Register 2 (ADCON2)
A/D Control Register 3 (ADCON3)
A/D Input Select register (ADCHS)
A/D Port Configuration register (ADPCFG)
A/D Input Scan Selection register (ADCSSL)
The ADCON1, ADCON2 and ADCON3 registers
control the operation of the ADC module. The ADCHS
register selects the input channels to be converted. The
ADPCFG register configures the port pins as analog
inputs or as digital I/O. The ADCSSL register selects
inputs for scanning.
Note:
The SSRC<2:0>, ASAM, SIMSAM,
SMPI<3:0>, BUFM and ALTS bits, as well
as the ADCON3 and ADCSSL registers,
must not be written to while ADON = 1.
This would lead to indeterminate results.
The block diagram of the ADC module is shown in
Figure 19-1.
DS70141E-page 125
dsPIC30F3010/3011
FIGURE 19-1:
10-BIT HIGH-SPEED ADC FUNCTIONAL BLOCK DIAGRAM
AVDD
VREF+
AVSS
VREF-
AN2
+
AN6
-
AN1
AN4
+
AN7
-
S/H
CH1
ADC
10-Bit Result
S/H
Conversion Logic
CH2
16-word, 10-bit
Dual Port
Buffer
AN2
AN5
+
AN8
-
S/H
CH3
CH1,CH2,
CH3,CH0
Sample
AN3
AN0
AN1
AN2
AN3
AN4
AN4
AN5
AN5
AN6(1)
AN6
AN7(1)
AN7
AN8(1)
AN8
+
AN1
-
Input
Switches
S/H
Sample/Sequence
Control
Bus Interface
AN1
AN0
AN3
Data
Format
AN0
Input Mux
Control
CH0
Note 1: Not available on dsPIC30F3010 devices.
DS70141E-page 126
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
dsPIC30F3010/3011
19.1
ADC Result Buffer
The module contains a 16-word, dual port, read-only
buffer, called ADCBUF0...ADCBUFF, to buffer the ADC
results. The RAM is 10 bits wide, but is read into different
format 16-bit words. The contents of the sixteen ADC
Conversion Result Buffer registers, ADCBUF0 through
ADCBUFF, cannot be written by user software.
19.2
Conversion Operation
After the ADC module has been configured, the sample
acquisition is started by setting the SAMP bit. Various
sources, such as a programmable bit, timer time-outs
and external events, will terminate acquisition and start
a conversion. When the A/D conversion is complete,
the result is loaded into ADCBUF0...ADCBUFF, and
the A/D Interrupt Flag, ADIF, and the DONE bit are set
after the number of samples specified by the SMPI bit.
The following steps should be followed for doing an
A/D conversion:
• Configure the ADC module:
- Configure analog pins, voltage reference and
digital I/O
- Select A/D input channels
- Select A/D conversion clock
- Select A/D conversion trigger
- Turn on A/D module
• Configure A/D interrupt (if required):
- Clear ADIF bit
- Select A/D interrupt priority
• Start sampling
• Wait the required acquisition time
• Trigger acquisition end; start conversion
• Wait for A/D conversion to complete, by either:
- Waiting for the A/D interrupt
- Waiting for the DONE bit to be set
• Read A/D result buffer; clear ADIF if required
19.3
Selecting the Conversion
Sequence
Several groups of control bits select the sequence in
which the A/D connects inputs to the sample/hold
channels, converts channels, writes the buffer memory
and generates interrupts. The sequence is controlled
by the sampling clocks.
The SIMSAM bit controls the acquire/convert
sequence for multiple channels. If the SIMSAM bit is
‘0’, the two or four selected channels are acquired and
converted sequentially, with two or four sample clocks.
If the SIMSAM bit is ‘1’, two or four selected channels
are acquired simultaneously, with one sample clock.
The channels are then converted sequentially. Obviously, if there is only 1 channel selected, the SIMSAM
bit is not applicable.
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
The CHPS bits select how many channels are sampled. This can vary from 1, 2 or 4 channels. If the CHPS
bits select 1 channel, the CH0 channel will be sampled
at the sample clock and converted. The result is stored
in the buffer. If the CHPS bits select 2 channels, the
CH0 and CH1 channels will be sampled and converted.
If the CHPS bits select 4 channels, the CH0, CH1, CH2
and CH3 channels will be sampled and converted.
The SMPI bits select the number of acquisition/
conversion sequences that would be performed before
an interrupt occurs. This can vary from 1 sample per
interrupt to 16 samples per interrupt.
The user cannot program a combination of CHPS and
SMPI bits that specifies more than 16 conversions per
interrupt, or 8 conversions per interrupt, depending on
the BUFM bit. The BUFM bit, when set, will split the
16-word results buffer (ADCBUF0...ADCBUFF) into
two 8-word groups. Writing to the 8-word buffers will be
alternated on each interrupt event. Use of the BUFM bit
will depend on how much time is available for moving
data out of the buffers after the interrupt, as determined
by the application.
If the processor can quickly unload a full buffer within
the time it takes to acquire and convert one channel,
the BUFM bit can be ‘0’ and up to 16 conversions may
be done per interrupt. The processor will have one
sample and conversion time to move the sixteen
conversions.
If the processor cannot unload the buffer within the
acquisition and conversion time, the BUFM bit should be
‘1’. For example, if SMPI<3:0> (ADCON2<5:2>) = 0111,
then eight conversions will be loaded into 1/2 of the buffer, following which an interrupt occurs. The next eight
conversions will be loaded into the other 1/2 of the buffer.
The processor will have the entire time between
interrupts to move the eight conversions.
The ALTS bit can be used to alternate the inputs
selected during the sampling sequence. The input
multiplexer has two sets of sample inputs: MUX A and
MUX B. If the ALTS bit is ‘0’, only the MUX A inputs are
selected for sampling. If the ALTS bit is ‘1’ and
SMPI<3:0> = 0000, on the first sample/convert
sequence, the MUX A inputs are selected, and on the
next acquire/convert sequence, the MUX B inputs are
selected.
The CSCNA bit (ADCON2<10>) will allow the CH0
channel inputs to be alternately scanned across a
selected number of analog inputs for the MUX A group.
The inputs are selected by the ADCSSL register. If a
particular bit in the ADCSSL register is ‘1’, the corresponding input is selected. The inputs are always
scanned from lower to higher numbered inputs, starting
after each interrupt. If the number of inputs selected is
greater than the number of samples taken per interrupt,
the higher numbered inputs are unused.
DS70141E-page 127
dsPIC30F3010/3011
19.4
Programming the Start of
Conversion Trigger
The conversion trigger will terminate acquisition and
start the requested conversions.
The SSRC<2:0> bits select the source of the
conversion trigger.
The SSRC bits provide for up to five alternate sources
of conversion trigger.
When SSRC<2:0> = 000, the conversion trigger is
under software control. Clearing the SAMP bit will
cause the conversion trigger.
19.6
Selecting the A/D Conversion
Clock
The A/D conversion requires 12 TAD. The source of the
A/D conversion clock is software selected using a 6-bit
counter. There are 64 possible options for TAD.
EQUATION 19-1:
A/D CONVERSION CLOCK
TAD = TCY • (0.5 • (ADCS<5:0> + 1))
TAD
ADCS<5:0> = 2
–1
TCY
When SSRC<2:0> = 111 (Auto-Start mode), the
conversion trigger is under A/D clock control. The
SAMC bits select the number of A/D clocks between
the start of acquisition and the start of conversion. This
provides the fastest conversion rates on multiple
channels. The SAMC bits must always be at least one
clock cycle.
The internal RC oscillator is selected by setting the
ADRC bit.
Other trigger sources can come from timer modules,
motor control PWM module or external interrupts.
Example 19-1 shows a sample calculation for the
ADCS<5:0> bits, assuming a device operating speed
of 30 MIPS.
Note:
To operate the A/D at the maximum
specified conversion speed, the autoconvert trigger option should be selected
(SSRC = 111) and the auto-sample time
bits should be set to 1 TAD
(SAMC = 00001). This configuration will
give
a
total
conversion
period
(sample + convert) of 13 TAD.
The use of any other conversion trigger
will result in additional TAD cycles to
synchronize the external event to the A/D.
19.5
Aborting a Conversion
Clearing the ADON bit during a conversion will abort
the current conversion and stop the sampling sequencing. The ADCBUF will not be updated with the partially
completed A/D conversion sample. That is, the
ADCBUF will continue to contain the value of the last
completed conversion (or the last value written to the
ADCBUF register).
For correct A/D conversions, the A/D conversion clock
(TAD) must be selected to ensure a minimum TAD time
of 83.33 nsec (for VDD = 5V). Refer to Section 23.0
"Electrical Characteristics" for minimum TAD under
other operating conditions.
EXAMPLE 19-1:
A/D CONVERSION CLOCK
CALCULATION
TAD = 154 nsec
TCY = 33 nsec (30 MIPS)
TAD
–1
TCY
154 nsec
=2•
–1
33 nsec
= 8.33
ADCS<5:0> = 2
Therefore,
Set ADCS<5:0> = 9
TCY
(ADCS<5:0> + 1)
2
33 nsec
=
(9 + 1)
2
Actual TAD =
= 165 nsec
If the clearing of the ADON bit coincides with an
auto-start, the clearing has a higher priority.
After the A/D conversion is aborted, a 2 TAD wait is
required before the next sampling may be started by
setting the SAMP bit.
If sequential sampling is specified, the A/D will continue
at the next sample pulse which corresponds with the
next channel converted. If simultaneous sampling is
specified, the A/D will continue with the next multi-channel group conversion sequence.
DS70141E-page 128
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
dsPIC30F3010/3011
19.7
ADC Conversion Speeds
The dsPIC30F 10-bit ADC specifications permit a
maximum 1 Msps sampling rate. Table 19-1
summarizes the conversion speeds for the dsPIC30F
10-bit A/D converter and the required operating
conditions.
TABLE 19-1:
10-BIT ADC CONVERSION RATE PARAMETERS
dsPIC30F 10-Bit ADC Conversion Rates
ADC Speed
Up to
1 Msps(1)
TAD
Sampling
Minimum Time Min
83.33 ns
12 TAD
RS Max
VDD
Temperature
500Ω
4.5V to 5.5V
-40°C to +85°C
A/D Channels Configuration
VREF- VREF+
ANx
CH1, CH2 or CH3
S/H
ADC
CH0
S/H
Up to
750 ksps(1)
95.24 ns
2 TAD
500Ω
4.5V to 5.5V
-40°C to +85°C
VREF- VREF+
ANx
Up to
600 ksps(1)
138.89 ns
12 TAD
500Ω
3.0V to 5.5V
CHX
S/H
ADC
-40°C to +125°C
VREF- VREF+
ANx
CH1, CH2 or CH3
S/H
CH0
ADC
S/H
Up to
500 ksps
153.85 ns
1 TAD
5.0 kΩ
4.5V to 5.5V
-40°C to +125°C
VREF- VREF+
or
or
AVSS AVDD
CHX
ANx
S/H
ADC
ANx or VREF-
Up to
300 ksps
256.41 ns
1 TAD
5.0 kΩ
3.0V to 5.5V
-40°C to +125°C
VREF- VREF+
or
or
AVSS AVDD
CHX
ANx
S/H
ADC
ANx or VREF-
Note 1: External VREF- and VREF+ pins must be used for correct operation. See Figure 19-2 for recommended
circuit.
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70141E-page 129
dsPIC30F3010/3011
Figure 19-2 depicts the recommended circuit for the
conversion rates above 500 ksps.
The configuration guidelines give the required setup
values for the conversion speeds above 500 ksps,
since they require external VREF pins usage and there
are some differences in the configuration procedure.
Configuration details that are not critical to the
conversion speed have been omitted.
ADC VOLTAGE REFERENCE SCHEMATIC
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
VDD
C8
1 μF
VDD
C7
0.1 μF
VDD
C6
0.01 μF
VDD
VDD
C5
1 μF
VDD
C4
0.1 μF
VDD
C3
0.01 μF
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
VREF+
VREF-
1
2
3
4
VSS
5
6 VSS dsPIC30F3011 VDD
7 VDD
8
9
10
11
AVSS
AVDD
VDD
VSS 39
38
37
36
35
34
VDD
44
43
42
41
40
VDD
FIGURE 19-2:
R1
10
VDD
19.7.1
1 Msps CONFIGURATION
GUIDELINE
The configuration for 1 Msps operation is dependent on
whether a single input pin is to be sampled or whether
multiple pins will be sampled.
19.7.1.1
Single Analog Input
For conversions at 1 Msps for a single analog input, at
least two sample and hold channels must be enabled.
The analog input multiplexer must be configured so
that the same input pin is connected to both sample
and hold channels. The ADC converts the value held
on one S/H channel, while the second S/H channel
acquires a new input sample.
DS70141E-page 130
C2
0.1 μF
VDD
R2
10
C1
0.01 μF
19.7.1.2
Multiple Analog Inputs
The ADC can also be used to sample multiple analog
inputs using multiple sample and hold channels. In this
case, the total 1 Msps conversion rate is divided among
the different input signals. For example, four inputs can
be sampled at a rate of 250 ksps for each signal or two
inputs could be sampled at a rate of 500 ksps for each
signal. Sequential sampling must be used in this configuration to allow adequate sampling time on each
input.
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
dsPIC30F3010/3011
19.7.1.3
1 Msps Configuration Items
The following configuration items are required to
achieve a 1 Msps conversion rate.
• Comply with conditions provided in Table 20-2
• Connect external VREF+ and VREF- pins following
the recommended circuit shown in Figure 19-2
• Set SSRC<2:0> = 111 in the ADCON1 register to
enable the auto-convert option
• Enable automatic sampling by setting the ASAM
control bit in the ADCON1 register
• Enable sequential sampling by clearing the
SIMSAM bit in the ADCON1 register
• Enable at least two sample and hold channels by
writing the CHPS<1:0> control bits in the
ADCON2 register
• Write the SMPI<3:0> control bits in the ADCON2
register for the desired number of conversions
between interrupts. At a minimum, set
SMPI<3:0> = 0001 since at least two sample and
hold channels should be enabled
• Configure the A/D clock period to be:
1
= 83.33 ns
12 x 1,000,000
by writing to the ADCS<5:0> control bits in the
ADCON3 register
• Configure the sampling time to be 2 TAD by
writing: SAMC<4:0> = 00010
• Select at least two channels per analog input pin
by writing to the ADCHS register
19.7.2
750 ksps CONFIGURATION
GUIDELINE
The following configuration items are required to
achieve a 750 ksps conversion rate. This configuration
assumes that a single analog input is to be sampled.
• Comply with conditions provided in Table 20-2
• Connect external VREF+ and VREF- pins following
the recommended circuit shown in Figure 19-2
• Set SSRC<2:0> = 111 in the ADCON1 register to
enable the auto-convert option
• Enable automatic sampling by setting the ASAM
control bit in the ADCON1 register
• Enable one sample and hold channel by setting
CHPS<1:0> = 00 in the ADCON2 register
• Write the SMPI<3:0> control bits in the ADCON2
register for the desired number of conversions
between interrupts
• Configure the A/D clock period to be:
1
= 95.24 ns
(12 + 2) x 750,000
by writing to the ADCS<5:0> control bits in the
ADCON3 register
• Configure the sampling time to be 2 TAD by
writing: SAMC<4:0> = 00010
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
19.7.3
600 ksps CONFIGURATION
GUIDELINE
The configuration for 600 ksps operation is dependent
on whether a single input pin is to be sampled or
whether multiple pins will be sampled.
19.7.3.1
Single Analog Input
When performing conversions at 600 ksps for a single
analog input, at least two sample and hold channels
must be enabled. The analog input multiplexer must be
configured so that the same input pin is connected to
both sample and hold channels. The A/D converts the
value held on one S/H channel, while the second S/H
channel acquires a new input sample.
19.7.3.2
Multiple Analog Input
The A/D converter can also be used to sample multiple
analog inputs using multiple sample and hold channels.
In this case, the total 600 ksps conversion rate is
divided among the different input signals. For example,
four inputs can be sampled at a rate of 150 ksps for
each signal or two inputs can be sampled at a rate of
300 ksps for each signal. Sequential sampling must be
used in this configuration to allow adequate sampling
time on each input.
19.7.3.3
600 ksps Configuration Items
The following configuration items are required to
achieve a 600 ksps conversion rate.
• Comply with conditions provided in Table 20-2
• Connect external VREF+ and VREF- pins following
the recommended circuit shown in Figure 19-2
• Set SSRC<2:0> = 111 in the ADCON1 register to
enable the auto-convert option
• Enable automatic sampling by setting the ASAM
control bit in the ADCON1 register
• Enable sequential sampling by clearing the
SIMSAM bit in the ADCON1 register
• Enable at least two sample and hold channels by
writing the CHPS<1:0> control bits in the
ADCON2 register
• Write the SMPI<3:0> control bits in the ADCON2
register for the desired number of conversions
between interrupts. At a minimum, set
SMPI<3:0> = 0001 since at least two sample and
hold channels should be enabled
• Configure the A/D clock period to be:
1
= 138.89 ns
12 x 600,000
by writing to the ADCS<5:0> control bits in the
ADCON3 register
• Configure the sampling time to be 2 TAD by
writing: SAMC<4:0> = 00010
Select at least two channels per analog input pin by
writing to the ADCHS register.
DS70141E-page 131
dsPIC30F3010/3011
19.8
A/D Acquisition Requirements
The analog input model of the 10-bit ADC is shown in
Figure 19-3. The total sampling time for the ADC is a
function of the internal amplifier settling time, device
VDD and the holding capacitor charge time.
For the ADC to meet its specified accuracy, the Charge
Holding Capacitor (CHOLD) must be allowed to fully
charge to the voltage level on the analog input pin. The
Source Impedance (RS), the Interconnect Impedance
(RIC) and the Internal Sampling Switch (RSS)
Impedance combine to directly affect the time required
to charge the capacitor, CHOLD. The combined
impedance of the analog sources must therefore be
small enough to fully charge the holding capacitor
within the chosen sample time. To minimize the effects
of pin leakage currents on the accuracy of the A/D
converter, the maximum recommended source
impedance, RS, is 5 kΩ. After the analog input channel
is selected (changed), this sampling function must be
completed prior to starting the conversion. The internal
holding capacitor will be in a discharged state prior to
each sample operation.
FIGURE 19-3:
The user must allow at least 1 TAD period of sampling
time, TSAMP, between conversions to allow each
sample to be acquired. This sample time may be
controlled manually in software by setting/clearing the
SAMP bit, or it may be automatically controlled by the
ADC. In an automatic configuration, the user must
allow enough time between conversion triggers so that
the minimum sample time can be satisfied. Refer to the
Section 23.0 "Electrical Characteristics" for TAD and
sample time requirements.
ADC ANALOG INPUT MODEL
VDD
Rs
VA
ANx
CPIN
RIC ≤ 250Ω
VT = 0.6V
VT = 0.6V
Sampling
Switch
RSS ≤ 3 kΩ
RSS
ILEAKAGE
± 500 nA
CHOLD
= DAC capacitance
= 4.4 pF
VSS
Legend: CPIN
= Input Capacitance
VT
= Threshold Voltage
ILEAKAGE = Leakage Current at the pin due to
various junctions
RIC
= Interconnect Resistance
RSS
= Sampling Switch Resistance
CHOLD
= Sample/Hold Capacitance (from DAC)
Note:
CPIN value depends on device package and is not tested. Effect of CPIN negligible if Rs ≤ 5 kΩ.
DS70141E-page 132
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
dsPIC30F3010/3011
19.9
Module Power-Down Modes
If the ADC interrupt is enabled, the device will wake-up
from Sleep. If the ADC interrupt is not enabled, the
ADC module will then be turned off, although the
ADON bit will remain set.
The module has three internal power modes. When the
ADON bit is ‘1’, the module is in Active mode; it is fully
powered and functional. When ADON is ‘0’, the module
is in Off mode. The digital and analog portions of the
circuit are disabled for maximum current savings. In
order to return to the Active mode from Off mode, the
user must wait for the ADC circuitry to stabilize.
19.10.2
The ADSIDL bit selects if the module will stop on Idle or
continue on Idle. If ADSIDL = 0, the module will
continue operation on assertion of Idle mode. If
ADSIDL = 1, the module will stop on Idle.
19.10 ADC Operation During CPU Sleep
and Idle Modes
19.10.1
19.11 Effects of a Reset
ADC OPERATION DURING CPU
SLEEP MODE
A device Reset forces all registers to their Reset state.
This forces the ADC module to be turned off, and any
conversion and acquisition sequence is aborted. The
values that are in the ADCBUF registers are not
modified. The A/DC Result register will contain
unknown data after a Power-on Reset.
When the device enters Sleep mode, all clock sources
to the module are shut down and stay at logic ‘0’.
If Sleep occurs in the middle of a conversion, the
conversion is aborted. The converter will not continue
with a partially completed conversion on exit from
Sleep mode.
19.12 Output Formats
Register contents are not affected by the device
entering or leaving Sleep mode.
The ADC result is 10 bits wide. The data buffer RAM is
also 10 bits wide. The 10-bit data can be read in one of
four different formats. The FORM<1:0> bits select the
format. Each of the output formats translates to a 16-bit
result on the data bus.
The ADC module can operate during Sleep mode if the
ADC clock source is set to RC (ADRC = 1). When the
RC clock source is selected, the ADC module waits
one instruction cycle before starting the conversion.
This allows the SLEEP instruction to be executed,
which eliminates all digital switching noise from the
conversion. When the conversion is complete, the
DONE bit will be set and the result loaded into the
ADCBUF register.
FIGURE 19-4:
A/D OPERATION DURING CPU IDLE
MODE
Write data will always be in right justified (integer)
format.
ADC OUTPUT DATA FORMATS
RAM Contents:
d09 d08 d07 d06 d05 d04 d03 d02 d01 d00
Read to Bus:
Signed Fractional (1.15)
d09 d08 d07 d06 d05 d04 d03 d02 d01 d00
0
0
0
0
0
0
Fractional (1.15)
d09 d08 d07 d06 d05 d04 d03 d02 d01 d00
0
0
0
0
0
0
Signed Integer
Integer
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
d09 d09 d09 d09 d09 d09 d09 d08 d07 d06 d05 d04 d03 d02 d01 d00
0
0
0
0
0
0
d09 d08 d07 d06 d05 d04 d03 d02 d01 d00
DS70141E-page 133
dsPIC30F3010/3011
19.13 Configuring Analog Port Pins
19.14 Connection Considerations
The use of the ADPCFG and TRIS registers control the
operation of the ADC port pins. The port pins that are
desired as analog inputs must have their corresponding TRIS bit set (input). If the TRIS bit is cleared
(output), the digital output level (VOH or VOL) will be
converted.
The analog inputs have diodes to VDD and VSS as ESD
protection. This requires that the analog input be
between VDD and VSS. If the input voltage exceeds this
range by greater than 0.3V (either direction), one of the
diodes becomes forward biased and it may damage the
device if the input current specification is exceeded.
The A/D operation is independent of the state of the
CH0SA<3:0>/CH0SB<3:0> bits and the TRIS bits.
An external RC filter is sometimes added for antialiasing of the input signal. The R component should be
selected to ensure that the sampling time requirements
are satisfied. Any external components connected (via
high-impedance) to an analog input pin (capacitor,
zener diode, etc.) should have very little leakage
current at the pin.
When reading the PORT register, all pins configured as
analog input channels will read as cleared.
Pins configured as digital inputs will not convert an
analog input. Analog levels on any pin that is defined as
a digital input (including the ANx pins) may cause the
input buffer to consume current that exceeds the
device specifications.
DS70141E-page 134
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
0296
0298
029A
029C
029E
02A0
02A2
02A4
02A6
02A8
02AA
u = uninitialized bit; — = unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’
Refer to “dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual” (DS70046) for descriptions of register bit fields.
These bits are not available on dsPIC30F3010 devices.
ADCBUFB
ADCBUFC
ADCBUFD
ADCBUFE
ADCBUFF
ADCON1
ADCON2
ADCON3
ADCHS
ADPCFG
ADCSSL
Legend:
Note 1:
2:
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
CH123SB
—
ADSIDL
VCFG<2:0>
—
CH123NB<1:0>
—
ADON
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
CH0NB
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
CH0SB<3:0>
SAMC<4:0>
CSCNA
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
BUFS
0294
ADCBUFA
—
—
—
—
—
—
SSRC<2:0>
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
PCFG5
CSSL5
CSSL8(2) CSSL7(2) CSSL6(2)
CH123SA
SIMSAM
Bit 3
CSSL4
PCFG4
CH0NA
ASAM
Bit 2
CSSL3
PCFG3
BUFM
SAMP
Bit 1
ALTS
DONE
Bit 0
CSSL2
CSSL1
CSSL0
PCFG2 PCFG1 PCFG0
CH0SA<3:0>
ADCS<5:0>
SMPI<3:0>
—
ADC Data Buffer 15
ADC Data Buffer 14
ADC Data Buffer 13
ADC Data Buffer 12
ADC Data Buffer 11
ADC Data Buffer 10
ADC Data Buffer 9
ADC Data Buffer 8
ADC Data Buffer 7
ADC Data Buffer 6
ADC Data Buffer 5
ADC Data Buffer 4
ADC Data Buffer 3
ADC Data Buffer 2
ADC Data Buffer 1
ADC Data Buffer 0
PCFG8(2) PCFG7(2) PCFG6(2)
CH123NA<1:0>
ADRC
0292
ADCBUF9
—
—
—
—
—
CHPS<1:0>
0290
ADCBUF8
—
—
—
—
FORM<1:0>
028E
ADCBUF7
—
—
—
—
—
—
028C
—
—
—
—
—
ADCBUF6
—
—
—
—
—
—
028A
—
—
—
—
ADCBUF5
—
—
—
—
—
—
0288
Bit 7
ADCBUF4
Bit 8
0286
Bit 9
ADCBUF3
—
—
—
Bit 10
0284
—
Bit 11
0282
—
Bit 12
ADCBUF2
—
ADCBUF1
—
—
0280
ADCBUF0
Bit 13
Bit 15
SFR Name Addr.
Bit 14
ADC REGISTER MAP(1)
TABLE 19-2:
Reset State
0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 00uu uuuu uuuu
0000 00uu uuuu uuuu
0000 00uu uuuu uuuu
0000 00uu uuuu uuuu
0000 00uu uuuu uuuu
0000 00uu uuuu uuuu
0000 00uu uuuu uuuu
0000 00uu uuuu uuuu
0000 00uu uuuu uuuu
0000 00uu uuuu uuuu
0000 00uu uuuu uuuu
0000 00uu uuuu uuuu
0000 00uu uuuu uuuu
0000 00uu uuuu uuuu
0000 00uu uuuu uuuu
0000 00uu uuuu uuuu
dsPIC30F3010/3011
DS70141E-page 135
dsPIC30F3010/3011
NOTES:
DS70141E-page 136
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
dsPIC30F3010/3011
20.0
Note:
SYSTEM INTEGRATION
This data sheet summarizes features of
this group of dsPIC30F devices and is not
intended to be a complete reference
source. For more information on the CPU,
peripherals, register descriptions and general device functionality, refer to the
“dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual”
(DS70046). For more information on the
device instruction set and programming,
refer to the “dsPIC30F/33F Programmer’s
Reference Manual” (DS70157).
There are several features intended to maximize
system reliability, minimize cost through elimination of
external components, provide power-saving operating
modes and offer code protection:
• Oscillator Selection
• Reset
- Power-on Reset (POR)
- Power-up Timer (PWRT)
- Oscillator Start-up Timer (OST)
- Programmable Brown-out Reset (BOR)
• Watchdog Timer (WDT)
• Power-Saving modes (Sleep and Idle)
• Code Protection
• Unit ID Locations
• In-Circuit Serial Programming (ICSP)
20.1
Oscillator System Overview
The dsPIC30F oscillator system has the following
modules and features:
• Various external and internal oscillator options as
clock sources
• An on-chip PLL to boost internal operating
frequency
• A clock switching mechanism between various
clock sources
• Programmable clock postscaler for system power
savings
• A Fail-Safe Clock Monitor (FSCM) that detects
clock failure and takes fail-safe measures
• Clock Control register, OSCCON
• Configuration bits for main oscillator selection
Configuration bits determine the clock source upon
Power-on Reset and Brown-out Reset. Thereafter, the
clock source can be changed between permissible
clock sources. The OSCCON register controls the
clock switching and reflects system clock related
status bits.
Table 20-1 provides a summary of the dsPIC30F
oscillator operating modes. A simplified diagram of the
oscillator system is shown in Figure 20-1.
dsPIC30F devices have a Watchdog Timer, which is
permanently enabled via the Configuration bits, or can
be software controlled. It runs off its own RC oscillator
for added reliability. There are two timers that offer necessary delays on power-up. One is the Oscillator Startup Timer (OST), intended to keep the chip in Reset until
the crystal oscillator is stable. The other is the Powerup Timer (PWRT), which provides a delay on power-up
only, designed to keep the part in Reset while the
power supply stabilizes. With these two timers on-chip,
most applications need no external Reset circuitry.
Sleep mode is designed to offer a very low-current
Power-Down mode. The user can wake-up from Sleep
through external Reset, Watchdog Timer wake-up or
through an interrupt. Several oscillator options are also
made available to allow the part to fit a wide variety of
applications. In the Idle mode, the clock sources are
still active, but the CPU is shut off. The RC oscillator
option saves system cost, while the LP crystal option
saves power.
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70141E-page 137
dsPIC30F3010/3011
TABLE 20-1:
OSCILLATOR OPERATING MODES
Oscillator Mode
Description
XTL
200 kHz-4 MHz crystal on OSC1:OSC2.
XT
4 MHz-10 MHz crystal on OSC1:OSC2.
XT w/PLL 4x
4 MHz-10 MHz crystal on OSC1:OSC2, 4x PLL enabled.
XT w/PLL 8x
4 MHz-10 MHz crystal on OSC1:OSC2, 8x PLL enabled.
XT w/PLL 16x
4 MHz-10 MHz crystal on OSC1:OSC2, 16x PLL enabled(1).
LP
32 kHz crystal on SOSCO:SOSCI(2).
HS
10 MHz-25 MHz crystal.
HS/2 w/PLL 4x
10 MHz-25 MHz crystal, divide by 2, 4x PLL enabled.
HS/2 w/PLL 8x
10 MHz-25MHz crystal, divide by 2, 8x PLL enabled.
HS/2 w/PLL 16x
10 MHz-25MHz crystal, divide by 2, 16x PLL enabled(1).
HS/3 w/PLL 4x
10 MHz-25 MHz crystal, divide by 3, 4x PLL enabled.
HS/3 w/PLL 8x
10 MHz-25MHz crystal, divide by 3, 8x PLL enabled.
HS/3 w/PLL 16x
10 MHz-25MHz crystal, divide by 3, 16x PLL enabled(1).
EC
External clock input (0-40 MHz).
ECIO
External clock input (0-40 MHz), OSC2 pin is I/O.
EC w/PLL 4x
External clock input (4-10 MHz), OSC2 pin is I/O, 4x PLL enabled(1).
EC w/PLL 8x
External clock input (4-10 MHz), OSC2 pin is I/O, 8x PLL enabled(1).
EC w/PLL 16x
External clock input (4-10 MHz), OSC2 pin is I/O, 16x PLL enabled(1).
ERC
External RC oscillator, OSC2 pin is FOSC/4 output(3).
ERCIO
External RC oscillator, OSC2 pin is I/O(3).
FRC
8 MHz internal RC oscillator.
FRC w/PLL 4x
7.37 MHz Internal RC oscillator, 4x PLL enabled.
FRC w/PLL 8x
7.37 MHz Internal RC oscillator, 8x PLL enabled.
FRC w/PLL 16x
7.37 MHz Internal RC oscillator, 16x PLL enabled.
LPRC
512 kHz internal RC oscillator.
Note 1:
2:
3:
dsPIC30F maximum operating frequency of 120 MHz must be met.
LP oscillator can be conveniently shared as system clock, as well as real-time clock for Timer1.
Requires external R and C. Frequency operation up to 4 MHz.
DS70141E-page 138
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
dsPIC30F3010/3011
FIGURE 20-1:
OSCILLATOR SYSTEM BLOCK DIAGRAM
Oscillator Configuration bits
PWRSAV Instruction
Wake-up Request
OSC1
OSC2
FPLL
Primary
Oscillator
PLL
PLL
x4, x8, x16
Lock
COSC<2:0>
Primary Osc
TUN<3:0>
4
NOSC<2:0>
Primary
Oscillator
OSWEN
Stability Detector
Internal Fast RC
Oscillator (FRC)
POR Done
Oscillator
Start-up
Timer
Clock
Secondary Osc
SOSCO
SOSCI
Switching
and Control
Block
32 kHz LP
Oscillator
Secondary
Oscillator
Stability Detector
Internal Low
Power RC
Oscillator (LPRC)
FCKSM<1:0>
2
Programmable
Clock Divider System
Clock
2
POST<1:0>
LPRC
Fail-Safe Clock
Monitor (FSCM)
CF
Oscillator Trap
To Timer1
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70141E-page 139
dsPIC30F3010/3011
20.2
Oscillator Configurations
20.2.1
20.2.2
INITIAL CLOCK SOURCE
SELECTION
In order to ensure that a crystal oscillator (or ceramic
resonator) has started and stabilized, an Oscillator
Start-up Timer is included. It is a simple 10-bit counter
that counts 1024 TOSC cycles before releasing the
oscillator clock to the rest of the system. The time-out
period is designated as TOST. The TOST time is involved
every time the oscillator has to restart (i.e., on POR,
BOR and wake-up from Sleep). The Oscillator Start-up
Timer is applied to the LP, XT, XTL and HS Oscillator
modes (upon wake-up from Sleep, POR and BOR) for
the primary oscillator.
While coming out of Power-on Reset or Brown-out
Reset, the device selects its clock source based on:
a)
b)
FOS<2:0> Configuration bits that select one of
four oscillator groups,
and FPR<4:0> Configuration bits that select one
of 15 oscillator choices within the primary group.
The selection is as shown in Table 20-2.
TABLE 20-2:
OSCILLATOR START-UP TIMER
(OST)
CONFIGURATION BIT VALUES FOR CLOCK SELECTION
Oscillator Mode
Oscillator
Source
FOS<2:0>
FPR<4:0>
OSC2 Function
ECIO w/PLL 4x
PLL
1
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
I/O
ECIO w/PLL 8x
PLL
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
0
I/O
ECIO w/PLL 16x
PLL
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
I/O
FRC w/PLL 4X
PLL
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
I/O
FRC w/PLL 8x
PLL
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
I/O
FRC w/PLL 16x
PLL
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
I/O
XT w/PLL 4x
PLL
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
OSC2
XT w/PLL 8x
PLL
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
OSC2
XT w/PLL 16x
PLL
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
OSC2
HS2 w/PLL 4x
PLL
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
OSC2
HS2 w/PLL 8x
PLL
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
OSC2
HS2 w/PLL 16x
PLL
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
OSC2
HS3 w/PLL 4x
PLL
1
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
OSC2
HS3 w/PLL 8x
PLL
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
0
OSC2
HS3 w/PLL 16x
PLL
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
OSC2
ECIO
External
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
I/O
XT
External
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
OSC2
HS
External
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
OSC2
EC
External
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
CLKO
ERC
External
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
1
CLKO
ERCIO
External
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
I/O
XTL
External
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
OSC2
LP
Secondary
0
0
0
X
X
X
X
X
(Note 1, 2)
FRC
Internal FRC
0
0
1
X
X
X
X
X
(Note 1, 2)
LPRC
Internal LPRC
0
1
0
X
X
X
X
X
(Note 1, 2)
Note 1:
2:
OSC2 pin function is determined by (FPR<4:0>).
OSC1 pin cannot be used as an I/O pin even if the secondary oscillator or an internal clock source is selected at all
times.
DS70141E-page 140
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
dsPIC30F3010/3011
20.2.3
LP OSCILLATOR CONTROL
Enabling the LP oscillator is controlled with two
elements:
1.
2.
The current oscillator group bits, COSC<2:0>
The LPOSCEN bit (OSCON register)
The LP oscillator is on (even during Sleep mode) if
LPOSCEN = 1. The LP oscillator is the device clock if:
• COSC<1:0> = 00 (LP selected as main oscillator)
and
• LPOSCEN = 1
Keeping the LP oscillator on at all times allows for a
fast switch to the 32 kHz system clock for lower power
operation. Returning to the faster main oscillator will
still require a start-up time.
20.2.4
PHASE LOCKED LOOP (PLL)
The PLL multiplies the clock which is generated by the
primary oscillator. The PLL is selectable to have either
gains of x4, x8 and x16. Input and output frequency
ranges are summarized in Table 20-3.
TABLE 20-3:
Fin
4 MHz-10 MHz
4 MHz-10 MHz
4 MHz-7.5 MHz
PLL FREQUENCY RANGE
PLL
Multiplier
x4
x8
x16
Fout
16 MHz-40 MHz
32 MHz-80 MHz
64 MHz-120 MHz
The PLL features a lock output, which is asserted when
the PLL enters a phase locked state. Should the loop
fall out of lock (e.g., due to noise), the lock signal will be
rescinded. The state of this signal is reflected in the
read-only LOCK bit in the OSCCON register.
20.2.5
FAST RC OSCILLATOR (FRC)
The FRC oscillator is a fast (7.37 MHz +/- 2% nominal)
internal RC oscillator. This oscillator is intended to provide reasonable device operating speeds without the
use of an external crystal, ceramic resonator or RC network. The FRC oscillator can be used with the PLL to
obtain higher clock frequencies.
The dsPIC30F operates from the FRC oscillator
whenever the current oscillator selection control bits in
the OSCCON register (OSCCON<13:12>) are set to
‘01’.
The
four-bit
field
specified
by
TUN<3:0>
(OSCTUN<3:0>) allows the user to tune the internal
fast RC oscillator (nominal 7.37 MHz). The user can
tune the FRC oscillator within a range of +10.5%
(840 kHz) and -12% (960 kHz) in steps of 1.50%
around the factory calibrated setting (see Table 20-4).
If OSCCON<14:12> are set to ‘111’ and FPR<4:0> are
set to ‘00101’, ‘00110’ or ‘00111’, then a PLL
multiplier of 4, 8 or 16 (respectively) is applied
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
.
Note:
When a 16x PLL is used, the FRC frequency must not be tuned to a frequency
greater than 7.5 MHz.
TABLE 20-4:
TUN<3:0>
Bits
0111
0110
0101
0100
0011
0010
0001
0000
1111
1110
1101
1100
1011
1010
1001
1000
20.2.6
FRC TUNING
FRC Frequency
+10.5%
+9.0%
+7.5%
+6.0%
+4.5%
+3.0%
+1.5%
Center Frequency (oscillator is
running at calibrated frequency)
-1.5%
-3.0%
-4.5%
-6.0%
-7.5%
-9.0%
-10.5%
-12.0%
LOW-POWER RC OSCILLATOR
(LPRC)
The LPRC oscillator is a component of the Watchdog
Timer (WDT) and oscillates at a nominal frequency of
512 kHz. The LPRC oscillator is the clock source for
the Power-up Timer (PWRT) circuit, WDT and clock
monitor circuits. It may also be used to provide a lowfrequency clock source option for applications where
power consumption is critical and timing accuracy is
not required.
The LPRC oscillator is always enabled at a Power-on
Reset, because it is the clock source for the PWRT.
After the PWRT expires, the LPRC oscillator will remain
ON if one of the following is true:
• The Fail-Safe Clock Monitor is enabled
• The WDT is enabled
• The LPRC oscillator is selected as the system
clock via the COSC<1:0> control bits in the
OSCCON register
If one of the above conditions is not true, the LPRC will
shut-off after the PWRT expires.
Note 1: OSC2 pin function is determined by the
Primary Oscillator mode selection
(FPR<3:0>).
2: OSC1 pin cannot be used as an I/O pin,
even if the secondary oscillator or an
internal clock source is selected at all
times.
DS70141E-page 141
dsPIC30F3010/3011
20.2.7
FAIL-SAFE CLOCK MONITOR
The Fail-Safe Clock Monitor (FSCM) allows the device
to continue to operate even in the event of an oscillator
failure. The FSCM function is enabled by appropriately
programming the FCKSM Configuration bits (Clock
Switch and Monitor Selection bits) in the FOSC Configuration register. If the FSCM function is enabled, the
LPRC internal oscillator will run at all times (except
during Sleep mode) and will not be subject to control
by the SWDTEN bit.
In the event of an oscillator failure, the FSCM will
generate a clock failure trap event and will switch the
system clock over to the FRC oscillator. The user will
then have the option to either attempt to restart the
oscillator or execute a controlled shut down. The user
may decide to treat the trap as a warm Reset by simply
loading the Reset address into the oscillator fail trap
vector. In this event, the CF (Clock Fail) status bit
(OSCCON<3>) is also set whenever a clock failure is
recognized.
In the event of a clock failure, the WDT is unaffected
and continues to run on the LPRC clock.
If the oscillator has a very slow start-up time coming
out of POR, BOR or Sleep, it is possible that the
PWRT timer will expire before the oscillator has
started. In such cases, the FSCM will be activated and
the FSCM will initiate a clock failure trap, and the
COSC<1:0> bits are loaded with FRC oscillator selection. This will effectively shut-off the original oscillator
that was trying to start.
The OSCCON register holds the control and status bits
related to clock switching.
• COSC<1:0>: Read-only status bits always reflect
the current oscillator group in effect.
• NOSC<1:0>: Control bits which are written to
indicate the new oscillator group of choice.
- On POR and BOR, COSC<1:0> and
NOSC<1:0> are both loaded with the
Configuration bit values, FOS<1:0>.
• LOCK: The LOCK status bit indicates a PLL lock.
• CF: Read-only status bit indicating if a clock fail
detect has occurred.
• OSWEN: Control bit changes from a ‘0’ to a ‘1’
when a clock transition sequence is initiated.
Clearing the OSWEN control bit will abort a clock
transition in progress (used for hang-up
situations).
If Configuration bits, FCKSM<1:0> = 1x, then the clock
switching and Fail-Safe Clock Monitor functions are
disabled. This is the default Configuration bit setting.
If clock switching is disabled, then the FOS<1:0> and
FPR<3:0> bits directly control the oscillator selection
and the COSC<1:0> bits do not control the clock
selection. However, these bits will reflect the clock
source selection.
Note:
The user may detect this situation and restart the
oscillator in the clock fail trap ISR.
Upon a clock failure detection, the FSCM module will
initiate a clock switch to the FRC oscillator as follows:
1.
2.
3.
The COSC bits (OSCCON<13:12>) are loaded
with the FRC Oscillator selection value.
CF bit is set (OSCCON<3>).
OSWEN control bit (OSCCON<0>) is cleared.
For the purpose of clock switching, the clock sources
are sectioned into four groups:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Primary
Secondary
Internal FRC
Internal LPRC
The user can switch between these functional groups,
but cannot switch between options within a group. If the
primary group is selected, then the choice within the
group is always determined by the FPR<3:0>
Configuration bits.
20.2.8
The application should not attempt to
switch to a clock of frequency lower than
100 kHz when the Fail-Safe Clock Monitor
is enabled. If such clock switching is
performed, the device may generate an
oscillator fail trap and switch to the fast RC
oscillator.
PROTECTION AGAINST
ACCIDENTAL WRITES TO OSCCON
A write to the OSCCON register is intentionally made
difficult because it controls clock switching and clock
scaling.
To write to the OSCCON low byte, the following code
sequence must be executed without any other
instructions in between:
Byte Write “0x46” to OSCCON low
Byte Write “0x57” to OSCCON low
Byte Write is allowed for one instruction cycle. Write the
desired value or use bit manipulation instruction.
To write to the OSCCON high byte, the following
instructions must be executed without any other
instructions in between:
:
Byte Write “0x78” to OSCCON high
Byte Write “0x9A” to OSCCON high
Byte Write is allowed for one instruction cycle. Write the
desired value or use bit manipulation instruction.
DS70141E-page 142
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
dsPIC30F3010/3011
20.3
Reset
The dsPIC30F3010/3011 differentiates between various
kinds of Reset:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
Power-on Reset (POR)
MCLR Reset during normal operation
MCLR Reset during Sleep
Watchdog Timer (WDT) Reset (during normal
operation)
Programmable Brown-out Reset (BOR)
RESET Instruction
Reset cause by trap lockup (TRAPR)
Reset caused by illegal opcode, or by using an
uninitialized W register as an Address Pointer
(IOPUWR)
FIGURE 20-2:
Different registers are affected in different ways by
various Reset conditions. Most registers are not
affected by a WDT wake-up, since this is viewed as the
resumption of normal operation. Status bits from the
RCON register are set or cleared differently in different
Reset situations, as indicated in Table 20-5. These bits
are used in software to determine the nature of the
Reset.
A block diagram of the on-chip Reset circuit is shown in
Figure 20-2.
A MCLR noise filter is provided in the MCLR Reset
path. The filter detects and ignores small pulses.
Internally generated Resets do not drive MCLR pin low.
RESET SYSTEM BLOCK DIAGRAM
RESET
Instruction
Digital
Glitch Filter
MCLR
Sleep or Idle
WDT
Module
POR
VDD Rise
Detect
S
VDD
Brown-out
Reset
BOR
BOREN
R
TRAP Conflict
Q
SYSRST
Illegal Opcode/
Uninitialized W Register
20.3.1
POR: POWER-ON RESET
A power-on event will generate an internal POR pulse
when a VDD rise is detected. The Reset pulse will occur
at the POR circuit threshold voltage (VPOR), which is
nominally 1.85V. The device supply voltage
characteristics must meet specified starting voltage
and rise rate requirements. The POR pulse will reset a
POR timer and place the device in the Reset state. The
POR also selects the device clock source identified by
the oscillator configuration fuses.
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
The POR circuit inserts a small delay, TPOR, which is
nominally 10 μs and ensures that the device bias
circuits are stable. Furthermore, a user-selected
power-up time-out (TPWRT) is applied. The TPWRT
parameter is based on device Configuration bits and
can be 0 ms (no delay), 4 ms, 16 ms or 64 ms. The total
delay is at device power-up TPOR + TPWRT. When
these delays have expired, SYSRST will be negated on
the next leading edge of the Q1 clock, and the PC will
jump to the Reset vector.
The timing for the SYSRST signal is shown in
Figure 20-3 through Figure 20-5.
DS70141E-page 143
dsPIC30F3010/3011
FIGURE 20-3:
TIME-OUT SEQUENCE ON POWER-UP (MCLR TIED TO VDD)
VDD
MCLR
INTERNAL POR
TOST
OST TIME-OUT
TPWRT
PWRT TIME-OUT
INTERNAL Reset
FIGURE 20-4:
TIME-OUT SEQUENCE ON POWER-UP (MCLR NOT TIED TO VDD): CASE 1
VDD
MCLR
INTERNAL POR
TOST
OST TIME-OUT
TPWRT
PWRT TIME-OUT
INTERNAL Reset
TIME-OUT SEQUENCE ON POWER-UP (MCLR NOT TIED TO VDD): CASE 2
FIGURE 20-5:
VDD
MCLR
INTERNAL POR
TOST
OST TIME-OUT
TPWRT
PWRT TIME-OUT
INTERNAL Reset
DS70141E-page 144
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
dsPIC30F3010/3011
20.3.1.1
POR with Long Crystal Start-up Time
(with FSCM Enabled)
The oscillator start-up circuitry is not linked to the POR
circuitry. Some crystal circuits (especially lowfrequency crystals) will have a relatively long start-up
time. Therefore, one or more of the following conditions
is possible after the POR timer and the PWRT have
expired:
• The oscillator circuit has not begun to oscillate.
• The Oscillator Start-up Timer has NOT expired (if
a crystal oscillator is used).
• The PLL has not achieved a LOCK (if PLL is
used).
If the FSCM is enabled and one of the above conditions
is true, then a clock failure trap will occur. The device
will automatically switch to the FRC oscillator and the
user can switch to the desired crystal oscillator in the
trap ISR.
20.3.1.2
Operating without FSCM and PWRT
A BOR will generate a Reset pulse which will reset the
device. The BOR will select the clock source, based on
the device Configuration bit values (FOS<1:0> and
FPR<3:0>). Furthermore, if an oscillator mode is
selected, the BOR will activate the Oscillator Start-up
Timer (OST). The system clock is held until OST
expires. If the PLL is used, then the clock will be held
until the LOCK bit (OSCCON<5>) is ‘1’.
Concurrently, the POR time-out (TPOR) and the PWRT
time-out (TPWRT) will be applied before the internal
Reset is released. If TPWRT = 0 and a crystal oscillator is
being used, then a nominal delay of TFSCM = 100 μs is
applied. The total delay in this case is (TPOR + TFSCM).
The BOR status bit (RCON<1>) will be set to indicate
that a BOR has occurred. The BOR circuit, if enabled,
will continue to operate while in Sleep or Idle modes
and will reset the device should VDD fall below the BOR
threshold voltage.
FIGURE 20-6:
If the FSCM is disabled and the Power-up Timer
(PWRT) is also disabled, then the device will exit
rapidly from Reset on power-up. If the clock source is
FRC, LPRC, EXTRC or EC, it will be active
immediately.
If the FSCM is disabled and the system clock has not
started, the device will be in a frozen state at the Reset
vector until the system clock starts. From the user’s
perspective, the device will appear to be in Reset until
a system clock is available.
20.3.2
BOR: PROGRAMMABLE
BROWN-OUT RESET
The BOR (Brown-out Reset) module is based on an
internal voltage reference circuit. The main purpose of
the BOR module is to generate a device Reset when
a brown-out condition occurs. Brown-out conditions
are generally caused by glitches on the AC mains
(i.e., missing portions of the AC cycle waveform due
to bad power transmission lines or voltage sags due
to excessive current draw when a large inductive load
is turned on).
VDD
D
Note:
The BOR voltage trip points indicated here
are nominal values provided for design
guidance only.
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
R
R1
C
MCLR
dsPIC30F
Note 1: External Power-on Reset circuit is
required only if the VDD power-up slope
is too slow. The diode D helps discharge
the capacitor quickly when VDD powers
down.
2: R should be suitably chosen so as to
make sure that the voltage drop across
R does not violate the device’s electrical
specification.
3: R1 should be suitably chosen so as to
limit any current flowing into MCLR from
external capacitor C, in the event of
MCLR/VPP pin breakdown due to
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) or
Electrical Overstress (EOS).
The BOR module allows selection of one of the
following voltage trip points:
• 2.6V-2.71V
• 4.1V-4.4V
• 4.58V-4.73V
EXTERNAL POWER-ON
RESET CIRCUIT (FOR
SLOW VDD POWER-UP)
Note:
Dedicated supervisory devices, such as
the MCP1XX and MCP8XX, may also be
used as an external Power-on Reset
circuit.
DS70141E-page 145
dsPIC30F3010/3011
Table 20-5 shows the Reset conditions for the RCON
register. Since the control bits within the RCON register
are R/W, the information in the table implies that all the
bits are negated prior to the action specified in the
condition column.
TABLE 20-5:
INITIALIZATION CONDITION FOR RCON REGISTER CASE 1
Condition
Program
Counter
TRAPR IOPUWR EXTR SWR WDTO IDLE SLEEP POR BOR
Power-on Reset
Brown-out Reset
0x000000
0x000000
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
MCLR Reset during Normal
Operation
Software Reset during
Normal Operation
0x000000
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0x000000
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0x000000
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
MCLR Reset during Sleep
0x000000
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
MCLR Reset during Idle
WDT Time-out Reset
0x000000
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
WDT Wake-up
PC + 2
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
Interrupt Wake-up from
PC + 2(1)
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
Sleep
Clock Failure Trap
0x000004
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Trap Reset
0x000000
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Illegal Operation Trap
0x000000
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Legend: u = unchanged, x = unknown
Note 1: When the wake-up is due to an enabled interrupt, the PC is loaded with the corresponding interrupt vector.
Table 20-6 shows a second example of the bit
conditions for the RCON register. In this case, it is not
assumed the user has set/cleared specific bits prior to
action specified in the condition column.
TABLE 20-6:
INITIALIZATION CONDITION FOR RCON REGISTER CASE 2
Condition
Program
Counter
TRAPR IOPUWR EXTR SWR WDTO IDLE SLEEP POR BOR
Power-on Reset
Brown-out Reset
0x000000
0x000000
0
u
0
u
0
u
0
u
0
u
0
u
0
u
1
0
1
1
MCLR Reset during Normal
Operation
Software Reset during
Normal Operation
0x000000
u
u
1
0
0
0
0
u
u
0x000000
u
u
0
1
0
0
0
u
u
MCLR Reset during Sleep
0x000000
u
u
1
u
0
0
1
u
u
0x000000
u
u
1
u
0
1
0
u
u
MCLR Reset during Idle
WDT Time-out Reset
0x000000
u
u
0
0
1
0
0
u
u
WDT Wake-up
PC + 2
u
u
u
u
1
u
1
u
u
(1)
Interrupt Wake-up from
PC + 2
u
u
u
u
u
u
1
u
u
Sleep
Clock Failure Trap
0x000004
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
Trap Reset
0x000000
1
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
Illegal Operation Reset
0x000000
u
1
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
Legend: u = unchanged, x = unknown
Note 1: When the wake-up is due to an enabled interrupt, the PC is loaded with the corresponding interrupt vector.
DS70141E-page 146
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
dsPIC30F3010/3011
20.4
20.4.1
Watchdog Timer (WDT)
WATCHDOG TIMER OPERATION
The primary function of the Watchdog Timer (WDT) is
to reset the processor in the event of a software
malfunction. The WDT is a free-running timer, which
runs off an on-chip RC oscillator, requiring no external
component. Therefore, the WDT timer will continue to
operate even if the main processor clock (e.g., the
crystal oscillator) fails.
20.4.2
ENABLING AND DISABLING THE
WDT
The Watchdog Timer can be “enabled” or “disabled”
only through a Configuration bit (FWDTEN) in the
Configuration register, FWDT.
Setting FWDTEN = 1 enables the Watchdog Timer.
The enabling is done when programming the device.
By default, after chip erase, FWDTEN bit = 1. Any
device programmer capable of programming
dsPIC30F devices allows programming of this and
other Configuration bits.
If enabled, the WDT will increment until it overflows or
“times out”. A WDT time-out will force a device Reset
(except during Sleep). To prevent a WDT time-out, the
user must clear the Watchdog Timer using a CLRWDT
instruction.
If a WDT times out during Sleep, the device will wakeup. The WDTO bit in the RCON register will be cleared
to indicate a wake-up resulting from a WDT time-out.
Setting FWDTEN = 0 allows user software to enable/
disable the Watchdog Timer via the SWDTEN
(RCON<5>) control bit.
20.5
Power-Saving Modes
There are two power-saving states that can be entered
through the execution of a special instruction, PWRSAV.
These are: Sleep and Idle.
The format of the PWRSAV instruction is as follows:
PWRSAV <parameter>, where ‘parameter’ defines
Idle or Sleep mode.
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
20.5.1
SLEEP MODE
In Sleep mode, the clock to the CPU and peripherals is
shut down. If an on-chip oscillator is being used, it is
shut down.
The Fail-Safe Clock Monitor is not functional during
Sleep, since there is no clock to monitor. However, the
LPRC clock remains active if WDT is operational during
Sleep.
The brown-out protection circuit and the Low-Voltage
Detect (LVD) circuit, if enabled, will remain functional
during Sleep.
The processor wakes up from Sleep if at least one of
the following conditions has occurred:
• any interrupt that is individually enabled and
meets the required priority level
• any Reset (POR, BOR and MCLR)
• WDT time-out
On waking up from Sleep mode, the processor will
restart the same clock that was active prior to entry
into Sleep mode. When clock switching is enabled,
bits, COSC<1:0>, will determine the oscillator source
that will be used on wake-up. If clock switch is
disabled, then there is only one system clock.
Note:
If a POR or BOR occurred, the selection of
the oscillator is based on the FOS<1:0>
and FPR<3:0> Configuration bits.
If the clock source is an oscillator, the clock to the
device will be held off until OST times out (indicating a
stable oscillator). If PLL is used, the system clock is
held off until LOCK = 1 (indicating that the PLL is
stable). In either case, TPOR, TLOCK and TPWRT delays
are applied.
If EC, FRC, LPRC or EXTRC oscillators are used, then
a delay of TPOR (~ 10 μs) is applied. This is the smallest
delay possible on wake-up from Sleep.
Moreover, if the LP oscillator was active during Sleep,
and LP is the oscillator used on wake-up, then the startup delay will be equal to TPOR. PWRT delay and OST
timer delay are not applied. In order to have the smallest possible start-up delay when waking up from Sleep,
one of these faster wake-up options should be selected
before entering Sleep.
DS70141E-page 147
dsPIC30F3010/3011
Any interrupt that is individually enabled (using the
corresponding IE bit) and meets the prevailing priority
level will be able to wake-up the processor. The processor will process the interrupt and branch to the ISR.
The SLEEP status bit in RCON register is set upon
wake-up.
Note:
In spite of various delays applied (TPOR,
TLOCK and TPWRT), the crystal oscillator
(and PLL) may not be active at the end of
the time-out (e.g., for low-frequency crystals). In such cases, if FSCM is enabled,
then the device will detect this as a clock
failure and process the clock failure trap,
the FRC oscillator will be enabled, and the
user will have to re-enable the crystal
oscillator. If FSCM is not enabled, then the
device will simply suspend execution of
code until the clock is stable, and will
remain in Sleep until the oscillator clock
has started.
All Resets will wake-up the processor from Sleep
mode. Any Reset, other than POR, will set the SLEEP
status bit. In a POR, the SLEEP bit is cleared.
If the Watchdog Timer is enabled, then the processor
will wake-up from Sleep mode upon WDT time-out. The
SLEEP and WDTO status bits are both set.
20.5.2
IDLE MODE
In Idle mode, the clock to the CPU is shut down while
peripherals keep running. Unlike Sleep mode, the clock
source remains active.
Any interrupt that is individually enabled (using the IE
bit) and meets the prevailing priority level will be able to
wake-up the processor. The processor will process the
interrupt and branch to the ISR. The IDLE status bit in
the RCON register is set upon wake-up.
Any Reset, other than POR, will set the IDLE status bit.
On a POR, the IDLE bit is cleared.
If the Watchdog Timer is enabled, then the processor
will wake-up from Idle mode upon WDT time-out. The
IDLE and WDTO status bits are both set.
Unlike wake-up from Sleep, there are no time delays
involved in wake-up from Idle.
20.6
Device Configuration Registers
The Configuration bits in each device Configuration
register specify some of the device modes and are programmed by a device programmer, or by using the
In-Circuit Serial Programming (ICSP) feature of the
device. Each device Configuration register is a 24-bit
register, but only the lower 16 bits of each register are
used to hold configuration data. There are four device
Configuration registers available to the user:
1.
2.
3.
4.
FOSC (0xF80000): Oscillator Configuration
register
FWDT (0xF80002): Watchdog Timer
Configuration register
FBORPOR (0xF80004): BOR and POR
Configuration register
FGS (0xF8000A): General Code Segment
Configuration register
FICD (0xF8000C): Fuse Configuration
Register
Several peripherals have a control bit in each module
that allows them to operate during Idle.
5.
The LPRC fail-safe clock remains active if clock failure
detect is enabled.
The placement of the Configuration bits is
automatically handled when you select the device in
your device programmer. The desired state of the
Configuration bits may be specified in the source code
(dependent on the language tool used), or through the
programming interface. After the device has been
programmed, the application software may read the
Configuration bit values through the table read
instructions. For additional information, please refer to
the programming specifications of the device.
The processor wakes up from Idle if at least one of the
following conditions is true:
• on any interrupt that is individually enabled (IE bit
is ‘1’) and meets the required priority level
• on any Reset (POR, BOR, MCLR)
• on WDT time-out
Upon wake-up from Idle mode, the clock is re-applied
to the CPU and instruction execution begins
immediately, starting with the instruction following the
PWRSAV instruction.
DS70141E-page 148
Note:
If the code protection Configuration bits
(FGS<GCP> and FGS<GWRP>) have
been programmed, an erase of the entire
code-protected device is only possible at
voltages VDD ≥ 4.5V.
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
dsPIC30F3010/3011
20.7
In-Circuit Debugger
When MPLAB® ICD 2 is selected as a debugger, the
in-circuit debugging functionality is enabled. This function allows simple debugging functions when used with
MPLAB IDE. When the device has this feature enabled,
some of the resources are not available for general
use. These resources include the first 80 bytes of data
RAM and two I/O pins.
One of four pairs of debug I/O pins may be selected by
the user using configuration options in MPLAB IDE.
These pin pairs are named EMUD/EMUC, EMUD1/
EMUC1, EMUD2/EMUC2 and EMUD3/EMUC3.
In each case, the selected EMUD pin is the Emulation/
Debug Data line, and the EMUC pin is the Emulation/
Debug Clock line. These pins will interface to the
MPLAB ICD 2 module available from Microchip. The
selected pair of debug I/O pins is used by MPLAB
ICD 2 to send commands and receive responses, as
well as to send and receive data. To use the in-circuit
debugger function of the device, the design must implement ICSP connections to MCLR, VDD, VSS, PGC,
PGD and the selected EMUDx/EMUCx pin pair.
This gives rise to two possibilities:
1.
2.
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
If EMUD/EMUC is selected as the debug I/O pin
pair, then only a 5-pin interface is required, as
the EMUD and EMUC pin functions are multiplexed with the PGD and PGC pin functions in
all dsPIC30F devices.
If EMUD1/EMUC1, EMUD2/EMUC2 or EMUD3/
EMUC3 is selected as the debug I/O pin pair,
then a 7-pin interface is required, as the
EMUDx/EMUCx pin functions (x = 1, 2 or 3) are
not multiplexed with the PGD and PGC pin
functions.
DS70141E-page 149
Bit 13
DS70141E-page 150
—
—
—
—
F8000C
FICD
—
—
—
MCLREN
FWDTEN
—
—
Bit 14
—
—
—
—
FCKSM<1:0>
Bit 15
—
—
—
—
—
Bit 13
—
—
—
—
—
Bit 12
—
—
—
—
—
Bit 11
—
—
PWMPIN
—
Bit 10
—
Bit 9
—
—
HPOL
—
Bit 5
—
—
LPOL
—
Bit 8
—
LOCK
SWDTEN
FOS<2:0>
—
— = unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’
Refer to “dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual” (DS70046) for descriptions of register bit fields.
The FGS<2> bit is a read-only copy of the GCP bit (FGS<1>).
F80004
F8000A
FBORPOR
F80002
FGS
—
F80000
FOSC
FWDT
—
Bits 23-16
Legend:
Note 1:
2:
—
DEVICE CONFIGURATION REGISTER MAP(1)
Addr.
File Name
TABLE 20-8:
—
Refer to “dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual “(DS70046) for descriptions of register bit fields.
—
SWR
Bit 6
POST<1:0>
EXTR
Bit 7
Note 1:
—
—
NOSC<1:0>
—
Bit 8
0744
—
—
Bit 9
— = unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’
—
—
—
COSC<1:0>
Bit 10
Legend:
—
Bit 11
Bit 12
OSCTUN
—
0742
Bit 14
0740 TRAPR IOPUWR BGST
Bit 15
OSCCON
Addr.
SYSTEM INTEGRATION REGISTER MAP(1)
RCON
SFR
Name
TABLE 20-7:
BKBUG
—
Bit 3
COE
—
—
—
—
Bit 6
CF
SLEEP
BOREN
—
—
Bit 7
—
—
WDTO
Bit 4
—
Bit 4
—
—
—
—
BORV<1:0>
FWPSA<1:0>
—
POR
Bit 0
Depends on type of Reset.
Reset State
—
—
—
Bit 3
Bit 1
—
Reserved(2)
—
Bit 0
GWRP
ICS<1:0>
GCP
FPWRT<1:0>
FWPSB<3:0>
FPR<3:0>
Bit 2
LPOSCEN OSWEN Depends on Configuration bits.
BOR
Bit 1
TUN<3:0>
Bit 5
—
IDLE
Bit 2
dsPIC30F3010/3011
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
dsPIC30F3010/3011
21.0
Note:
INSTRUCTION SET SUMMARY
This data sheet summarizes features of
this group of dsPIC30F devices and is not
intended to be a complete reference
source. For more information on the CPU,
peripherals, register descriptions and general device functionality, refer to the
“dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual”
(DS70046). For more information on the
device instruction set and programming,
refer to the “dsPIC30F/33F Programmer’s
Reference Manual” (DS70157).
The dsPIC30F instruction set adds many
enhancements to the previous PIC® microcontroller
(MCU) instruction sets, while maintaining an easy
migration from PIC MCU instruction sets.
Most instructions are a single program memory word
(24 bits). Only three instructions require two program
memory locations.
Most bit-oriented instructions (including simple rotate/
shift instructions) have two operands:
• The W register (with or without an address modifier) or File register (specified by the value of ‘Ws’
or ‘f’)
• The bit in the W register or File register
(specified by a literal value, or indirectly by the
contents of register ‘Wb’)
The literal instructions that involve data movement may
use some of the following operands:
• A literal value to be loaded into a W register or
File register (specified by the value of ‘k’)
• The W register or File register where the literal
value is to be loaded (specified by ‘Wb’ or ‘f’)
However, literal instructions that involve arithmetic or
logical operations use some of the following operands:
Each single-word instruction is a 24-bit word divided
into an 8-bit opcode which specifies the instruction
type, and one or more operands which further specify
the operation of the instruction.
• The first source operand, which is a register ‘Wb’
without any address modifier
• The second source operand, which is a literal
value
• The destination of the result (only if not the same
as the first source operand), which is typically a
register ‘Wd’ with or without an address modifier
The instruction set is highly orthogonal and is grouped
into five basic categories:
The MAC class of DSP instructions may use some of the
following operands:
•
•
•
•
•
• The accumulator (A or B) to be used (required
operand)
• The W registers to be used as the two operands
• The X and Y address space prefetch operations
• The X and Y address space prefetch destinations
• The accumulator write-back destination
Word or byte-oriented operations
Bit-oriented operations
Literal operations
DSP operations
Control operations
Table 21-1 shows the general symbols used in
describing the instructions.
The dsPIC30F instruction set summary in Table 21-2
lists all the instructions along with the status flags
affected by each instruction.
Most word or byte-oriented W register instructions
(including barrel shift instructions) have three
operands:
• The first source operand, which is typically a
register ‘Wb’ without any address modifier
• The second source operand, which is typically a
register ‘Ws’ with or without an address modifier
• The destination of the result, which is typically a
register ‘Wd’ with or without an address modifier
However, word or byte-oriented file register instructions
have two operands:
• The File register specified by the value ‘f’
• The destination, which could either be the File
register ‘f’ or the W0 register, which is denoted as
‘WREG’
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
The other DSP instructions do not involve any
multiplication, and may include:
• The accumulator to be used (required)
• The source or destination operand (designated as
Wso or Wdo, respectively) with or without an
address modifier
• The amount of shift, specified by a W register ‘Wn’
or a literal value
The control instructions may use some of the following
operands:
• A program memory address
• The mode of the table read and table write
instructions
All instructions are a single word, except for certain
double-word instructions, which were made doubleword instructions so that all the required information is
available in these 48 bits. In the second word, the
8 MSbs are ‘0’s. If this second word is executed as an
instruction (by itself), it will execute as a NOP.
DS70141E-page 151
dsPIC30F3010/3011
Most single-word instructions are executed in a single
instruction cycle, unless a conditional test is true or the
program counter is changed as a result of the instruction. In these cases, the execution takes two instruction
cycles with the additional instruction cycle(s) executed
as a NOP. Notable exceptions are the BRA (unconditional/computed branch), indirect CALL/GOTO, all table
reads and writes and RETURN/RETFIE instructions,
which are single-word instructions, but take two or
three cycles. Certain instructions that involve skipping
TABLE 21-1:
over the subsequent instruction, require either two or
three cycles if the skip is performed, depending on
whether the instruction being skipped is a single-word
or two-word instruction. Moreover, double-word moves
require two cycles. The double-word instructions
execute in two instruction cycles.
Note:
For more details on the instruction set,
refer to the “dsPIC30F/33F Programmer’s
Reference Manual” (DS70157).
SYMBOLS USED IN OPCODE DESCRIPTIONS
Field
#text
(text)
[text]
{ }
<n:m>
.b
.d
.S
.w
Acc
AWB
bit4
C, DC, N, OV, Z
Expr
f
lit1
lit4
lit5
lit8
lit10
lit14
lit16
lit23
None
OA, OB, SA, SB
PC
Slit10
Slit16
Slit6
DS70141E-page 152
Description
Means literal defined by “text“
Means “content of text“
Means “the location addressed by text”
Optional field or operation
Register bit field
Byte mode selection
Double-Word mode selection
Shadow register select
Word mode selection (default)
One of two accumulators {A, B}
Accumulator Write-Back Destination Address register ∈ {W13, [W13] + = 2}
4-bit bit selection field (used in word addressed instructions) ∈ {0...15}
MCU Status bits: Carry, Digit Carry, Negative, Overflow, Zero
Absolute address, label or expression (resolved by the linker)
File register address ∈ {0x0000...0x1FFF}
1-bit unsigned literal ∈ {0,1}
4-bit unsigned literal ∈ {0...15}
5-bit unsigned literal ∈ {0...31}
8-bit unsigned literal ∈ {0...255}
10-bit unsigned literal ∈ {0...255} for Byte mode, {0:1023} for Word mode
14-bit unsigned literal ∈ {0...16384}
16-bit unsigned literal ∈ {0...65535}
23-bit unsigned literal ∈ {0...8388608}; LSB must be ‘0’
Field does not require an entry, may be blank
DSP status bits: ACCA Overflow, ACCB Overflow, ACCA Saturate, ACCB Saturate
Program Counter
10-bit signed literal ∈ {-512...511}
16-bit signed literal ∈ {-32768...32767}
6-bit signed literal ∈ {-16...16}
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
dsPIC30F3010/3011
TABLE 21-1:
SYMBOLS USED IN OPCODE DESCRIPTIONS (CONTINUED)
Field
Wb
Wd
Wdo
Wm,Wn
Wm*Wm
Wm*Wn
Wn
Wnd
Wns
WREG
Ws
Wso
Wx
Wxd
Wy
Wyd
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
Description
Base W register ∈ {W0..W15}
Destination W register ∈ { Wd, [Wd], [Wd++], [Wd--], [++Wd], [--Wd] }
Destination W register ∈
{ Wnd, [Wnd], [Wnd++], [Wnd--], [++Wnd], [--Wnd], [Wnd+Wb] }
Dividend, Divisor Working register pair (direct addressing)
Multiplicand and Multiplier working register pair for Square instructions ∈
{W4*W4,W5*W5,W6*W6,W7*W7}
Multiplicand and Multiplier working register pair for DSP instructions ∈
{W4*W5,W4*W6,W4*W7,W5*W6,W5*W7,W6*W7}
One of 16 working registers ∈ {W0..W15}
One of 16 destination working registers ∈ {W0..W15}
One of 16 source working registers ∈ {W0..W15}
W0 (working register used in File register instructions)
Source W register ∈ { Ws, [Ws], [Ws++], [Ws--], [++Ws], [--Ws] }
Source W register ∈
{ Wns, [Wns], [Wns++], [Wns--], [++Wns], [--Wns], [Wns+Wb] }
X data space Prefetch Address register for DSP instructions
∈ {[W8]+=6, [W8]+=4, [W8]+=2, [W8], [W8]-=6, [W8]-=4, [W8]-=2,
[W9]+=6, [W9]+=4, [W9]+=2, [W9], [W9]-=6, [W9]-=4, [W9]-=2,
[W9+W12],none}
X data space Prefetch Destination register for DSP instructions ∈ {W4..W7}
Y data space Prefetch Address register for DSP instructions
∈ {[W10]+=6, [W10]+=4, [W10]+=2, [W10], [W10]-=6, [W10]-=4, [W10]-=2,
[W11]+=6, [W11]+=4, [W11]+=2, [W11], [W11]-=6, [W11]-=4, [W11]-=2,
[W11+W12], none}
Y data space Prefetch Destination register for DSP instructions ∈ {W4..W7}
DS70141E-page 153
dsPIC30F3010/3011
TABLE 21-2:
Base
Instr
#
Assembly
Mnemonic
1
ADD
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
ADDC
AND
ASR
BCLR
BRA
BSET
BSW
BTG
INSTRUCTION SET OVERVIEW
Assembly Syntax
# of
words
Description
# of
cycle
s
Status Flags
Affected
ADD
Acc
Add Accumulators
1
1
OA,OB,SA,SB
ADD
f
f = f + WREG
1
1
C,DC,N,OV,Z
ADD
f,WREG
WREG = f + WREG
1
1
C,DC,N,OV,Z
ADD
#lit10,Wn
Wd = lit10 + Wd
1
1
C,DC,N,OV,Z
ADD
Wb,Ws,Wd
Wd = Wb + Ws
1
1
C,DC,N,OV,Z
ADD
Wb,#lit5,Wd
Wd = Wb + lit5
1
1
C,DC,N,OV,Z
ADD
Wso,#Slit4,Acc
16-bit Signed Add to Accumulator
1
1
OA,OB,SA,SB
ADDC
f
f = f + WREG + (C)
1
1
C,DC,N,OV,Z
ADDC
f,WREG
WREG = f + WREG + (C)
1
1
C,DC,N,OV,Z
ADDC
#lit10,Wn
Wd = lit10 + Wd + (C)
1
1
C,DC,N,OV,Z
ADDC
Wb,Ws,Wd
Wd = Wb + Ws + (C)
1
1
C,DC,N,OV,Z
ADDC
Wb,#lit5,Wd
Wd = Wb + lit5 + (C)
1
1
C,DC,N,OV,Z
AND
f
f = f .AND. WREG
1
1
N,Z
AND
f,WREG
WREG = f .AND. WREG
1
1
N,Z
AND
#lit10,Wn
Wd = lit10 .AND. Wd
1
1
N,Z
AND
Wb,Ws,Wd
Wd = Wb .AND. Ws
1
1
N,Z
AND
Wb,#lit5,Wd
Wd = Wb .AND. lit5
1
1
N,Z
ASR
f
f = Arithmetic Right Shift f
1
1
C,N,OV,Z
ASR
f,WREG
WREG = Arithmetic Right Shift f
1
1
C,N,OV,Z
ASR
Ws,Wd
Wd = Arithmetic Right Shift Ws
1
1
C,N,OV,Z
ASR
Wb,Wns,Wnd
Wnd = Arithmetic Right Shift Wb by Wns
1
1
N,Z
ASR
Wb,#lit5,Wnd
Wnd = Arithmetic Right Shift Wb by lit5
1
1
N,Z
BCLR
f,#bit4
Bit Clear f
1
1
None
BCLR
Ws,#bit4
Bit Clear Ws
1
1
None
BRA
C,Expr
Branch if Carry
1
1 (2)
None
BRA
GE,Expr
Branch if Greater than or Equal
1
1 (2)
None
BRA
GEU,Expr
Branch if Unsigned Greater than or Equal
1
1 (2)
None
BRA
GT,Expr
Branch if Greater than
1
1 (2)
None
BRA
GTU,Expr
Branch if Unsigned Greater than
1
1 (2)
None
BRA
LE,Expr
Branch if Less than or Equal
1
1 (2)
None
BRA
LEU,Expr
Branch if Unsigned Less than or Equal
1
1 (2)
None
BRA
LT,Expr
Branch if Less than
1
1 (2)
None
BRA
LTU,Expr
Branch if Unsigned Less than
1
1 (2)
None
BRA
N,Expr
Branch if Negative
1
1 (2)
None
BRA
NC,Expr
Branch if Not Carry
1
1 (2)
None
BRA
NN,Expr
Branch if Not Negative
1
1 (2)
None
BRA
NOV,Expr
Branch if Not Overflow
1
1 (2)
None
BRA
NZ,Expr
Branch if Not Zero
1
1 (2)
None
BRA
OA,Expr
Branch if Accumulator A Overflow
1
1 (2)
None
BRA
OB,Expr
Branch if Accumulator B Overflow
1
1 (2)
None
BRA
OV,Expr
Branch if Overflow
1
1 (2)
None
BRA
SA,Expr
Branch if Accumulator A Saturated
1
1 (2)
None
BRA
SB,Expr
Branch if Accumulator B Saturated
1
1 (2)
None
BRA
Expr
Branch Unconditionally
1
2
None
BRA
Z,Expr
Branch if Zero
1
1 (2)
None
BRA
Wn
Computed Branch
1
2
None
BSET
f,#bit4
Bit Set f
1
1
None
BSET
Ws,#bit4
Bit Set Ws
1
1
None
BSW.C
Ws,Wb
Write C bit to Ws<Wb>
1
1
None
BSW.Z
Ws,Wb
Write Z bit to Ws<Wb>
1
1
None
BTG
f,#bit4
Bit Toggle f
1
1
None
BTG
Ws,#bit4
Bit Toggle Ws
1
1
None
DS70141E-page 154
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
dsPIC30F3010/3011
TABLE 21-2:
Base
Instr
#
Assembly
Mnemonic
10
BTSC
11
12
13
14
15
BTSS
BTST
BTSTS
CALL
CLR
INSTRUCTION SET OVERVIEW (CONTINUED)
Assembly Syntax
Description
# of
words
# of
cycle
s
Status Flags
Affected
BTSC
f,#bit4
Bit Test f, Skip if Clear
1
1
(2 or
3)
None
BTSC
Ws,#bit4
Bit Test Ws, Skip if Clear
1
1
(2 or
3)
None
BTSS
f,#bit4
Bit Test f, Skip if Set
1
1
(2 or
3)
None
BTSS
Ws,#bit4
Bit Test Ws, Skip if Set
1
1
(2 or
3)
None
BTST
f,#bit4
Bit Test f
1
1
Z
BTST.C
Ws,#bit4
Bit Test Ws to C
1
1
C
BTST.Z
Ws,#bit4
Bit Test Ws to Z
1
1
Z
BTST.C
Ws,Wb
Bit Test Ws<Wb> to C
1
1
C
BTST.Z
Ws,Wb
Bit Test Ws<Wb> to Z
1
1
Z
BTSTS
f,#bit4
Bit Test then Set f
1
1
Z
BTSTS.C
Ws,#bit4
Bit Test Ws to C, then Set
1
1
C
BTSTS.Z
Ws,#bit4
Bit Test Ws to Z, then Set
1
1
Z
CALL
lit23
Call Subroutine
2
2
None
CALL
Wn
Call Indirect Subroutine
1
2
None
CLR
f
f = 0x0000
1
1
None
CLR
WREG
WREG = 0x0000
1
1
None
CLR
Ws
Ws = 0x0000
1
1
None
CLR
Acc,Wx,Wxd,Wy,Wyd,AWB
Clear Accumulator
1
1
OA,OB,SA,SB
Clear Watchdog Timer
1
1
WDTO,Sleep
16
CLRWDT
CLRWDT
17
COM
COM
f
f=f
1
1
N,Z
COM
f,WREG
WREG = f
1
1
N,Z
COM
Ws,Wd
Wd = Ws
1
1
N,Z
CP
f
Compare f with WREG
1
1
C,DC,N,OV,Z
CP
Wb,#lit5
Compare Wb with lit5
1
1
C,DC,N,OV,Z
CP
Wb,Ws
Compare Wb with Ws (Wb – Ws)
1
1
C,DC,N,OV,Z
f
Compare f with 0x0000
1
1
C,DC,N,OV,Z
18
CP
19
CP0
CP0
CP0
Ws
Compare Ws with 0x0000
1
1
C,DC,N,OV,Z
20
CPB
CPB
f
Compare f with WREG, with Borrow
1
1
C,DC,N,OV,Z
CPB
Wb,#lit5
Compare Wb with lit5, with Borrow
1
1
C,DC,N,OV,Z
CPB
Wb,Ws
Compare Wb with Ws, with Borrow
(Wb – Ws – C)
1
1
C,DC,N,OV,Z
21
CPSEQ
CPSEQ
Wb, Wn
Compare Wb with Wn, Skip if =
1
1
(2 or
3)
None
22
CPSGT
CPSGT
Wb, Wn
Compare Wb with Wn, Skip if >
1
1
(2 or
3)
None
23
CPSLT
CPSLT
Wb, Wn
Compare Wb with Wn, Skip if <
1
1
(2 or
3)
None
24
CPSNE
CPSNE
Wb, Wn
Compare Wb with Wn, Skip if ≠
1
1
(2 or
3)
None
25
DAW
DAW
Wn
Wn = Decimal Adjust Wn
1
1
C
26
DEC
DEC
f
f=f–1
1
1
C,DC,N,OV,Z
DEC
f,WREG
WREG = f –1
1
1
C,DC,N,OV,Z
DEC
Ws,Wd
Wd = Ws – 1
1
1
C,DC,N,OV,Z
DEC2
f
f=f–2
1
1
C,DC,N,OV,Z
DEC2
f,WREG
WREG = f – 2
1
1
C,DC,N,OV,Z
DEC2
Ws,Wd
Wd = Ws – 2
1
1
C,DC,N,OV,Z
DISI
#lit14
Disable Interrupts for k Instruction Cycles
1
1
None
27
28
DEC2
DISI
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70141E-page 155
dsPIC30F3010/3011
TABLE 21-2:
Base
Instr
#
Assembly
Mnemonic
29
DIV
INSTRUCTION SET OVERVIEW (CONTINUED)
Assembly Syntax
Description
# of
words
# of
cycle
s
Status Flags
Affected
DIV.S
Wm,Wn
Signed 16/16-bit Integer Divide
1
18
DIV.SD
Wm,Wn
Signed 32/16-bit Integer Divide
1
18
N,Z,C, OV
N,Z,C, OV
DIV.U
Wm,Wn
Unsigned 16/16-bit Integer Divide
1
18
N,Z,C, OV
DIV.UD
Wm,Wn
N,Z,C, OV
Unsigned 32/16-bit Integer Divide
1
18
Signed 16/16-bit Fractional Divide
1
18
N,Z,C, OV
Do Code to PC+Expr, lit14 + 1 Times
2
2
None
Wn,Expr
Do Code to PC+Expr, (Wn) + 1 Times
2
2
None
Wm*Wm,Acc,Wx,Wy,Wxd
Euclidean Distance (no accumulate)
1
1
OA,OB,OAB,
SA,SB,SAB
Euclidean Distance
1
1
OA,OB,OAB,
SA,SB,SAB
30
DIVF
DIVF
31
DO
DO
DO
32
ED
ED
33
EDAC
EDAC
Wm*Wm,Acc,Wx,Wy,Wxd
Wm,Wn
#lit14,Expr
34
EXCH
EXCH
Wns,Wnd
Swap Wns with Wnd
1
1
None
35
FBCL
FBCL
Ws,Wnd
Find Bit Change from Left (MSb) Side
1
1
C
36
FF1L
FF1L
Ws,Wnd
Find First One from Left (MSb) Side
1
1
C
37
FF1R
FF1R
Ws,Wnd
Find First One from Right (LSb) Side
1
1
C
38
GOTO
GOTO
Expr
Go to Address
2
2
None
GOTO
Wn
Go to Indirect
1
2
None
INC
f
f=f+1
1
1
C,DC,N,OV,Z
INC
f,WREG
WREG = f + 1
1
1
C,DC,N,OV,Z
INC
Ws,Wd
Wd = Ws + 1
1
1
C,DC,N,OV,Z
INC2
f
f=f+2
1
1
C,DC,N,OV,Z
INC2
f,WREG
WREG = f + 2
1
1
C,DC,N,OV,Z
C,DC,N,OV,Z
39
40
41
42
INC
INC2
IOR
LAC
INC2
Ws,Wd
Wd = Ws + 2
1
1
IOR
f
f = f .IOR. WREG
1
1
N,Z
IOR
f,WREG
WREG = f .IOR. WREG
1
1
N,Z
IOR
#lit10,Wn
Wd = lit10 .IOR. Wd
1
1
N,Z
IOR
Wb,Ws,Wd
Wd = Wb .IOR. Ws
1
1
N,Z
IOR
Wb,#lit5,Wd
Wd = Wb .IOR. lit5
1
1
N,Z
LAC
Wso,#Slit4,Acc
Load Accumulator
1
1
OA,OB,OAB,
SA,SB,SAB
43
LNK
LNK
#lit14
Link Frame Pointer
1
1
None
44
LSR
LSR
f
f = Logical Right Shift f
1
1
C,N,OV,Z
LSR
f,WREG
WREG = Logical Right Shift f
1
1
C,N,OV,Z
LSR
Ws,Wd
Wd = Logical Right Shift Ws
1
1
C,N,OV,Z
LSR
Wb,Wns,Wnd
Wnd = Logical Right Shift Wb by Wns
1
1
N,Z
LSR
Wb,#lit5,Wnd
Wnd = Logical Right Shift Wb by lit5
1
1
N,Z
MAC
Wm*Wn,Acc,Wx,Wxd,Wy,Wyd,
AWB
Multiply and Accumulate
1
1
OA,OB,OAB,
SA,SB,SAB
MAC
Wm*Wm,Acc,Wx,Wxd,Wy,Wyd
Square and Accumulate
1
1
OA,OB,OAB,
SA,SB,SAB
MOV
f,Wn
Move f to Wn
1
1
None
MOV
f
Move f to f
1
1
N,Z
MOV
f,WREG
Move f to WREG
1
1
N,Z
MOV
#lit16,Wn
Move 16-bit Literal to Wn
1
1
None
MOV.b
#lit8,Wn
Move 8-bit Literal to Wn
1
1
None
MOV
Wn,f
Move Wn to f
1
1
None
MOV
Wso,Wdo
Move Ws to Wd
1
1
None
MOV
WREG,f
Move WREG to f
1
1
N,Z
None
45
46
MAC
MOV
MOV.D
Wns,Wd
Move Double from W(ns):W(ns + 1) to Wd
1
2
MOV.D
Ws,Wnd
Move Double from Ws to W(nd + 1):W(nd)
1
2
None
Prefetch and Store Accumulator
1
1
None
47
MOVSAC
MOVSAC
48
MPY
MPY
Wm*Wn,Acc,Wx,Wxd,Wy,Wyd
Multiply Wm by Wn to Accumulator
1
1
OA,OB,OAB,
SA,SB,SAB
MPY
Wm*Wm,Acc,Wx,Wxd,Wy,Wyd
Square Wm to Accumulator
1
1
OA,OB,OAB,
SA,SB,SAB
49
MPY.N
MPY.N
50
MSC
MSC
DS70141E-page 156
Acc,Wx,Wxd,Wy,Wyd,AWB
Wm*Wn,Acc,Wx,Wxd,Wy,Wyd -(Multiply Wm by Wn) to Accumulator
Wm*Wm,Acc,Wx,Wxd,Wy,Wyd,
AWB
Multiply and Subtract from Accumulator
1
1
None
1
1
OA,OB,OAB,
SA,SB,SAB
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
dsPIC30F3010/3011
TABLE 21-2:
Base
Instr
#
Assembly
Mnemonic
51
MUL
52
53
54
NEG
NOP
POP
INSTRUCTION SET OVERVIEW (CONTINUED)
Assembly Syntax
PUSH
# of
words
# of
cycle
s
Status Flags
Affected
MUL.SS
Wb,Ws,Wnd
{Wnd+1, Wnd} = signed(Wb) * signed(Ws)
1
1
None
MUL.SU
Wb,Ws,Wnd
{Wnd+1, Wnd} = signed(Wb) * unsigned(Ws)
1
1
None
MUL.US
Wb,Ws,Wnd
{Wnd+1, Wnd} = unsigned(Wb) * signed(Ws)
1
1
None
MUL.UU
Wb,Ws,Wnd
{Wnd+1, Wnd} = unsigned(Wb) *
unsigned(Ws)
1
1
None
MUL.SU
Wb,#lit5,Wnd
{Wnd+1, Wnd} = signed(Wb) * unsigned(lit5)
1
1
None
MUL.UU
Wb,#lit5,Wnd
{Wnd+1, Wnd} = unsigned(Wb) *
unsigned(lit5)
1
1
None
MUL
f
W3:W2 = f * WREG
1
1
None
NEG
Acc
Negate Accumulator
1
1
OA,OB,OAB,
SA,SB,SAB
NEG
f
f=f+1
1
1
C,DC,N,OV,Z
NEG
f,WREG
WREG = f + 1
1
1
C,DC,N,OV,Z
NEG
Ws,Wd
Wd = Ws + 1
1
1
C,DC,N,OV,Z
NOP
No Operation
1
1
None
NOPR
No Operation
1
1
None
None
POP
f
Pop f from Top-of-Stack (TOS)
1
1
POP
Wdo
Pop from Top-of-Stack (TOS) to Wdo
1
1
None
POP.D
Wnd
Pop from Top-of-Stack (TOS) to
W(nd):W(nd + 1)
1
2
None
Pop Shadow Registers
1
1
All
PUSH
f
Push f to Top-of-Stack (TOS)
1
1
None
PUSH
Wso
Push Wso to Top-of-Stack (TOS)
1
1
None
PUSH.D
Wns
Push W(ns):W(ns + 1) to Top-of-Stack (TOS)
1
2
None
Push Shadow Registers
1
1
None
WDTO,Sleep
POP.S
55
Description
PUSH.S
56
PWRSAV
PWRSAV
Go into Sleep or Idle mode
1
1
57
RCALL
RCALL
Expr
Relative Call
1
2
None
RCALL
Wn
Computed Call
1
2
None
REPEAT
#lit14
Repeat Next Instruction lit14 + 1 Times
1
1
None
REPEAT
Wn
Repeat Next Instruction (Wn) + 1 Times
1
1
None
Software Device Reset
1
1
None
58
59
REPEAT
RESET
RESET
60
RETFIE
RETFIE
61
RETLW
RETLW
62
RETURN
RETURN
63
RLC
64
65
66
67
RLNC
RRC
RRNC
SAC
#lit1
Return from Interrupt
1
3 (2)
None
#lit10,Wn
Return with Literal in Wn
1
3 (2)
None
Return from Subroutine
1
3 (2)
None
RLC
f
f = Rotate Left through Carry f
1
1
C,N,Z
RLC
f,WREG
WREG = Rotate Left through Carry f
1
1
C,N,Z
RLC
Ws,Wd
Wd = Rotate Left through Carry Ws
1
1
C,N,Z
RLNC
f
f = Rotate Left (No Carry) f
1
1
N,Z
RLNC
f,WREG
WREG = Rotate Left (No Carry) f
1
1
N,Z
RLNC
Ws,Wd
Wd = Rotate Left (No Carry) Ws
1
1
N,Z
RRC
f
f = Rotate Right through Carry f
1
1
C,N,Z
RRC
f,WREG
WREG = Rotate Right through Carry f
1
1
C,N,Z
RRC
Ws,Wd
Wd = Rotate Right through Carry Ws
1
1
C,N,Z
RRNC
f
f = Rotate Right (No Carry) f
1
1
N,Z
RRNC
f,WREG
WREG = Rotate Right (No Carry) f
1
1
N,Z
RRNC
Ws,Wd
Wd = Rotate Right (No Carry) Ws
1
1
N,Z
SAC
Acc,#Slit4,Wdo
Store Accumulator
1
1
None
SAC.R
Acc,#Slit4,Wdo
Store Rounded Accumulator
1
1
None
C,N,Z
68
SE
SE
Ws,Wnd
Wnd = Sign-Extended Ws
1
1
69
SETM
SETM
f
f = 0xFFFF
1
1
None
SETM
WREG
WREG = 0xFFFF
1
1
None
70
SFTAC
SETM
Ws
Ws = 0xFFFF
1
1
None
SFTAC
Acc,Wn
Arithmetic Shift Accumulator by (Wn)
1
1
OA,OB,OAB,
SA,SB,SAB
SFTAC
Acc,#Slit6
Arithmetic Shift Accumulator by Slit6
1
1
OA,OB,OAB,
SA,SB,SAB
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70141E-page 157
dsPIC30F3010/3011
TABLE 21-2:
Base
Instr
#
Assembly
Mnemonic
71
SL
72
73
74
75
SUB
SUBB
SUBR
SUBBR
INSTRUCTION SET OVERVIEW (CONTINUED)
Assembly Syntax
Description
# of
words
# of
cycle
s
Status Flags
Affected
SL
f
f = Left Shift f
1
1
C,N,OV,Z
SL
f,WREG
WREG = Left Shift f
1
1
C,N,OV,Z
SL
Ws,Wd
Wd = Left Shift Ws
1
1
C,N,OV,Z
SL
Wb,Wns,Wnd
Wnd = Left Shift Wb by Wns
1
1
N,Z
SL
Wb,#lit5,Wnd
Wnd = Left Shift Wb by lit5
1
1
N,Z
SUB
Acc
Subtract Accumulators
1
1
OA,OB,OAB,
SA,SB,SAB
SUB
f
f = f – WREG
1
1
C,DC,N,OV,Z
SUB
f,WREG
WREG = f – WREG
1
1
C,DC,N,OV,Z
SUB
#lit10,Wn
Wn = Wn – lit10
1
1
C,DC,N,OV,Z
SUB
Wb,Ws,Wd
Wd = Wb – Ws
1
1
C,DC,N,OV,Z
SUB
Wb,#lit5,Wd
Wd = Wb – lit5
1
1
C,DC,N,OV,Z
SUBB
f
f = f – WREG – (C)
1
1
C,DC,N,OV,Z
SUBB
f,WREG
WREG = f – WREG – (C)
1
1
C,DC,N,OV,Z
SUBB
#lit10,Wn
Wn = Wn – lit10 – (C)
1
1
C,DC,N,OV,Z
SUBB
Wb,Ws,Wd
Wd = Wb – Ws – (C)
1
1
C,DC,N,OV,Z
SUBB
Wb,#lit5,Wd
Wd = Wb – lit5 – (C)
1
1
C,DC,N,OV,Z
SUBR
f
f = WREG – f
1
1
C,DC,N,OV,Z
SUBR
f,WREG
WREG = WREG – f
1
1
C,DC,N,OV,Z
SUBR
Wb,Ws,Wd
Wd = Ws – Wb
1
1
C,DC,N,OV,Z
SUBR
Wb,#lit5,Wd
Wd = lit5 – Wb
1
1
C,DC,N,OV,Z
SUBBR
f
f = WREG – f – (C)
1
1
C,DC,N,OV,Z
SUBBR
f,WREG
WREG = WREG – f – (C)
1
1
C,DC,N,OV,Z
SUBBR
Wb,Ws,Wd
Wd = Ws – Wb – (C)
1
1
C,DC,N,OV,Z
SUBBR
Wb,#lit5,Wd
Wd = lit5 – Wb – (C)
1
1
C,DC,N,OV,Z
Wn
Wn = Nibble Swap Wn
1
1
None
None
76
SWAP
SWAP.b
SWAP
Wn
Wn = Byte Swap Wn
1
1
77
TBLRDH
TBLRDH
Ws,Wd
Read Prog<23:16> to Wd<7:0>
1
2
None
78
TBLRDL
TBLRDL
Ws,Wd
Read Prog<15:0> to Wd
1
2
None
None
79
TBLWTH
TBLWTH
Ws,Wd
Write Ws<7:0> to Prog<23:16>
1
2
80
TBLWTL
TBLWTL
Ws,Wd
Write Ws to Prog<15:0>
1
2
None
81
ULNK
ULNK
Unlink Frame Pointer
1
1
None
82
XOR
XOR
f
f = f .XOR. WREG
1
1
N,Z
XOR
f,WREG
WREG = f .XOR. WREG
1
1
N,Z
XOR
#lit10,Wn
Wd = lit10 .XOR. Wd
1
1
N,Z
XOR
Wb,Ws,Wd
Wd = Wb .XOR. Ws
1
1
N,Z
XOR
Wb,#lit5,Wd
Wd = Wb .XOR. lit5
1
1
N,Z
ZE
Ws,Wnd
Wnd = Zero-Extend Ws
1
1
C,Z,N
83
ZE
DS70141E-page 158
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
dsPIC30F3010/3011
22.0
DEVELOPMENT SUPPORT
The PIC® microcontrollers are supported with a full
range of hardware and software development tools:
• Integrated Development Environment
- MPLAB® IDE Software
• Assemblers/Compilers/Linkers
- MPASMTM Assembler
- MPLAB C18 and MPLAB C30 C Compilers
- MPLINKTM Object Linker/
MPLIBTM Object Librarian
- MPLAB ASM30 Assembler/Linker/Library
• Simulators
- MPLAB SIM Software Simulator
• Emulators
- MPLAB ICE 2000 In-Circuit Emulator
- MPLAB REAL ICE™ In-Circuit Emulator
• In-Circuit Debugger
- MPLAB ICD 2
• Device Programmers
- PICSTART® Plus Development Programmer
- MPLAB PM3 Device Programmer
- PICkit™ 2 Development Programmer
• Low-Cost Demonstration and Development
Boards and Evaluation Kits
22.1
MPLAB Integrated Development
Environment Software
The MPLAB IDE software brings an ease of software
development previously unseen in the 8/16-bit microcontroller market. The MPLAB IDE is a Windows®
operating system-based application that contains:
• A single graphical interface to all debugging tools
- Simulator
- Programmer (sold separately)
- Emulator (sold separately)
- In-Circuit Debugger (sold separately)
• A full-featured editor with color-coded context
• A multiple project manager
• Customizable data windows with direct edit of
contents
• High-level source code debugging
• Visual device initializer for easy register
initialization
• Mouse over variable inspection
• Drag and drop variables from source to watch
windows
• Extensive on-line help
• Integration of select third party tools, such as
HI-TECH Software C Compilers and IAR
C Compilers
The MPLAB IDE allows you to:
• Edit your source files (either assembly or C)
• One touch assemble (or compile) and download
to PIC MCU emulator and simulator tools
(automatically updates all project information)
• Debug using:
- Source files (assembly or C)
- Mixed assembly and C
- Machine code
MPLAB IDE supports multiple debugging tools in a
single development paradigm, from the cost-effective
simulators, through low-cost in-circuit debuggers, to
full-featured emulators. This eliminates the learning
curve when upgrading to tools with increased flexibility
and power.
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70141E-page 159
dsPIC30F3010/3011
22.2
MPASM Assembler
The MPASM Assembler is a full-featured, universal
macro assembler for all PIC MCUs.
The MPASM Assembler generates relocatable object
files for the MPLINK Object Linker, Intel® standard HEX
files, MAP files to detail memory usage and symbol
reference, absolute LST files that contain source lines
and generated machine code and COFF files for
debugging.
The MPASM Assembler features include:
• Integration into MPLAB IDE projects
• User-defined macros to streamline
assembly code
• Conditional assembly for multi-purpose
source files
• Directives that allow complete control over the
assembly process
22.3
MPLAB C18 and MPLAB C30
C Compilers
The MPLAB C18 and MPLAB C30 Code Development
Systems are complete ANSI C compilers for
Microchip’s PIC18 and PIC24 families of microcontrollers and the dsPIC30 and dsPIC33 family of digital
signal controllers. These compilers provide powerful
integration capabilities, superior code optimization and
ease of use not found with other compilers.
For easy source level debugging, the compilers provide
symbol information that is optimized to the MPLAB IDE
debugger.
22.4
MPLINK Object Linker/
MPLIB Object Librarian
The MPLINK Object Linker combines relocatable
objects created by the MPASM Assembler and the
MPLAB C18 C Compiler. It can link relocatable objects
from precompiled libraries, using directives from a
linker script.
22.5
MPLAB ASM30 Assembler, Linker
and Librarian
MPLAB ASM30 Assembler produces relocatable
machine code from symbolic assembly language for
dsPIC30F devices. MPLAB C30 C Compiler uses the
assembler to produce its object file. The assembler
generates relocatable object files that can then be
archived or linked with other relocatable object files and
archives to create an executable file. Notable features
of the assembler include:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Support for the entire dsPIC30F instruction set
Support for fixed-point and floating-point data
Command line interface
Rich directive set
Flexible macro language
MPLAB IDE compatibility
22.6
MPLAB SIM Software Simulator
The MPLAB SIM Software Simulator allows code
development in a PC-hosted environment by simulating the PIC MCUs and dsPIC® DSCs on an instruction
level. On any given instruction, the data areas can be
examined or modified and stimuli can be applied from
a comprehensive stimulus controller. Registers can be
logged to files for further run-time analysis. The trace
buffer and logic analyzer display extend the power of
the simulator to record and track program execution,
actions on I/O, most peripherals and internal registers.
The MPLAB SIM Software Simulator fully supports
symbolic debugging using the MPLAB C18 and
MPLAB C30 C Compilers, and the MPASM and
MPLAB ASM30 Assemblers. The software simulator
offers the flexibility to develop and debug code outside
of the hardware laboratory environment, making it an
excellent, economical software development tool.
The MPLIB Object Librarian manages the creation and
modification of library files of precompiled code. When
a routine from a library is called from a source file, only
the modules that contain that routine will be linked in
with the application. This allows large libraries to be
used efficiently in many different applications.
The object linker/library features include:
• Efficient linking of single libraries instead of many
smaller files
• Enhanced code maintainability by grouping
related modules together
• Flexible creation of libraries with easy module
listing, replacement, deletion and extraction
DS70141E-page 160
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
dsPIC30F3010/3011
22.7
MPLAB ICE 2000
High-Performance
In-Circuit Emulator
The MPLAB ICE 2000 In-Circuit Emulator is intended
to provide the product development engineer with a
complete microcontroller design tool set for PIC
microcontrollers. Software control of the MPLAB ICE
2000 In-Circuit Emulator is advanced by the MPLAB
Integrated Development Environment, which allows
editing, building, downloading and source debugging
from a single environment.
The MPLAB ICE 2000 is a full-featured emulator
system with enhanced trace, trigger and data monitoring features. Interchangeable processor modules allow
the system to be easily reconfigured for emulation of
different processors. The architecture of the MPLAB
ICE 2000 In-Circuit Emulator allows expansion to
support new PIC microcontrollers.
The MPLAB ICE 2000 In-Circuit Emulator system has
been designed as a real-time emulation system with
advanced features that are typically found on more
expensive development tools. The PC platform and
Microsoft® Windows® 32-bit operating system were
chosen to best make these features available in a
simple, unified application.
22.8
MPLAB REAL ICE In-Circuit
Emulator System
MPLAB REAL ICE In-Circuit Emulator System is
Microchip’s next generation high-speed emulator for
Microchip Flash DSC and MCU devices. It debugs and
programs PIC® Flash MCUs and dsPIC® Flash DSCs
with the easy-to-use, powerful graphical user interface of
the MPLAB Integrated Development Environment (IDE),
included with each kit.
The MPLAB REAL ICE probe is connected to the design
engineer’s PC using a high-speed USB 2.0 interface and
is connected to the target with either a connector
compatible with the popular MPLAB ICD 2 system
(RJ11) or with the new high-speed, noise tolerant, LowVoltage Differential Signal (LVDS) interconnection
(CAT5).
22.9
MPLAB ICD 2 In-Circuit Debugger
Microchip’s In-Circuit Debugger, MPLAB ICD 2, is a
powerful, low-cost, run-time development tool,
connecting to the host PC via an RS-232 or high-speed
USB interface. This tool is based on the Flash PIC
MCUs and can be used to develop for these and other
PIC MCUs and dsPIC DSCs. The MPLAB ICD 2 utilizes
the in-circuit debugging capability built into the Flash
devices. This feature, along with Microchip’s In-Circuit
Serial ProgrammingTM (ICSPTM) protocol, offers costeffective, in-circuit Flash debugging from the graphical
user interface of the MPLAB Integrated Development
Environment. This enables a designer to develop and
debug source code by setting breakpoints, single stepping and watching variables, and CPU status and
peripheral registers. Running at full speed enables
testing hardware and applications in real time. MPLAB
ICD 2 also serves as a development programmer for
selected PIC devices.
22.10 MPLAB PM3 Device Programmer
The MPLAB PM3 Device Programmer is a universal,
CE compliant device programmer with programmable
voltage verification at VDDMIN and VDDMAX for
maximum reliability. It features a large LCD display
(128 x 64) for menus and error messages and a modular, detachable socket assembly to support various
package types. The ICSP™ cable assembly is included
as a standard item. In Stand-Alone mode, the MPLAB
PM3 Device Programmer can read, verify and program
PIC devices without a PC connection. It can also set
code protection in this mode. The MPLAB PM3
connects to the host PC via an RS-232 or USB cable.
The MPLAB PM3 has high-speed communications and
optimized algorithms for quick programming of large
memory devices and incorporates an SD/MMC card for
file storage and secure data applications.
MPLAB REAL ICE is field upgradeable through future
firmware downloads in MPLAB IDE. In upcoming
releases of MPLAB IDE, new devices will be supported, and new features will be added, such as software breakpoints and assembly code trace. MPLAB
REAL ICE offers significant advantages over competitive emulators including low-cost, full-speed emulation,
real-time variable watches, trace analysis, complex
breakpoints, a ruggedized probe interface and long (up
to three meters) interconnection cables.
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70141E-page 161
dsPIC30F3010/3011
22.11 PICSTART Plus Development
Programmer
22.13 Demonstration, Development and
Evaluation Boards
The PICSTART Plus Development Programmer is an
easy-to-use, low-cost, prototype programmer. It
connects to the PC via a COM (RS-232) port. MPLAB
Integrated Development Environment software makes
using the programmer simple and efficient. The
PICSTART Plus Development Programmer supports
most PIC devices in DIP packages up to 40 pins.
Larger pin count devices, such as the PIC16C92X and
PIC17C76X, may be supported with an adapter socket.
The PICSTART Plus Development Programmer is CE
compliant.
A wide variety of demonstration, development and
evaluation boards for various PIC MCUs and dsPIC
DSCs allows quick application development on fully functional systems. Most boards include prototyping areas for
adding custom circuitry and provide application firmware
and source code for examination and modification.
22.12 PICkit 2 Development Programmer
The PICkit™ 2 Development Programmer is a low-cost
programmer and selected Flash device debugger with
an easy-to-use interface for programming many of
Microchip’s baseline, mid-range and PIC18F families of
Flash memory microcontrollers. The PICkit 2 Starter Kit
includes a prototyping development board, twelve
sequential lessons, software and HI-TECH’s PICC™
Lite C compiler, and is designed to help get up to speed
quickly using PIC® microcontrollers. The kit provides
everything needed to program, evaluate and develop
applications using Microchip’s powerful, mid-range
Flash memory family of microcontrollers.
DS70141E-page 162
The boards support a variety of features, including LEDs,
temperature sensors, switches, speakers, RS-232
interfaces, LCD displays, potentiometers and additional
EEPROM memory.
The demonstration and development boards can be
used in teaching environments, for prototyping custom
circuits and for learning about various microcontroller
applications.
In addition to the PICDEM™ and dsPICDEM™ demonstration/development board series of circuits, Microchip
has a line of evaluation kits and demonstration software
for analog filter design, KEELOQ® security ICs, CAN,
IrDA®, PowerSmart battery management, SEEVAL®
evaluation system, Sigma-Delta ADC, flow rate
sensing, plus many more.
Check the Microchip web page (www.microchip.com)
for the complete list of demonstration, development
and evaluation kits.
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
dsPIC30F3010/3011
23.0
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
This section provides an overview of dsPIC30F electrical characteristics. Additional information will be provided in future
revisions of this document as it becomes available.
For detailed information about the dsPIC30F architecture and core, refer to “dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual”
(DS70046).
Absolute maximum ratings for the dsPIC30F family are listed below. Exposure to these maximum rating conditions for
extended periods may affect device reliability. Functional operation of the device at these or any other conditions above
the parameters indicated in the operation listings of this specification is not implied.
Absolute Maximum Ratings(†)
Ambient temperature under bias.............................................................................................................-40°C to +125°C
Storage temperature .............................................................................................................................. -65°C to +150°C
Voltage on any pin with respect to VSS (except VDD and MCLR) (Note 1) ..................................... -0.3V to (VDD + 0.3V)
Voltage on VDD with respect to VSS ......................................................................................................... -0.3V to +5.5V
Voltage on MCLR with respect to VSS ....................................................................................................... 0V to +13.25V
Maximum current out of VSS pin ...........................................................................................................................300 mA
Maximum current into VDD pin (Note 2)................................................................................................................250 mA
Input clamp current, IIK (VI < 0 or VI > VDD) .......................................................................................................... ±20 mA
Output clamp current, IOK (VO < 0 or VO > VDD) ...................................................................................................±20 mA
Maximum output current sunk by any I/O pin..........................................................................................................25 mA
Maximum output current sourced by any I/O pin ....................................................................................................25 mA
Maximum current sunk by all ports .......................................................................................................................200 mA
Maximum current sourced by all ports (Note 2)....................................................................................................200 mA
Note 1: Voltage spikes below Vss at the MCLR/VPP pin, inducing currents greater than 80 mA, may cause latch-up.
Thus, a series resistor of 50-100Ω should be used when applying a “low” level to the MCLR/VPP pin, rather
than pulling this pin directly to Vss.
2: Maximum allowable current is a function of device maximum power dissipation. See Table 23-2.
†NOTICE:
Stresses above those listed under “Absolute Maximum Ratings” may cause permanent damage to the
device. This is a stress rating only and functional operation of the device at those or any other conditions above those
indicated in the operation listings of this specification is not implied. Exposure to maximum rating conditions for
extended periods may affect device reliability.
23.1
DC Characteristics
TABLE 23-1:
OPERATING MIPS VS. VOLTAGE
VDD Range
Temp Range
Max MIPS
dsPIC30F301X-30I
dsPIC30F301X-20E
4.5-5.5V
-40°C to 85°C
30
—
4.5-5.5V
-40°C to 125°C
—
20
3.0-3.6V
-40°C to 85°C
20
—
3.0-3.6V
-40°C to 125°C
—
15
2.5-3.0V
-40°C to 85°C
10
—
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70141E-page 163
dsPIC30F3010/3011
TABLE 23-2:
THERMAL OPERATING CONDITIONS
Rating
Symbol
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Operating Junction Temperature Range
TJ
-40
—
+125
°C
Operating Ambient Temperature Range
TA
-40
—
+85
°C
Operating Junction Temperature Range
TJ
-40
—
+150
°C
Operating Ambient Temperature Range
TA
-40
—
+125
°C
dsPIC30F301X-30I
dsPIC30F301X-20E
Power Dissipation:
Internal chip power dissipation:
P INT = V D D × ( I D D – ∑ I O H)
PD
PINT + PI/O
W
PDMAX
(TJ – TA)/θJA
W
I/O Pin power dissipation:
P I/O = ∑ ( { V D D – V O H } × IOH ) + ∑ ( V O L × I O L )
Maximum Allowed Power Dissipation
TABLE 23-3:
THERMAL PACKAGING CHARACTERISTICS
Symbol
Typ
Max
Unit
Notes
Package Thermal Resistance, 28-pin SPDIP (SP)
Characteristic
θJA
42
—
°C/W
1
Package Thermal Resistance, 28-pin SOIC (SO)
θJA
49
—
°C/W
1
Package Thermal Resistance, 40-pin PDIP (P)
θJA
37
—
°C/W
1
Package Thermal Resistance, 44-pin TQFP (PT, 10x10x1 mm)
θJA
45
—
°C/W
1
Package Thermal Resistance, 44-pin QFN (ML)
θJA
28
—
°C/W
1
Note 1:
Junction to ambient thermal resistance, Theta-ja (θJA) numbers are achieved by package simulations.
TABLE 23-4:
DC TEMPERATURE AND VOLTAGE SPECIFICATIONS
Standard Operating Conditions: 2.5V to 5.5V
(unless otherwise stated)
Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for Industrial
-40°C ≤ TA ≤ +125°C for Extended
DC CHARACTERISTICS
Param
No.
Symbol
Characteristic
Min
Typ(1)
Max
Units
Conditions
Operating Voltage(2)
DC10
VDD
Supply Voltage
2.5
—
5.5
V
Industrial temperature
DC11
VDD
Supply Voltage
3.0
—
5.5
V
Extended temperature
(3)
DC12
VDR
RAM Data Retention Voltage
1.75
—
—
V
DC16
VPOR
VDD Start Voltage
to Ensure Internal
Power-on Reset Signal
—
VSS
—
V
DC17
SVDD
VDD Rise Rate
to Ensure Internal
Power-on Reset Signal
0.05
—
—
Note 1:
2:
3:
V/ms 0-5V in 0.1 sec
0-3V in 60 ms
Data in “Typ” column is at 5V, 25°C unless otherwise stated. Parameters are for design guidance only and
are not tested.
These parameters are characterized but not tested in manufacturing.
This is the limit to which VDD can be lowered without losing RAM data.
DS70141E-page 164
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
dsPIC30F3010/3011
TABLE 23-5:
DC CHARACTERISTICS: OPERATING CURRENT (IDD)
Standard Operating Conditions: 2.5V to 5.5V
(unless otherwise stated)
Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for Industrial
-40°C ≤ TA ≤ +125°C for Extended
DC CHARACTERISTICS
Parameter
No.
Typical(1)
Max
Units
Conditions
Operating Current (IDD)(2)
DC31a
1.4
2.5
mA
25°C
DC31b
1.4
2.5
mA
85°C
3.3V
DC31c
1.4
2.5
mA
125°C
0.128 MIPS
LPRC (512 kHz)
DC31e
3.0
4.5
mA
25°C
DC31f
2.8
4.5
mA
85°C
5V
DC31g
2.8
4.5
mA
125°C
DC30a
3.2
5.0
mA
25°C
DC30b
3.3
5.0
mA
85°C
3.3V
DC30c
3.3
5.0
mA
125°C
1.8 MIPS
FRC (7.37MHz)
DC30e
6.0
9.0
mA
25°C
DC30f
5.9
9.0
mA
85°C
5V
DC30g
5.9
9.0
mA
125°C
DC23a
10.0
17.0
mA
25°C
DC23b
10.0
17.0
mA
85°C
3.3V
DC23c
11.0
17.0
mA
125°C
4 MIPS
DC23e
17.0
27.0
mA
25°C
DC23f
17.0
27.0
mA
85°C
5V
DC23g
18.0
27.0
mA
125°C
DC24a
24.0
38.0
mA
25°C
DC24b
25.0
38.0
mA
85°C
3.3V
DC24c
25.0
38.0
mA
125°C
10 MIPS
DC24e
41.0
62.0
mA
25°C
DC24f
41.0
62.0
mA
85°C
5V
DC24g
41.0
62.0
mA
125°C
DC27a
46.0
70.0
mA
25°C
3.3V
DC27b
46.0
70.0
mA
85°C
DC27d
76.0
115.0
mA
25°C
20 MIPS
DC27e
76.0
115.0
mA
85°C
5V
DC27f
76.0
115.0
mA
125°C
DC29a
109.0
155.0
mA
25°C
5V
30 MIPS
DC29b
108.0
155.0
mA
85°C
Note 1: Data in “Typical” column is at 5V, 25°C unless otherwise stated. Parameters are for design guidance only
and are not tested.
2: The supply current is mainly a function of the operating voltage and frequency. Other factors, such as I/O
pin loading and switching rate, oscillator type, internal code execution pattern and temperature, also have
an impact on the current consumption. The test conditions for all IDD measurements are as follows: OSC1
driven with external square wave from rail to rail. All I/O pins are configured as inputs and pulled to VDD.
MCLR = VDD, WDT, FSCM, LVD and BOR are disabled. CPU, SRAM, program memory and data memory
are operational. No peripheral modules are operating.
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70141E-page 165
dsPIC30F3010/3011
TABLE 23-6:
DC CHARACTERISTICS: IDLE CURRENT (IIDLE)
Standard Operating Conditions: 2.5V to 5.5V
(unless otherwise stated)
Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for Industrial
-40°C ≤ TA ≤ +125°C for Extended
DC CHARACTERISTICS
Parameter
No.
Typical(1,2)
Max
Units
Conditions
Operating Current (IDD)
DC51a
1.1
1.8
mA
25°C
DC51b
1.1
1.8
mA
85°C
DC51c
1.1
1.8
mA
125°C
DC51e
2.6
4.0
mA
25°C
DC51f
2.4
4.0
mA
85°C
DC51g
2.3
4.0
mA
125°C
DC50a
3.2
5.0
mA
25°C
DC50b
3.3
5.0
mA
85°C
DC50c
3.3
5.0
mA
125°C
DC50e
6.0
9.0
mA
25°C
DC50f
5.9
9.0
mA
85°C
DC50g
5.9
9.0
mA
125°C
DC43a
6.0
9.3
mA
25°C
DC43b
6.1
9.3
mA
85°C
DC43c
6.2
9.3
mA
125°C
DC43e
11.0
17.0
mA
25°C
DC43f
11.0
17.0
mA
85°C
DC43g
11.0
17.0
mA
125°C
DC44a
13.0
21.0
mA
25°C
DC44b
14.0
21.0
mA
85°C
DC44c
14.0
21.0
mA
125°C
DC44e
23.0
35.0
mA
25°C
DC44f
23.0
35.0
mA
85°C
DC44g
23.0
35.0
mA
125°C
DC47a
25.0
40.0
mA
25°C
DC47b
26.0
40.0
mA
85°C
DC47d
43.0
60.0
mA
25°C
DC47e
43.0
60.0
mA
85°C
DC47f
43.0
60.0
mA
125°C
DC49a
62.0
80.0
mA
25°C
DC49b
63.0
80.0
mA
85°C
Note 1:
2:
3.3V
0.128 MIPS
LPRC (512 kHz)
5V
3.3V
1.8 MIPS
FRC (7.37MHz)
5V
3.3V
4 MIPS
5V
3.3V
10 MIPS
5V
3.3V
20 MIPS
5V
5V
30 MIPS
Data in “Typical” column is at 5V, 25°C unless otherwise stated. Parameters are for design guidance only
and are not tested.
Base IIDLE current is measured with core off, clock on and all modules turned off.
DS70141E-page 166
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
dsPIC30F3010/3011
TABLE 23-7:
DC CHARACTERISTICS: POWER-DOWN CURRENT (IPD)
Standard Operating Conditions: 2.5V to 5.5V
(unless otherwise stated)
Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for Industrial
-40°C ≤ TA ≤ +125°C for Extended
DC CHARACTERISTICS
Parameter
No.
Typical(1)
Max
Units
0.3
14.0
μA
Conditions
Power-Down Current (IPD)(2)
DC60a
25°C
DC60b
1.0
27.0
μA
85°C
DC60c
12.0
55.0
μA
125°C
DC60e
0.5
20.0
μA
25°C
DC60f
2.0
40.0
μA
85°C
DC60g
17.0
90.0
μA
125°C
DC61a
8.0
12.0
μA
25°C
DC61b
8.0
12.0
μA
85°C
DC61c
8.0
12.0
μA
125°C
DC61e
14.0
21.0
μA
25°C
DC61f
14.0
21.0
μA
85°C
DC61g
14.0
21.0
μA
125°C
DC62a
4.0
10.0
μA
25°C
DC62b
5.0
10.0
μA
85°C
DC62c
4.0
10.0
μA
125°C
DC62e
4.0
15.0
μA
25°C
DC62f
6.0
15.0
μA
85°C
DC62g
5.0
15.0
μA
125°C
DC63a
33.0
57.0
μA
25°C
DC63b
37.0
57.0
μA
85°C
DC63c
38.0
57.0
μA
125°C
DC63e
38.0
65.0
μA
25°C
DC63f
41.0
65.0
μA
85°C
43.0
65.0
μA
125°C
DC63g
Note 1:
2:
3:
3.3V
Base Power-Down Current
5V
3.3V
Watchdog Timer Current: ΔIWDT(3)
5V
3.3V
Timer 1 w/32 kHz Crystal: ΔITI32(3)
5V
3.3V
BOR on: ΔIBOR(3)
5V
Parameters are for design guidance only and are not tested.
These parameters are characterized but not tested in manufacturing.
These values represent the difference between the base power-down current and the power-down current
with the specified peripheral enabled during Sleep.
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70141E-page 167
dsPIC30F3010/3011
TABLE 23-8:
DC CHARACTERISTICS: I/O PIN INPUT SPECIFICATIONS
Standard Operating Conditions: 2.5V to 5.5V
(unless otherwise stated)
Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for Industrial
-40°C ≤ TA ≤ +125°C for Extended
DC CHARACTERISTICS
Param
Symbol
No.
VIL
Characteristic
Min
Typ(1)
Max
Units
Conditions
Input Low Voltage(2)
DI10
I/O Pins:
with Schmitt Trigger Buffer
VSS
—
0.2 VDD
V
DI15
MCLR
VSS
—
0.2 VDD
V
DI16
OSC1 (in XT, HS and LP modes)
VSS
—
0.2 VDD
V
DI17
OSC1 (in RC mode)(3)
VSS
—
0.3 VDD
V
DI18
SDA, SCL
VSS
—
0.3 VDD
V
SMbus disabled
DI19
SDA, SCL
VSS
—
0.2 VDD
V
SMbus enabled
I/O Pins:
with Schmitt Trigger Buffer
0.8 VDD
—
VDD
V
DI25
MCLR
0.8 VDD
—
VDD
V
DI26
OSC1 (in XT, HS and LP modes) 0.7 VDD
—
VDD
V
VIH
DI20
(2)
Input High Voltage
mode)(3)
DI27
OSC1 (in RC
0.9 VDD
—
VDD
V
DI28
SDA, SCL
0.7 VDD
—
VDD
V
SMbus disabled
SDA, SCL
VDD
—
VDD
V
SMbus enabled
50
250
400
μA
VDD = 5V, VPIN = VSS
DI29
0.8
Current(2)
ICNPU
CNXX Pull-up
IIL
Input Leakage Current(2,4,5)
DI30
DI50
I/O Ports
—
0.01
±1
μA
VSS ≤ VPIN ≤ VDD,
Pin at high-impedance
DI51
Analog Input Pins
—
0.50
—
μA
VSS ≤ VPIN ≤ VDD,
Pin at high-impedance
DI55
MCLR
—
0.05
±5
μA
VSS ≤ VPIN ≤ VDD
DI56
OSC1
—
0.05
±5
μA
VSS ≤ VPIN ≤ VDD, XT, HS
and LP Oscillator mode
Note 1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
Data in “Typ” column is at 5V, 25°C unless otherwise stated. Parameters are for design guidance only and
are not tested.
These parameters are characterized but not tested in manufacturing.
In RC oscillator configuration, the OSC1/CLKl pin is a Schmitt Trigger input. It is not recommended that
the dsPIC30F device be driven with an external clock while in RC mode.
The leakage current on the MCLR pin is strongly dependent on the applied voltage level. The specified
levels represent normal operating conditions. Higher leakage current may be measured at different input
voltages.
Negative current is defined as current sourced by the pin.
DS70141E-page 168
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
dsPIC30F3010/3011
TABLE 23-9:
DC CHARACTERISTICS: I/O PIN OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS
Standard Operating Conditions: 2.5V to 5.5V
(unless otherwise stated)
Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for Industrial
-40°C ≤ TA ≤ +125°C for Extended
DC CHARACTERISTICS
Param
Symbol
No.
VOL
Characteristic
Min
Typ(1)
Max
Units
—
0.6
V
Conditions
Output Low Voltage(2)
DO10
I/O Ports
—
—
—
0.15
V
IOL = 2.0 mA, VDD = 3V
DO16
OSC2/CLKO
—
—
0.6
V
IOL = 1.6 mA, VDD = 5V
(RC or EC Oscillator mode)
—
—
0.72
V
IOL = 2.0 mA, VDD = 3V
VDD – 0.7
—
—
V
IOH = -3.0 mA, VDD = 5V
VDD – 0.2
—
—
V
IOH = -2.0 mA, VDD = 3V
OSC2/CLKO
VDD – 0.7
—
—
V
IOH = -1.3 mA, VDD = 5V
(RC or EC Oscillator mode)
VDD – 0.1
—
—
V
IOH = -2.0 mA, VDD = 3V
15
pF
In XTL, XT, HS and LP modes
when external clock is used to
drive OSC1.
VOH
DO20
Output High Voltage(2)
I/O Ports
DO26
IOL = 8.5 mA, VDD = 5V
Capacitive Loading Specs
on Output Pins(2)
DO50
COSC2
OSC2/SOSC2 pin
—
—
DO56
CIO
All I/O Pins and OSC2
—
—
50
pF
RC or EC Oscillator mode
DO58
CB
SCL, SDA
—
—
400
pF
In I2C™ mode
Note 1:
2:
Data in “Typ” column is at 5V, 25°C unless otherwise stated. Parameters are for design guidance only and
are not tested.
These parameters are characterized but not tested in manufacturing.
FIGURE 23-1:
BROWN-OUT RESET CHARACTERISTICS
VDD
BO10
(Device in Brown-out Reset)
BO15
(Device not in Brown-out Reset)
Reset (due to BOR)
Power-Up Time-out
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70141E-page 169
dsPIC30F3010/3011
TABLE 23-10: ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS: BOR
Standard Operating Conditions: 2.5V to 5.5V
(unless otherwise stated)
Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for Industrial
-40°C ≤ TA ≤ +125°C for Extended
DC CHARACTERISTICS
Param
No.
BO10
Symbol
VBOR
Min
Typ(1)
Max
Units
BORV = 11(3)
—
—
—
V
BORV = 10
2.6
—
2.71
V
BORV = 01
4.1
—
4.4
V
BORV = 00
4.58
—
4.73
V
—
5
—
mV
Characteristic
BOR Voltage on VDD
Transition
High-to-Low(2)
Conditions
Not in operating
range
BO15
VBHYS
Note 1:
Data in “Typ” column is at 5V, 25°C unless otherwise stated. Parameters are for design guidance only and
are not tested.
These parameters are characterized but not tested in manufacturing.
‘11’ values not in usable operating range.
2:
3:
TABLE 23-11: DC CHARACTERISTICS: PROGRAM AND EEPROM
Standard Operating Conditions: 2.5V to 5.5V
(unless otherwise stated)
Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for Industrial
-40°C ≤ TA ≤ +125°C for Extended
DC CHARACTERISTICS
Param
No.
Symbol
Characteristic
Min
Typ(1)
Max
Units
Conditions
Data EEPROM Memory(2)
D120
ED
Byte Endurance
100K
1M
—
E/W
D121
VDRW
VDD for Read/Write
VMIN
—
5.5
V
-40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C
Using EECON to read/write
VMIN = Minimum operating
voltage
D122
TDEW
Erase/Write Cycle Time
—
2
—
D123
TRETD
Characteristic Retention
40
100
—
Year Provided no other specifications
are violated
ms
D124
IDEW
IDD During Programming
—
10
30
mA
Row Erase
-40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C
Program Flash Memory(2)
D130
EP
Cell Endurance
10K
100K
—
E/W
D131
VPR
VDD for Read
VMIN
—
5.5
V
D132
VEB
VDD for Bulk Erase
4.5
—
5.5
V
D133
VPEW
VDD for Erase/Write
3.0
—
5.5
V
D134
TPEW
Erase/Write Cycle Time
1
—
2
ms
D135
TRETD
Characteristic Retention
40
100
—
D136
TEB
ICSP™ Block Erase Time
—
4
—
ms
D137
IPEW
IDD During Programming
—
10
30
mA
Row Erase
D138
IEB
IDD During Programming
—
10
30
mA
Bulk Erase
Note 1:
2:
VMIN = Minimum operating
voltage
Year Provided no other specifications
are violated
Data in “Typ” column is at 5V, 25°C unless otherwise stated.
These parameters are characterized but not tested in manufacturing.
DS70141E-page 170
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
dsPIC30F3010/3011
23.2
AC Characteristics and Timing Parameters
The information contained in this section defines dsPIC30F AC characteristics and timing parameters.
TABLE 23-12: TEMPERATURE AND VOLTAGE SPECIFICATIONS – AC
Standard Operating Conditions: 2.5V to 5.5V
(unless otherwise stated)
Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for Industrial
-40°C ≤ TA ≤ +125°C for Extended
Operating voltage VDD range as described
in Section 23.1 "DC Characteristics".
AC CHARACTERISTICS
FIGURE 23-2:
LOAD CONDITIONS FOR DEVICE TIMING SPECIFICATIONS
Load Condition 1 – for all pins except OSC2
Load Condition 2 – for OSC2
VDD/2
CL
Pin
RL
VSS
CL
Pin
RL = 464Ω
CL = 50 pF for all pins except OSC2
5 pF for OSC2 output
VSS
FIGURE 23-3:
EXTERNAL CLOCK TIMING
Q4
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Q1
OSC1
OS20
OS30
OS25
OS30
OS31
OS31
CLKO
OS40
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
OS41
DS70141E-page 171
dsPIC30F3010/3011
TABLE 23-13: EXTERNAL CLOCK TIMING REQUIREMENTS
Standard Operating Conditions: 2.5V to 5.5V
(unless otherwise stated)
Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for Industrial
-40°C ≤ TA ≤ +125°C for Extended
AC CHARACTERISTICS
Param
Symbol
No.
OS10
FOSC
Characteristic
Min
Typ(1)
Max
Units
External CLKI Frequency(2)
(External clocks allowed
only in EC mode)
DC
4
4
4
—
—
—
—
40
10
10
7.5
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
EC
EC with 4x PLL
EC with 8x PLL
EC with 16x PLL
Oscillator Frequency(2)
DC
0.4
4
4
4
4
10
31
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
7.37
512
4
4
10
10
10
7.5
25
33
—
—
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
kHz
MHz
kHz
RC
XTL
XT
XT with 4x PLL
XT with 8x PLL
XT with 16x PLL
HS
LP
FRC internal
LPRC internal
—
—
—
—
See parameter OS10
for FOSC value
Conditions
OS20
TOSC
TOSC = 1/FOSC
OS25
TCY
Instruction Cycle Time(2,3)
33
—
DC
ns
See Table 23-16
OS30
TosL,
TosH
External Clock in (OSC1)
High or Low Time(2)
.45 x TOSC
—
—
ns
EC
OS31
TosR,
TosF
External Clock in (OSC1)
Rise or Fall Time(2)
—
—
20
ns
EC
OS40
TckR
CLKO Rise Time(2,4)
—
—
—
ns
See parameter DO31
OS41
TckF
CLKO Fall Time(2,4)
—
—
—
ns
See parameter DO32
Note 1:
2:
3:
4:
Data in “Typ” column is at 5V, 25°C unless otherwise stated. Parameters are for design guidance only and
are not tested.
These parameters are characterized but not tested in manufacturing.
Instruction cycle period (TCY) equals four times the input oscillator time base period. All specified values
are based on characterization data for that particular oscillator type under standard operating conditions
with the device executing code. Exceeding these specified limits may result in an unstable oscillator
operation and/or higher than expected current consumption. All devices are tested to operate at “Min.”
values with an external clock applied to the OSC1/CLKI pin. When an external clock input is used, the
“Max.” cycle time limit is “DC” (no clock) for all devices.
Measurements are taken in EC or ERC modes. The CLKO signal is measured on the OSC2 pin. CLKO is
low for the Q1-Q2 period (1/2 TCY) and high for the Q3-Q4 period (1/2 TCY).
DS70141E-page 172
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
dsPIC30F3010/3011
TABLE 23-14: PLL CLOCK TIMING SPECIFICATIONS (VDD = 2.5 TO 5.5 V)
Standard Operating Conditions: 2.5V to 5.5V
(unless otherwise stated)
Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for Industrial
-40°C ≤ TA ≤ +125°C for Extended
AC CHARACTERISTICS
Param
No.
Characteristic(1)
Symbol
Min
Typ(2)
Max
Units
Conditions
OS50
FPLLI
PLL Input Frequency Range(2)
4
4
4
4
4
4
5(3)
5(3)
5(3)
4
4
4
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
10
10
7.5(4)
10
10
7.5(4)
10
10
7.5(4)
8.33(3)
8.33(3)
7.5(4)
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
EC with 4x PLL
EC with 8x PLL
EC with 16x PLL
XT with 4x PLL
XT with 8x PLL
XT with 16x PLL
HS/2 with 4x PLL
HS/2 with 8x PLL
HS/2 with 16x PLL
HS/3 with 4x PLL
HS/3 with 8x PLL
HS/3 with 16x PLL
OS51
FSYS
On-Chip PLL Output(2)
16
—
120
MHz
EC, XT, HS/2, HS/3 modes
with PLL
OS52
TLOC
PLL Start-up Time (lock time)
—
20
50
μs
Note 1:
2:
3:
4:
These parameters are characterized but not tested in manufacturing.
Data in “Typ” column is at 5V, 25°C unless otherwise stated. Parameters are for design guidance only and
are not tested.
Limited by oscillator frequency range.
Limited by device operating frequency range.
TABLE 23-15: PLL JITTER
AC CHARACTERISTICS
Param
No.
OS61
Characteristic
x4 PLL
x8 PLL
x16 PLL
Note 1:
Standard Operating Conditions: 2.5V to 5.5V
(unless otherwise stated)
Operating temperature
-40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for Industrial
-40°C ≤ TA ≤ +125°C for Extended
Min
Typ(1)
Max
Units
Conditions
—
0.251
0.413
%
-40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C
VDD = 3.0 to 3.6V
—
0.251
0.413
%
-40°C ≤ TA ≤ +125°C
VDD = 3.0 to 3.6V
—
0.256
0.47
%
-40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C
VDD = 4.5 to 5.5V
—
0.256
0.47
%
-40°C ≤ TA ≤ +125°C
VDD = 4.5 to 5.5V
—
0.355
0.584
%
-40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C
VDD = 3.0 to 3.6V
—
0.355
0.584
%
-40°C ≤ TA ≤ +125°C
VDD = 3.0 to 3.6V
—
0.362
0.664
%
-40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C
VDD = 4.5 to 5.5V
—
0.362
0.664
%
-40°C ≤ TA ≤ +125°C
VDD = 4.5 to 5.5V
—
0.67
0.92
%
-40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C
VDD = 3.0 to 3.6V
—
0.632
0.956
%
-40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C
VDD = 4.5 to 5.5V
—
0.632
0.956
%
-40°C ≤ TA ≤ +125°C
VDD = 4.5 to 5.5V
These parameters are characterized but not tested in manufacturing.
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70141E-page 173
dsPIC30F3010/3011
TABLE 23-16: INTERNAL CLOCK TIMING EXAMPLES
Clock
Oscillator
Mode
FOSC
(MHz)(1)
TCY (μsec)(2)
MIPS(3)
w/o PLL
MIPS(3)
w PLL x4
MIPS(3)
w PLL x8
MIPS(3)
w PLL x16
EC
0.200
20.0
0.05
—
—
—
4
1.0
1.0
4.0
8.0
16.0
XT
Note 1:
2:
3:
10
0.4
2.5
10.0
20.0
—
25
0.16
6.25
—
—
—
4
1.0
1.0
4.0
8.0
16.0
10
0.4
2.5
10.0
20.0
—
Assumption: Oscillator Postscaler is divide by 1.
Instruction Execution Cycle Time: TCY = 1/MIPS.
Instruction Execution Frequency: MIPS = (FOSC * PLLx)/4 since there are 4 Q clocks per instruction cycle.
DS70141E-page 174
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
dsPIC30F3010/3011
TABLE 23-17: AC CHARACTERISTICS: INTERNAL FRC ACCURACY
AC CHARACTERISTICS
Param
No.
(2)
Standard Operating Conditions: 2.5V to 5.5V
(unless otherwise stated)
Operating temperature
-40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for Industrial
-40°C ≤ TA ≤ +125°C for Extended
Characteristic
Min
Typ
Max
Units
Conditions
Internal FRC Accuracy @ FRC Freq. = 7.37 MHz(1)
OS63
Note 1:
FRC
—
—
±2.00
%
-40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C
VDD = 3.0-5.5V
—
—
±5.00
%
-40°C ≤ TA ≤ +125°C
VDD = 3.0-5.5V
Frequency calibrated at 25°C and 5V. TUN bits can be used to compensate for temperature drift.
TABLE 23-18: AC CHARACTERISTICS: INTERNAL LPRC ACCURACY
AC CHARACTERISTICS
Param
No.
Characteristic
Standard Operating Conditions: 2.5V to 5.5V
(unless otherwise stated)
Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for Industrial
-40°C ≤ TA ≤ +125°C for Extended
Min
Typ
Max
Units
Conditions
OS65A
-50
—
+50
%
VDD = 5.0V, ±10%
OS65B
-60
—
+60
%
VDD = 3.3V, ±10%
OS65C
-70
—
+70
%
VDD = 2.5V
LPRC @ Freq. = 512 kHz(1)
Note 1:
Change of LPRC frequency as VDD changes.
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70141E-page 175
dsPIC30F3010/3011
FIGURE 23-4:
CLKO AND I/O TIMING CHARACTERISTICS
I/O Pin
(Input)
DI35
DI40
I/O Pin
(Output)
New Value
Old Value
DO31
DO32
Note: Refer to Figure 23-2 for load conditions.
TABLE 23-19: CLKO AND I/O TIMING REQUIREMENTS
Standard Operating Conditions: 2.5V to 5.5V
(unless otherwise stated)
Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for Industrial
-40°C ≤ TA ≤ +125°C for Extended
AC CHARACTERISTICS
Param
No.
Symbol
Characteristic(1,2,3)
Min
Typ(4)
Max
Units
DO31
TIOR
Port Output Rise Time
—
7
20
ns
DO32
TIOF
Port Output Fall Time
—
7
20
ns
DI35
TINP
INTx Pin High or Low Time (output)
20
—
—
ns
DI40
TRBP
CNx High or Low Time (input)
2 TCY
—
—
ns
Note 1:
2:
3:
4:
Conditions
These parameters are asynchronous events not related to any internal clock edges.
Measurements are taken in RC mode and EC mode where CLKO output is 4 x TOSC.
These parameters are characterized but not tested in manufacturing.
Data in “Typ” column is at 5V, 25°C unless otherwise stated.
DS70141E-page 176
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
dsPIC30F3010/3011
FIGURE 23-5:
RESET, WATCHDOG TIMER, OSCILLATOR START-UP TIMER AND POWER-UP
TIMER TIMING CHARACTERISTICS
VDD
SY12
MCLR
SY10
Internal
POR
SY11
PWRT
Time-out
SY30
Oscillator
Time-out
Internal
Reset
Watchdog
Timer
Reset
SY20
SY13
SY13
I/O Pins
SY35
FSCM
Delay
Note: Refer to Figure 23-2 for load conditions.
TABLE 23-20: RESET, WATCHDOG TIMER, OSCILLATOR START-UP TIMER, POWER-UP TIMER
AND BROWN-OUT RESET TIMING REQUIREMENTS
Standard Operating Conditions: 2.5V to 5.5V
(unless otherwise stated)
Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for Industrial
-40°C ≤ TA ≤ +125°C for Extended
AC CHARACTERISTICS
Param
Symbol
No.
Characteristic(1)
Min
Typ(2)
Max
Units
Conditions
SY10
TmcL
MCLR Pulse Width (low)
2
—
—
μs
-40°C to +85°C
SY11
TPWRT
Power-up Timer Period
2
10
43
4
16
64
8
32
128
ms
-40°C to +85°C,
VDD = 5V
User programmable
SY12
TPOR
Power-on Reset Delay
3
10
30
μs
-40°C to +85°C
SY13
TIOZ
I/O High-impedance from MCLR
Low or Watchdog Timer Reset
—
0.8
1.0
μs
SY20
TWDT1
TWDT2
TWDT3
Watchdog Timer Time-out Period
(no prescaler)
1.1
1.2
1.3
2.0
2.0
2.0
6.6
5.0
4.0
ms
ms
ms
VDD = 2.5V
VDD = 3.3V, ±10%
VDD = 5V, ±10%
SY25
TBOR
Brown-out Reset Pulse Width(3)
100
—
—
μs
VDD ≤ VBOR (D034)
SY30
TOST
Oscillator Start-up Timer Period
—
1024 TOSC
—
—
TOSC = OSC1 period
SY35
TFSCM
Fail-Safe Clock Monitor Delay
—
500
900
μs
-40°C to +85°C
Note 1:
2:
3:
These parameters are characterized but not tested in manufacturing.
Data in “Typ” column is at 5V, 25°C unless otherwise stated.
Refer to Figure 23-1 and Table 23-10 for BOR.
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70141E-page 177
dsPIC30F3010/3011
FIGURE 23-6:
BAND GAP START-UP TIME CHARACTERISTICS
VBGAP
0V
Enable Band Gap(1)
Band Gap
Stable
SY40
Note 1:
Band gap is enabled when FBORPOR<7> is set.
TABLE 23-21: BAND GAP START-UP TIME REQUIREMENTS
AC CHARACTERISTICS
Param
No.
SY40
Note 1:
2:
Symbol
TBGAP
Standard Operating Conditions: 2.5V to 5.5V
(unless otherwise stated)
Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for Industrial
-40°C ≤ TA ≤ +125°C for Extended
Characteristic(1)
Min
Typ(2)
Max
Units
Conditions
Band Gap Start-up Time
—
40
65
μs
Defined as the time between the
instant that the band gap is enabled
and the moment that the band gap
reference voltage is stable.
RCON<13> status bit
These parameters are characterized but not tested in manufacturing.
Data in “Typ” column is at 5V, 25°C unless otherwise stated.
DS70141E-page 178
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
dsPIC30F3010/3011
FIGURE 23-7:
TIMER1, 2, 3, 4 AND 5 EXTERNAL CLOCK TIMING CHARACTERISTICS
TxCK
Tx11
Tx10
Tx15
Tx20
OS60
TMRX
Note: Refer to Figure 23-2 for load conditions.
TABLE 23-22: TIMER1 EXTERNAL CLOCK TIMING REQUIREMENTS
Standard Operating Conditions: 2.5V to 5.5V
(unless otherwise stated)
Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for Industrial
-40°C ≤ TA ≤ +125°C for Extended
AC CHARACTERISTICS
Param
No.
TA10
TA11
TA15
Symbol
TTXH
TTXL
TTXP
Characteristic
TxCK High Time
TxCK Low Time
Min
Typ
Max
Units
Synchronous,
no prescaler
0.5 TCY + 20
—
—
ns
Synchronous,
with prescaler
10
—
—
ns
Asynchronous
10
—
—
ns
Synchronous,
no prescaler
0.5 TCY + 20
—
—
ns
Synchronous,
with prescaler
10
—
—
ns
Asynchronous
10
—
—
ns
TCY + 10
—
—
ns
Greater of:
20 ns or
(TCY + 40)/N
—
—
—
TxCK Input Period Synchronous,
no prescaler
Synchronous,
with prescaler
Asynchronous
OS60
Ft1
SOSC1/T1CK Oscillator Input
Frequency Range (oscillator
enabled by setting bit, TCS
(T1CON<1>))
TA20
TCKEXTMRL Delay from External TxCK Clock
Edge to Timer Increment
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
20
—
—
ns
DC
—
50
kHz
1.5
TCY
—
0.5 TCY
Conditions
Must also meet
parameter TA15
Must also meet
parameter TA15
N = prescale value
(1, 8, 64, 256)
DS70141E-page 179
dsPIC30F3010/3011
TABLE 23-23: TIMER2 AND TIMER4 EXTERNAL CLOCK TIMING REQUIREMENTS
Standard Operating Conditions: 2.5V to 5.5V
(unless otherwise stated)
Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for Industrial
-40°C ≤ TA ≤ +125°C for Extended
AC CHARACTERISTICS
Param
No.
TB10
TB11
TB15
TB20
Symbol
TtxH
TtxL
TtxP
TCKEXTMRL
Characteristic
TxCK High Time
TxCK Low Time
TxCK Input
Period
Min
Typ
Max
Units
Conditions
Synchronous,
no prescaler
0.5 TCY + 20
—
—
ns
Must also meet
parameter TB15
Synchronous,
with prescaler
10
—
—
ns
Synchronous,
no prescaler
0.5 TCY + 20
—
—
ns
Synchronous,
with prescaler
10
—
—
ns
Synchronous,
no prescaler
TCY + 10
—
—
ns
Synchronous,
with prescaler
Greater of:
20 ns or
(TCY + 40)/N
—
1.5 TCY
—
Delay from External TxCK Clock
Edge to Timer Increment
0.5 TCY
Must also meet
parameter TB15
N = prescale
value
(1, 8, 64, 256)
TABLE 23-24: TIMER3 AND TIMER5 EXTERNAL CLOCK TIMING REQUIREMENTS
Standard Operating Conditions: 2.5V to 5.5V
(unless otherwise stated)
Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for Industrial
-40°C ≤ TA ≤ +125°C for Extended
AC CHARACTERISTICS
Param
No.
Symbol
Characteristic
Min
Typ
Max
Units
Conditions
TC10
TtxH
TxCK High Time
Synchronous
0.5 TCY + 20
—
—
ns
Must also meet
parameter TC15
TC11
TtxL
TxCK Low Time
Synchronous
0.5 TCY + 20
—
—
ns
Must also meet
parameter TC15
TC15
TtxP
TxCK Input Period Synchronous,
no prescaler
TCY + 10
—
—
ns
N = prescale
value
(1, 8, 64, 256)
—
1.5
TCY
—
Synchronous,
with prescaler
TC20
TCKEXTMRL
DS70141E-page 180
Delay from External TxCK Clock
Edge to Timer Increment
Greater of:
20 ns or
(TCY + 40)/N
0.5 TCY
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
dsPIC30F3010/3011
FIGURE 23-8:
TIMERQ (QEI MODULE) EXTERNAL CLOCK TIMING CHARACTERISTICS
QEB
TQ11
TQ10
TQ15
TQ20
POSCNT
TABLE 23-25: QEI MODULE EXTERNAL CLOCK TIMING REQUIREMENTS
Standard Operating Conditions: 2.5V to 5.5V
(unless otherwise stated)
Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for Industrial
-40°C ≤ TA ≤ +125°C for Extended
AC CHARACTERISTICS
Param
No.
Characteristic(1)
Symbol
Min
Typ
Max
Units
Conditions
TQ10
TtQH
TQCK High Time
Synchronous,
with prescaler
TCY + 20
—
—
ns
Must also meet
parameter TQ15
TQ11
TtQL
TQCK Low Time
Synchronous,
with prescaler
TCY + 20
—
—
ns
Must also meet
parameter TQ15
TQ15
TtQP
TQCP Input
Period
Synchronous, 2 * TCY + 40
with prescaler
—
—
ns
TQ20
TCKEXTMRL Delay from External TQCK Clock
Edge to Timer Increment
—
1.5 TCY
—
Note 1:
0.5 TCY
These parameters are characterized but not tested in manufacturing.
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70141E-page 181
dsPIC30F3010/3011
FIGURE 23-9:
INPUT CAPTURE (CAPx) TIMING CHARACTERISTICS
ICX
IC10
IC11
IC15
Note: Refer to Figure 23-2 for load conditions.
TABLE 23-26: INPUT CAPTURE TIMING REQUIREMENTS
Standard Operating Conditions: 2.5V to 5.5V
(unless otherwise stated)
Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for Industrial
-40°C ≤ TA ≤ +125°C for Extended
AC CHARACTERISTICS
Param
No.
Symbol
IC10
TccL
Characteristic(1)
ICx Input Low Time
Min
No prescaler
TccH
ICx Input High Time
No prescaler
—
ns
10
—
ns
0.5 TCY + 20
—
ns
10
—
ns
(2 TCY + 40)/N
—
ns
With prescaler
IC15
Note 1:
TccP
ICx Input Period
Units
0.5 TCY + 20
With prescaler
IC11
Max
Conditions
N = prescale
value (1, 4, 16)
These parameters are characterized but not tested in manufacturing.
FIGURE 23-10:
OUTPUT COMPARE MODULE (OCx) TIMING CHARACTERISTICS
OCx
(Output Compare
or PWM Mode)
OC10
OC11
Note: Refer to Figure 23-2 for load conditions.
TABLE 23-27: OUTPUT COMPARE MODULE TIMING REQUIREMENTS
AC CHARACTERISTICS
Param
Symbol
No.
Characteristic(1)
Standard Operating Conditions: 2.5V to 5.5V
(unless otherwise stated)
Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for Industrial
-40°C ≤ TA ≤ +125°C for Extended
Min
Typ
Max
Units
Conditions
OC10
TccF
OCx Output Fall Time
—
—
—
ns
See parameter DO32
OC11
TccR
OCx Output Rise Time
—
—
—
ns
See parameter DO31
Note 1:
These parameters are characterized but not tested in manufacturing.
DS70141E-page 182
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
dsPIC30F3010/3011
FIGURE 23-11:
OCx/PWM MODULE TIMING CHARACTERISTICS
OC20
OCFA/OCFB
OC15
OCx
TABLE 23-28: SIMPLE OCx/PWM MODE TIMING REQUIREMENTS
Standard Operating Conditions: 2.5V to 5.5V
(unless otherwise stated)
Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for Industrial
-40°C ≤ TA ≤ +125°C for Extended
AC CHARACTERISTICS
Param
Symbol
No.
Characteristic(1)
Min
Typ
Max
Units
OC15
TFD
Fault Input to PWM I/O
Change
—
—
50
ns
OC20
TFLT
Fault Input Pulse Width
50
—
—
ns
Note 1:
Conditions
These parameters are characterized but not tested in manufacturing.
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70141E-page 183
dsPIC30F3010/3011
FIGURE 23-12:
MOTOR CONTROL PWM MODULE FAULT TIMING CHARACTERISTICS
MP30
FLTA/B
MP20
PWMx
FIGURE 23-13:
MOTOR CONTROL PWM MODULE TIMING CHARACTERISTICS
MP11 MP10
PWMx
Note: Refer to Figure 23-2 for load conditions.
TABLE 23-29: MOTOR CONTROL PWM MODULE TIMING REQUIREMENTS
AC CHARACTERISTICS
Param
No.
Symbol
Characteristic(1)
Standard Operating Conditions: 2.5V to 5.5V
(unless otherwise stated)
Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for Industrial
-40°C ≤ TA ≤ +125°C for Extended
Min
Typ
Max
Units
Conditions
MP10
TFPWM
PWM Output Fall Time
—
—
—
ns
See parameter DO32
MP11
TRPWM
PWM Output Rise
Time
—
—
—
ns
See parameter DO31
MP20
TFD
Fault Input ↓ to PWM
I/O Change
—
—
50
ns
MP30
TFH
Minimum Pulse Width
50
—
—
ns
Note 1:
These parameters are characterized but not tested in manufacturing.
DS70141E-page 184
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
dsPIC30F3010/3011
FIGURE 23-14:
QEA/QEB INPUT CHARACTERISTICS
TQ36
QEA
(input)
TQ30
TQ31
TQ35
QEB
(input)
TQ41
TQ40
TQ30
TQ31
TQ35
QEB
Internal
TABLE 23-30: QUADRATURE DECODER TIMING REQUIREMENTS
Standard Operating Conditions: 2.5V to 5.5V
(unless otherwise stated)
Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for Industrial
-40°C ≤ TA ≤ +125°C for Extended
AC CHARACTERISTICS
Param
No.
Characteristic(1)
Symbol
Typ(2)
Max
Units
Conditions
TQ30
TQUL
Quadrature Input Low Time
6 TCY
—
ns
TQ31
TQUH
Quadrature Input High Time
6 TCY
—
ns
TQ35
TQUIN
Quadrature Input Period
12 TCY
—
ns
TQ36
TQUP
Quadrature Phase Period
3 TCY
—
ns
TQ40
TQUFL
Filter Time to Recognize Low,
with Digital Filter
3 * N * TCY
—
ns
N = 1, 2, 4, 16, 32, 64,
128 and 256 (Note 2)
TQ41
TQUFH
Filter Time to Recognize High,
with Digital Filter
3 * N * TCY
—
ns
N = 1, 2, 4, 16, 32, 64,
128 and 256 (Note 2)
Note 1:
2:
These parameters are characterized but not tested in manufacturing.
N = Index Channel Digital Filter Clock Divide Select bits. Refer to Section 16. “Quadrature Encoder
Interface (QEI)” in the”dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual” (DS70046).
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70141E-page 185
dsPIC30F3010/3011
FIGURE 23-15:
QEI MODULE INDEX PULSE TIMING CHARACTERISTICS
QEA
(input)
QEB
(input)
Ungated
Index
TQ50
TQ51
Index Internal
TQ55
Position
TABLE 23-31: QEI INDEX PULSE TIMING REQUIREMENTS
AC CHARACTERISTICS
Param
No.
Symbol
TQ50
TqIL
TQ51
TQ55
Note 1:
2:
Standard Operating Conditions: 2.5V to 5.5V
(unless otherwise stated)
Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for Industrial
-40°C ≤ TA ≤ +125°C for Extended
Characteristic(1)
Min
Max
Units
Conditions
Filter Time to Recognize Low,
with Digital Filter
3 * N * TCY
—
ns
N = 1, 2, 4, 16, 32, 64,
128 and 256 (Note 2)
TqiH
Filter Time to Recognize High,
with Digital Filter
3 * N * TCY
—
ns
N = 1, 2, 4, 16, 32, 64,
128 and 256 (Note 2)
Tqidxr
Index Pulse Recognized to Position
Counter Reset (ungated index)
3 TCY
—
ns
These parameters are characterized but not tested in manufacturing.
Alignment of index pulses to QEA and QEB is shown for position counter reset timing only. Shown for
forward direction only (QEA leads QEB). Same timing applies for reverse direction (QEA lags QEB), but
index pulse recognition occurs on falling edge.
DS70141E-page 186
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
dsPIC30F3010/3011
FIGURE 23-16:
SPI MODULE MASTER MODE (CKE = 0) TIMING CHARACTERISTICS
SCKx
(CKP = 0)
SP11
SP10
SP21
SP20
SP20
SP21
SCKx
(CKP = 1)
SP35
MSb
SDOx
BIT14 - - - - - -1
SP31
SDIx
LSb
SP30
MSb In
LSb In
BIT14 - - - -1
SP40 SP41
Note: Refer to Figure 23-2 for load conditions.
TABLE 23-32: SPI MASTER MODE (CKE = 0) TIMING REQUIREMENTS
Standard Operating Conditions: 2.5V to 5.5V
(unless otherwise stated)
Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for Industrial
-40°C ≤ TA ≤ +125°C for Extended
AC CHARACTERISTICS
Param
No.
Symbol
Characteristic(1)
Min
Typ
Max
Units
Conditions
SP10
TscL
SCKX Output Low Time(2)
TCY/2
—
—
ns
SP11
TscH
SCKX Output High Time(2)
TCY/2
—
—
ns
—
—
—
ns
See parameter
DO32
Time(3)
SP20
TscF
SCKX Output Fall
SP21
TscR
SCKX Output Rise Time(3)
—
—
—
ns
See parameter
DO31
SP30
TdoF
SDOX Data Output Fall Time(3)
—
—
—
ns
See parameter
DO32
SP31
TdoR
SDOX Data Output Rise Time(3)
—
—
—
ns
See parameter
DO31
SP35
TscH2doV,
TscL2doV
SDOX Data Output Valid after
SCKX Edge
—
—
30
ns
SP40
TdiV2scH,
TdiV2scL
Setup Time of SDIX Data Input
to SCKX Edge
20
—
—
ns
SP41
TscH2diL,
TscL2diL
Hold Time of SDIX Data Input
to SCKX Edge
20
—
—
ns
Note 1:
2:
3:
These parameters are characterized but not tested in manufacturing.
The minimum clock period for SCKx is 100 ns. Therefore, the clock generated in Master mode must not
violate this specification.
Assumes 50 pF load on all SPI pins.
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70141E-page 187
dsPIC30F3010/3011
FIGURE 23-17:
SPI MODULE MASTER MODE (CKE =1) TIMING CHARACTERISTICS
SP36
SCKX
(CKP = 0)
SP11
SCKX
(CKP = 1)
SP10
SP21
SP20
SP20
SP21
SP35
BIT14 - - - - - -1
MSb
SDOX
SP40
SDIX
LSb
SP30,SP31
MSb IN
BIT14 - - - -1
LSb IN
SP41
Note: Refer to Figure 23-2 for load conditions.
TABLE 23-33: SPI MODULE MASTER MODE (CKE = 1) TIMING REQUIREMENTS
Standard Operating Conditions: 2.5V to 5.5V
(unless otherwise stated)
Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for Industrial
-40°C ≤ TA ≤ +125°C for Extended
AC CHARACTERISTICS
Param
No.
Symbol
Characteristic(1)
Min
Typ
Max
Units
Conditions
SP10
TscL
SCKX Output Low Time(2)
TCY/2
—
—
ns
SP11
TscH
SCKX Output High Time(2)
TCY/2
—
—
ns
—
—
—
ns
See parameter
DO32
Time(3)
SP20
TscF
SCKX Output Fall
SP21
TscR
SCKX Output Rise Time(3)
—
—
—
ns
See parameter
DO31
SP30
TdoF
SDOX Data Output Fall
Time(3)
—
—
—
ns
See parameter
DO32
SP31
TdoR
SDOX Data Output Rise
Time(3)
—
—
—
ns
See parameter
DO31
SP35
TscH2doV,
TscL2doV
SDOX Data Output Valid After
SCKX Edge
—
—
30
ns
SP36
TdoV2sc,
TdoV2scL
SDOX Data Output Setup to
First SCKX Edge
30
—
—
ns
SP40
TdiV2scH,
TdiV2scL
Setup Time of SDIX Data
Input to SCKX Edge
20
—
—
ns
SP41
TscH2diL,
TscL2diL
Hold Time of SDIX Data Input
to SCKX Edge
20
—
—
ns
Note 1:
2:
3:
These parameters are characterized but not tested in manufacturing.
The minimum clock period for SCKx is 100 ns. Therefore, the clock generated in master mode must not
violate this specification.
Assumes 50 pF load on all SPI pins.
DS70141E-page 188
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
dsPIC30F3010/3011
FIGURE 23-18:
SPI MODULE SLAVE MODE (CKE = 0) TIMING CHARACTERISTICS
SSX
SP52
SP50
SCKX
(CKP = 0)
SP71
SP70
SP73
SP72
SP72
SP73
SCKX
(CKP = 1)
SP35
MSb
SDOX
BIT14 - - - - - -1
LSb
SP51
SP30,SP31
SDIX
MSb In
BIT14 - - - -1
LSb In
SP41
SP40
Note: Refer to Figure 23-2 for load conditions.
TABLE 23-34: SPI MODULE SLAVE MODE (CKE = 0) TIMING REQUIREMENTS
Standard Operating Conditions: 2.5V to 5.5V
(unless otherwise stated)
Operating temperature
-40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for Industrial
-40°C ≤ TA ≤ +125°C for
Extended
AC CHARACTERISTICS
Param
No.
Characteristic(1)
Symbol
Min
Typ(2)
Max
Units
—
—
ns
SP70
TscL
SCKX Input Low Time
30
SP71
TscH
SCKX Input High Time
30
—
—
ns
SP72
TscF
SCKX Input Fall Time(3)
—
10
25
ns
Time(3)
Conditions
SP73
TscR
SCKX Input Rise
—
10
25
ns
SP30
TdoF
SDOX Data Output Fall Time(3)
—
—
—
ns
See parameter
DO32
SP31
TdoR
SDOX Data Output Rise Time(3)
—
—
—
ns
See parameter
DO31
SP35
TscH2doV, SDOX Data Output Valid after
TscL2doV SCKX Edge
—
—
30
ns
SP40
TdiV2scH, Setup Time of SDIX Data Input
TdiV2scL to SCKX Edge
20
—
—
ns
SP41
TscH2diL,
TscL2diL
20
—
—
ns
SP50
TssL2scH, SSX↓ to SCKX↑ or SCKX↓ Input
TssL2scL
120
—
—
ns
SP51
TssH2doZ SSX↑ to SDOX Output High-Impedance(3)
10
—
50
ns
SP52
TscH2ssH SSX after SCKx Edge
TscL2ssH
1.5 TCY + 40
—
—
ns
Note 1:
2:
3:
Hold Time of SDIX Data Input
to SCKX Edge
—
These parameters are characterized but not tested in manufacturing.
Data in “Typ” column is at 5V, 25°C unless otherwise stated. Parameters are for design guidance only and
are not tested.
Assumes 50 pF load on all SPI pins.
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70141E-page 189
dsPIC30F3010/3011
FIGURE 23-19:
SPI MODULE SLAVE MODE (CKE = 1) TIMING CHARACTERISTICS
SP60
SSX
SP52
SP50
SCKX
(CKP = 0)
SP71
SP70
SP73
SP72
SP72
SP73
SCKX
(CKP = 1)
SP35
SP52
MSb
SDOX
BIT14 - - - - - -1
LSb
SP30,SP31
SDIX
MSb In
BIT14 - - - -1
SP51
LSb In
SP41
SP40
Note: Refer to Figure 23-2 for load conditions.
DS70141E-page 190
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
dsPIC30F3010/3011
TABLE 23-35: SPI MODULE SLAVE MODE (CKE = 1) TIMING REQUIREMENTS
Standard Operating Conditions: 2.5V to 5.5V
(unless otherwise stated)
Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for Industrial
-40°C ≤ TA ≤ +125°C for Extended
AC CHARACTERISTICS
Param
No.
Characteristic(1)
Symbol
Min
Typ(2)
Max
Units
TscL
SCKX Input Low Time
30
—
—
ns
SP71
TscH
SCKX
Input High Time
30
—
—
ns
SP72
TscF
SCKX Input Fall Time(3)
—
10
25
ns
SP70
(3)
Conditions
SP73
TscR
SCKX Input Rise Time
—
10
25
ns
SP30
TdoF
SDOX Data Output Fall Time(3)
—
—
—
ns
See parameter
DO32
SP31
TdoR
SDOX Data Output Rise Time(3)
—
—
—
ns
See parameter
DO31
SP35
TscH2doV, SDOX Data Output Valid after
TscL2doV SCKX Edge
—
—
30
ns
SP40
TdiV2scH, Setup Time of SDIX Data Input
TdiV2scL to SCKX Edge
20
—
—
ns
SP41
TscH2diL,
TscL2diL
20
—
—
ns
SP50
TssL2scH, SSX↓ to SCKX↓ or SCKX↑ Input
TssL2scL
120
—
—
ns
SP51
TssH2doZ SSX↑ to SDOX Output
High-Impedance(4)
10
—
50
ns
SP52
TscH2ssH
TscL2ssH
SSX↑ after SCKX Edge
1.5 TCY + 40
—
—
ns
SP60
TssL2doV
SDOX Data Output Valid after
SSX Edge
—
—
50
ns
Note 1:
2:
3:
4:
Hold Time of SDIX Data Input
to SCKX Edge
These parameters are characterized but not tested in manufacturing.
Data in “Typ” column is at 5V, 25°C unless otherwise stated. Parameters are for design guidance only and
are not tested.
The minimum clock period for SCx is 100 ns. Therefore, the clock generated in Master mode must not
violate this specification.
Assumes 50 pF load on all SPI pins.
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70141E-page 191
dsPIC30F3010/3011
FIGURE 23-20:
I2C™ BUS START/STOP BITS TIMING CHARACTERISTICS (MASTER MODE)
SCL
IM31
IM34
IM30
IM33
SDA
Stop
Condition
Start
Condition
Note: Refer to Figure 23-2 for load conditions.
FIGURE 23-21:
I2C™ BUS DATA TIMING CHARACTERISTICS (MASTER MODE)
IM20
IM21
IM11
IM10
SCL
IM11
IM26
IM10
IM25
IM33
SDA
In
IM40
IM40
IM45
SDA
Out
Note: Refer to Figure 23-2 for load conditions.
DS70141E-page 192
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
dsPIC30F3010/3011
TABLE 23-36: I2C™ BUS DATA TIMING REQUIREMENTS (MASTER MODE)
)
Standard Operating Conditions: 2.5V to 5.5V
(unless otherwise stated)
Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for Industrial
-40°C ≤ TA ≤ +125°C for Extended
AC CHARACTERISTICS
Param
Symbol
No.
IM10
IM11
Min(1)
Max
Units
TLO:SCL Clock Low Time 100 kHz mode
TCY/2 (BRG + 1)
—
μs
400 kHz mode
TCY/2 (BRG + 1)
—
μs
1 MHz mode(2)
TCY/2 (BRG + 1)
—
μs
Clock High Time 100 kHz mode
TCY/2 (BRG + 1)
—
μs
400 kHz mode
TCY/2 (BRG + 1)
—
μs
(2)
THI:SCL
Characteristic
TCY/2 (BRG + 1)
—
μs
100 kHz mode
—
300
ns
400 kHz mode
20 + 0.1 CB
300
ns
1 MHz mode(2)
—
100
ns
100 kHz mode
—
1000
ns
400 kHz mode
20 + 0.1 CB
300
ns
1 MHz mode(2)
—
300
ns
100 kHz mode
250
—
ns
400 kHz mode
100
—
ns
1 MHz mode(2)
—
—
ns
1 MHz mode
IM20
TF:SCL
IM21
TR:SCL
IM25
SDA and SCL
Fall Time
SDA and SCL
Rise Time
TSU:DAT Data Input
Setup Time
IM26
THD:DAT Data Input
Hold Time
IM30
TSU:STA
IM31
Start Condition
Setup Time
THD:STA Start Condition
Hold Time
TSU:STO Stop Condition
Setup Time
IM33
IM34
THD:STO Stop Condition
Hold Time
100 kHz mode
0
—
ns
400 kHz mode
0
0.9
μs
1 MHz mode(2)
—
—
ns
100 kHz mode
TCY/2 (BRG + 1)
—
μs
400 kHz mode
TCY/2 (BRG + 1)
—
μs
1 MHz mode(2)
TCY/2 (BRG + 1)
—
μs
100 kHz mode
TCY/2 (BRG + 1)
—
μs
400 kHz mode
TCY/2 (BRG + 1)
—
μs
1 MHz mode(2)
TCY/2 (BRG + 1)
—
μs
100 kHz mode
TCY/2 (BRG + 1)
—
μs
400 kHz mode
TCY/2 (BRG + 1)
—
μs
1 MHz mode(2)
TCY/2 (BRG + 1)
—
μs
100 kHz mode
TCY/2 (BRG + 1)
—
ns
400 kHz mode
TCY/2 (BRG + 1)
—
ns
(2)
TCY/2 (BRG + 1)
—
ns
100 kHz mode
—
3500
ns
400 kHz mode
—
1000
ns
1 MHz mode(2)
—
—
ns
1 MHz mode
IM40
TAA:SCL
IM45
Output Valid
From Clock
TBF:SDA Bus Free Time
100 kHz mode
4.7
—
μs
400 kHz mode
1.3
—
μs
1 MHz mode(2)
IM50
CB
Note 1:
2:
Bus Capacitive Loading
—
—
μs
—
400
pF
Conditions
CB is specified to be
from 10 to 400 pF
CB is specified to be
from 10 to 400 pF
Only relevant for
Repeated Start
condition
After this period the
first clock pulse is
generated
Time the bus must be
free before a new
transmission can start
BRG is the value of the I2C™ Baud Rate Generator. Refer to Section 21. “Inter-Integrated Circuit (I2C)”
in the”dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual” (DS70046).
Maximum pin capacitance = 10 pF for all I2C pins (for 1 MHz mode only).
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70141E-page 193
dsPIC30F3010/3011
FIGURE 23-22:
I2C™ BUS START/STOP BITS TIMING CHARACTERISTICS (SLAVE MODE)
SCL
IS34
IS31
IS30
IS33
SDA
Stop
Condition
Start
Condition
FIGURE 23-23:
I2C™ BUS DATA TIMING CHARACTERISTICS (SLAVE MODE)
IS20
IS21
IS11
IS10
SCL
IS30
IS26
IS31
IS33
IS25
SDA
In
IS45
IS40
IS40
SDA
Out
TABLE 23-37: I2C™ BUS DATA TIMING REQUIREMENTS (SLAVE MODE)
Standard Operating Conditions: 2.5V to 5.5V
(unless otherwise stated)
Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for Industrial
-40°C ≤ TA ≤ +125°C for Extended
AC CHARACTERISTICS
Param
No.
IS10
IS11
IS20
IS21
Note 1:
Symbol
TLO:SCL
THI:SCL
TF:SCL
TR:SCL
Characteristic
Clock Low Time
Clock High Time
SDA and SCL
Fall Time
SDA and SCL
Rise Time
Min
Max
Units
Conditions
100 kHz mode
4.7
—
μs
Device must operate at a
minimum of 1.5 MHz
400 kHz mode
1.3
—
μs
Device must operate at a
minimum of 10 MHz.
1 MHz mode(1)
0.5
—
μs
100 kHz mode
4.0
—
μs
Device must operate at a
minimum of 1.5 MHz
400 kHz mode
0.6
—
μs
Device must operate at a
minimum of 10 MHz
1 MHz mode(1)
0.5
—
μs
100 kHz mode
—
300
ns
400 kHz mode
20 + 0.1 CB
300
ns
1 MHz mode(1)
—
100
ns
100 kHz mode
—
1000
ns
400 kHz mode
20 + 0.1 CB
300
ns
1 MHz mode(1)
—
300
ns
CB is specified to be from
10 to 400 pF
CB is specified to be from
10 to 400 pF
Maximum pin capacitance = 10 pF for all I2C™ pins (for 1 MHz mode only).
DS70141E-page 194
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
dsPIC30F3010/3011
TABLE 23-37: I2C™ BUS DATA TIMING REQUIREMENTS (SLAVE MODE) (CONTINUED)
Standard Operating Conditions: 2.5V to 5.5V
(unless otherwise stated)
Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for Industrial
-40°C ≤ TA ≤ +125°C for Extended
AC CHARACTERISTICS
Param
No.
IS25
Symbol
TSU:DAT
Characteristic
Data Input
Setup Time
Min
Max
Units
100 kHz mode
250
—
ns
400 kHz mode
100
—
ns
(1)
1 MHz mode
IS26
IS30
IS31
IS33
IS34
IS40
THD:DAT
TSU:STA
THD:STA
TSU:STO
THD:STO
TAA:SCL
Data Input
Hold Time
Start Condition
Setup Time
Start Condition
Hold Time
Stop Condition
Setup Time
100
—
ns
100 kHz mode
0
—
ns
400 kHz mode
0
0.9
μs
1 MHz mode(1)
0
0.3
μs
100 kHz mode
4.7
—
μs
400 kHz mode
0.6
—
μs
1 MHz mode(1)
0.25
—
μs
100 kHz mode
4.0
—
μs
400 kHz mode
0.6
—
μs
1 MHz mode(1)
0.25
—
μs
100 kHz mode
4.7
—
μs
400 kHz mode
0.6
—
μs
1 MHz mode(1)
0.6
—
μs
Stop Condition
100 kHz mode
4000
—
ns
Hold Time
400 kHz mode
600
—
ns
1 MHz mode(1)
250
100 kHz mode
0
3500
ns
400 kHz mode
0
1000
ns
Output Valid
From Clock
1 MHz
IS45
IS50
Note 1:
TBF:SDA
CB
Bus Free Time
Bus Capacitive
Loading
mode(1)
Conditions
Only relevant for Repeated
Start condition
After this period the first
clock pulse is generated
ns
0
350
ns
100 kHz mode
4.7
—
μs
400 kHz mode
1.3
—
μs
1 MHz mode(1)
0.5
—
μs
—
400
pF
Time the bus must be free
before a new transmission
can start
Maximum pin capacitance = 10 pF for all I2C™ pins (for 1 MHz mode only).
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70141E-page 195
dsPIC30F3010/3011
TABLE 23-38: 10-BIT HIGH-SPEED ADC MODULE SPECIFICATIONS
Standard Operating Conditions: 2.5V to 5.5V
(unless otherwise stated)
Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for Industrial
-40°C ≤ TA ≤ +125°C for Extended
AC CHARACTERISTICS
Param
No.
Symbol
Characteristic(1)
Min.
Typ
Max.
Units
Conditions
Device Supply
AD01
AVDD
Module VDD Supply
Greater of
VDD – 0.3
or 2.7
—
Lesser of
VDD + 0.3
or 5.5
V
AD02
AVSS
Module VSS Supply
VSS – 0.3
—
VSS + 0.3
V
AD05
VREFH
Reference Voltage High
AVDD
V
V
Reference Inputs
AD06
VREFL
Reference Voltage Low
AD07
VREF
Absolute Reference Voltage
AD08
IREF
Current Drain
AD10
VINH-VINL Full-Scale Input Span
AVSS + 2.7
—
AVSS
—
AVDD – 2.7
AVSS – 0.3
—
AVDD + 0.3
V
—
200
.001
300
3
μA
μA
VREFH
V
A/D operating
A/D off
Analog Input
VREFL
AD12
—
Leakage Current
—
±0.001
±0.244
μA
VINL = AVSS = VREFL = 0V,
AVDD = VREFH = 5V
Source Impedance = 5 kΩ
AD13
—
Leakage Current
—
±0.001
±0.244
μA
VINL = AVSS = VREFL = 0V,
AVDD = VREFH = 3V
Source Impedance = 5 kΩ
Recommended Impedance
of Analog Voltage Source
—
—
5K
Ω
AD17
RIN
DC Accuracy(2)
AD20
Nr
Resolution
AD21
INL
Integral Nonlinearity
—
±1
±1
LSb VINL = AVSS = VREFL = 0V,
AVDD = VREFH = 5V
AD21A INL
Integral Nonlinearity
—
±1
±1
LSb VINL = AVSS = VREFL = 0V,
AVDD = VREFH = 3V
AD22
DNL
Differential Nonlinearity
—
±1
±1
LSb VINL = AVSS = VREFL = 0V,
AVDD = VREFH = 5V
AD22A DNL
Differential Nonlinearity
—
±1
±1
LSb VINL = AVSS = VREFL = 0V,
AVDD = VREFH = 3V
AD23
GERR
Gain Error
+1
±5
±6
LSb VINL = AVSS = VREFL = 0V,
AVDD = VREFH = 5V
AD23A GERR
Gain Error
+1
±5
±6
LSb VINL = AVSS = VREFL = 0V,
AVDD = VREFH = 3V
Note 1:
2:
3:
10 data bits
bits
These parameters are characterized but not tested in manufacturing.
Measurements taken with external VREF+ and VREF- used as the ADC voltage references.
The A/D conversion result never decreases with an increase in the input voltage, and has no missing
codes.
DS70141E-page 196
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
dsPIC30F3010/3011
TABLE 23-38: 10-BIT HIGH-SPEED ADC MODULE SPECIFICATIONS (CONTINUED)
Standard Operating Conditions: 2.5V to 5.5V
(unless otherwise stated)
Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for Industrial
-40°C ≤ TA ≤ +125°C for Extended
AC CHARACTERISTICS
Param
No.
Symbol
Characteristic(1)
Min.
Typ
Max.
Units
Conditions
EOFF
Offset Error(2)
±1
±2
±3
LSb VINL = AVSS = VREFL = 0V,
AVDD = VREFH = 5V
AD24A EOFF
Offset Error(2)
±1
±2
±3
LSb VINL = AVSS = VREFL = 0V,
AVDD = VREFH = 3V
AD25
Monotonicity(3)
—
—
—
—
AD24
—
Guaranteed
Dynamic Performance
AD30
THD
Total Harmonic Distortion
—
-64
-67
dB
AD31
SINAD
Signal to Noise and
Distortion
—
57
58
dB
AD32
SFDR
Spurious Free Dynamic
Range
—
67
71
dB
AD33
FNYQ
Input Signal Bandwidth
—
—
500
kHz
AD34
ENOB
Effective Number of Bits
9.29
9.41
—
bits
Note 1:
2:
3:
These parameters are characterized but not tested in manufacturing.
Measurements taken with external VREF+ and VREF- used as the ADC voltage references.
The A/D conversion result never decreases with an increase in the input voltage, and has no missing
codes.
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70141E-page 197
dsPIC30F3010/3011
FIGURE 23-24:
10-BIT HIGH-SPEED ADC TIMING CHARACTERISTICS
(CHPS = 01, SIMSAM = 0, ASAM = 0, SSRC = 000)
AD50
ADCLK
Instruction
Execution SET SAMP
CLEAR SAMP
SAMP
ch0_dischrg
ch0_samp
ch1_dischrg
ch1_samp
eoc
AD61
AD60
AD55
TSAMP
AD55
DONE
ADIF
ADRES(0)
ADRES(1)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
5
6
7
8
1 — Software sets ADCON. SAMP to start sampling.
2 — Sampling starts after discharge period.
TSAMP is described in Section 17, “10-Bit A/D Converter” of the “dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual”, (DS70046).
3 — Software clears ADCON. SAMP to start conversion.
4 — Sampling ends, conversion sequence starts.
5 — Convert bit 9.
6 — Convert bit 8.
8 — Convert bit 0.
9 — One TAD for end of conversion.
DS70141E-page 198
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
dsPIC30F3010/3011
FIGURE 23-25:
10-BIT HIGH-SPEED ADC TIMING CHARACTERISTICS
(CHPS = 01, SIMSAM = 0, ASAM = 1, SSRC = 111, SAMC = 00001)
AD50
ADCLK
Instruction
Execution SET ADON
SAMP
ch0_dischrg
ch0_samp
ch1_dischrg
ch1_samp
eoc
TSAMP
AD55
TSAMP
AD55
TCONV
DONE
ADIF
ADRES(0)
ADRES(1)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
3
4
5
6
8
3
1 — Software sets ADCON. ADON to start AD operation.
5 — Convert bit 0.
2 — Sampling starts after discharge period.
TSAMP is described in Section 17. “10-Bit A/D Converter”
of the”dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual” (DS70046).
6 — One TAD for end of conversion.
3 — Convert bit 9.
4 — Convert bit 8.
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
4
7 — Begin conversion of next channel
8 — Sample for time specified by SAMC.
TSAMP is described in Section 17. “10-Bit
A/D Converter” of the”dsPIC30F Family
Reference Manual” (DS70046).
DS70141E-page 199
dsPIC30F3010/3011
TABLE 23-39: 10-BIT HIGH-SPEED A/D CONVERSION TIMING REQUIREMENTS
Standard Operating Conditions: 2.5V to 5.5V
(unless otherwise stated)
Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for Industrial
-40°C ≤ TA ≤ +125°C for Extended
AC CHARACTERISTICS
Param
Symbol
No.
Characteristic
Min.
Typ
Max.
Units
Conditions
Clock Parameters
AD50
TAD
A/D Clock Period
AD51
tRC
A/D Internal RC Oscillator Period
84
—
—
ns
700
900
1100
ns
See Table 20-2(1)
Conversion Rate
AD55
tCONV
Conversion Time
—
12 TAD
—
—
AD56
FCNV
Throughput Rate
—
1.0
—
Msps
See Table 20-2(1)
AD57
TSAMP
Sample Time
1 TAD
—
—
—
See Table 20-2(1)
Timing Parameters
AD60
tPCS
Conversion Start from Sample
Trigger
AD61
tPSS
AD62
AD63
Note 1:
2:
—
1.0 TAD
—
—
Sample Start from Setting
Sample (SAMP) Bit
0.5 TAD
—
1.5 TAD
—
tCSS
Conversion Completion to
Sample Start (ASAM = 1)
—
0.5 TAD
—
—
tDPU(2)
Time to Stabilize Analog Stage
from A/D Off to A/D On
—
—
20
μs
Because the sample caps will eventually lose charge, clock periods above 100 μsec can affect linearity
performance, especially at elevated temperatures.
tDPU is the time required for the ADC module to stabilize when it is turned on (ADCON1<ADON> = 1).
During this time the ADC result is indeterminate.
DS70141E-page 200
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
dsPIC30F3010/3011
24.0
PACKAGING INFORMATION
24.1
Package Marking Information
28-Lead PDIP (Skinny DIP)
Example
dsPIC30F3010
30I/SP e3
0810017
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
YYWWNNN
28-Lead SOIC
Example
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
YYWWNNN
40-Lead PDIP
0810017
Example
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
YYWWNNN
44-Lead QFN
dsPIC30F3011
30I/P e3
0810017
Example
XXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXX
YYWWNNN
Legend: XX...X
Y
YY
WW
NNN
e3
*
Note:
dsPIC30F3010
30I/SO e3
dsPIC
30F3011
30I/ML e3
0810017
Customer-specific information
Year code (last digit of calendar year)
Year code (last 2 digits of calendar year)
Week code (week of January 1 is week ‘01’)
Alphanumeric traceability code
Pb-free JEDEC designator for Matte Tin (Sn)
This package is Pb-free. The Pb-free JEDEC designator ( e3 )
can be found on the outer packaging for this package.
In the event the full Microchip part number cannot be marked on one line, it will
be carried over to the next line, thus limiting the number of available
characters for customer-specific information.
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70141E-page 201
dsPIC30F3010/3011
Package Marking Information (Continued)
44-Lead TQFP
XXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXX
YYWWNNN
44-Lead QFN
XXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXX
YYWWNNN
DS70141E-page 202
Example
dsPIC
30F3011
30I/PT e3
0810017
Example
dsPIC
30F3011
30I/ML e3
0810017
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
dsPIC30F3010/3011
24.2
Package Details
!"
3 & ' !&" & 4# *!( !!& 4 %& &#&
&& 255***' '5 4
N
NOTE 1
E1
1
2 3
D
E
A2
A
L
c
b1
A1
b
e
eB
6&!
'! 9'&!
7"') %!
7,8.
7
7
&
;
<
& &
7:
1,
=
=
-
1!& &
=
=
.
-
--
##4
"# & 4!!
"# >#&
##4>#&
.
<
: 9&
-
-?
9
-
<
)
)
<
1
=
=
& &
9#
6
4!!
9#>#&
9 * 9#>#&
: * +
-
!"
!"#$%&" ' ()"&'"!&) &#*& & & # +%&, & !&
- '! !#.# &"#' #%! & "! ! #%! & "! !! &$#/ !#
'! #& .0
1,2 1!'! &$& "! **& "&& !
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
* ,1
DS70141E-page 203
dsPIC30F3010/3011
# # $ % &'( #)
!"
3 & ' !&" & 4# *!( !!& 4 %& &#&
&& 255***' '5 4
D
N
E
E1
NOTE 1
1 2 3
e
b
h
α
A2
A
h
c
φ
L
A1
L1
6&!
'! 9'&!
7"') %!
β
99. .
7
7:
7
;
<
&
: 8 &
=
=
=
=
=
-
##4
4!!
&# %%+
1,
: >#&
.
##4>#&
.
1,
: 9&
1,
, '% @
& A
3
&9&
9
3
& &
9
3
&
?
-1,
=
=
.3
I
B
=
<B
<
=
--
9#>#&
)
-
=
# %&
D
B
=
B
# %&1 && '
E
B
=
9#
4!!
B
!"
!"#$%&" ' ()"&'"!&) &#*& & & # +%&, & !&
- '! !#.# &"#' #%! & "! ! #%! & "! !! &$#'' !#
'! #& .0
1,2 1!'! &$& "! **& "&& !
.32 % '! ("!"*& "&& (% % '& " !! DS70141E-page 204
* ,1
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
dsPIC30F3010/3011
* + !"
3 & ' !&" & 4# *!( !!& 4 %& &#&
&& 255***' '5 4
N
NOTE 1
E1
1 2 3
D
E
A2
A
L
c
b1
A1
b
e
eB
6&!
'! 9'&!
7"') %!
7,8.
7
7
&
;
& &
7:
1,
=
=
=
1!& &
=
=
.
=
?
##4
"# & 4!!
"# >#&
##4>#&
.
<
=
<
: 9&
<
=
9
=
<
=
)
-
=
)
=
-
1
=
=
& &
9#
6
4!!
9#>#&
9 * 9#>#&
: * +
!"
!"#$%&" ' ()"&'"!&) &#*& & & # +%&, & !&
- '! !#.# &"#' #%! & "! ! #%! & "! !! &$#/ !#
'! #& .0
1,2 1!'! &$& "! **& "&& !
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
* ,?1
DS70141E-page 205
dsPIC30F3010/3011
** , -% ! . / 0 ,-!
!"
3 & ' !&" & 4# *!( !!& 4 %& &#&
&& 255***' '5 4
D
D2
EXPOSED
PAD
e
E
E2
b
2
2
1
N
1
N
NOTE 1
TOP VIEW
K
L
BOTTOM VIEW
A
A3
A1
6&!
'! 9'&!
7"') %!
99. .
7
7
7:
;
&
: 8 &
<
&# %%
, &&
4!!
-
: >#&
.
.$
.
!##>#&
: 9&
.$
!##9&
?1,
.3
<1,
?-
?
?<
<1,
?-
?
, &&>#&
)
-
-<
, &&9&
9
-
, &&& .$ !##
C
=
!"
!"#$%&" ' ()"&'"!&) &#*& & & # 4!!*!"&#
- '! #& .0
1,2 1!'! &$& "! **& "&& !
.32 % '! ("!"*& "&& (% % '& " !! DS70141E-page 206
?<
=
* ,-1
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
dsPIC30F3010/3011
** , -% ! . / 0 ,-!
!"
3 & ' !&" & 4# *!( !!& 4 %& &#&
&& 255***' '5 4
]
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70141E-page 207
dsPIC30F3010/3011
** 12
!"
, -3 1 40404 % ' 1,-
3 & ' !&" & 4# *!( !!& 4 %& &#&
&& 255***' '5 4
D
D1
E
e
E1
N
b
NOTE 1
1 2 3
NOTE 2
α
A
c
φ
β
L
A1
6&!
'! 9'&!
7"') %9#!
A2
L1
99. .
7
7
7:
;
9#&
: 8 &
=
=
=
?
##4
4!!
&# %%
3
&9&
9
3
& &
9
3
&
: >#&
I
<1,
.3
B
-B
B
.
1,
: 9&
1,
##4>#&
.
1,
##49&
1,
9#
=
9#>#&
4!!
)
-
-
# %&
D
B
B
-B
# %&1 && '
E
B
B
-B
!"
!"#$%&" ' ()"&'"!&) &#*& & & # , '% !& ! & D!E' - '! !#.# &"#' #%! & "! ! #%! & "! !! &$#'' !#
'! #& .0
1,2 1!'! &$& "! **& "&& !
.32 % '! ("!"*& "&& (% % '& " !! DS70141E-page 208
* ,?1
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
dsPIC30F3010/3011
** 12
!"
, -3 1 40404 % ' 1,-
3 & ' !&" & 4# *!( !!& 4 %& &#&
&& 255***' '5 4
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70141E-page 209
dsPIC30F3010/3011
** , -% ! . / 0 ,-!
!"
3 & ' !&" & 4# *!( !!& 4 %& &#&
&& 255***' '5 4
D
D2
EXPOSED
PAD
e
E
E2
b
2
2
1
N
1
N
NOTE 1
TOP VIEW
K
L
BOTTOM VIEW
A
A3
A1
6&!
'! 9'&!
7"') %!
99. .
7
7
7:
;
&
: 8 &
<
&# %%
, &&
4!!
-
: >#&
.
.$
.
!##>#&
: 9&
.$
!##9&
?1,
.3
<1,
?-
?
?<
<1,
?-
?
, &&>#&
)
-
-<
, &&9&
9
-
, &&& .$ !##
C
=
!"
!"#$%&" ' ()"&'"!&) &#*& & & # 4!!*!"&#
- '! #& .0
1,2 1!'! &$& "! **& "&& !
.32 % '! ("!"*& "&& (% % '& " !! DS70141E-page 210
?<
=
* ,-1
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
dsPIC30F3010/3011
** , -% ! . / 0 ,-!
!"
3 & ' !&" & 4# *!( !!& 4 %& &#&
&& 255***' '5 4
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70141E-page 211
dsPIC30F3010/3011
NOTES:
DS70141E-page 212
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
dsPIC30F3010/3011
APPENDIX A:
REVISION HISTORY
This revision reflects these updates:
Revision B (May 2006)
Previous versions of this data sheet contained
Advance or Preliminary Information. They were
distributed with incomplete characterization data.
This revision reflects these updates:
• Supported I2C Slave Addresses
(see Table 17-1)
• ADC Conversion Clock selection to allow 1 Msps
operation (see Section 19.0 “10-bit High-Speed
Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC) Module”)
• Operating Current (IDD) Specifications
(see Table 23-5)
• Power-Down Current (IPD)
(see Table 23-7)
• I/O pin Input Specifications
(see Table 23-8)
• BOR voltage limits
(see Table 23-10)
• Watchdog Timer time-out limits
(see Table 23-20)
Revision C (September 2006)
Updates
made
Characteristics”.
to
Section 23.0
“Electrical
Revision D (January 2007)
This revision includes updates to the packaging
diagrams.
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
Revision E (April 2008)
• Added OSCTUN register information and updated
the OSCCON register information (removed TUN
bits) in System Integration Register Map (see
Table 20-7)
• Changed the location of the input reference in the
10-Bit High-Speed ADC Functional Block
Diagram (see Figure 19-1)
• Added Fuse Configuration Register (FICD) details
(see Section 20.6 “Device Configuration
Registers” and Table 20-8)
• Added Note 2 in Device Configuration Registers
table (Table 20-8)
• Updated FOSC register bit definition in Device
Configuration Registers table (Table 20-8)
• Electrical Specifications:
- Updated values for parameters DO10, DO16,
DO20, and DO26 (see Table 23-9)
- 10-Bit High-Speed ADC tPDU timing parameter (time to stabilize) has been updated from
20 µs typical to 20 µs maximum (see
Table 23-39)
- Parameter OS65 (Internal RC Accuracy) has
been expanded to reflect multiple Min and
Max values for different temperatures (see
Table 23-18)
- Parameter DC12 (RAM Data Retention Voltage) has been updated to include a Min value
(see Table 23-4)
- Parameter D134 (Erase/Write Cycle Time)
has been updated to include Min and Max
values and the Typ value has been removed
(see Table 23-11)
- Removed parameters OS62 (Internal FRC
Jitter) and OS64 (Internal FRC Drift) and
Note 2 from AC Characteristics (see
Table 23-17)
- Parameter OS63 (Internal FRC Accuracy)
has been expanded to reflect multiple Min
and Max values for different temperatures
(see Table 23-17)
- Updated Min and Max values and Conditions
for parameter SY11 and updated Min, Typ,
and Max values and Conditions for
parameter SY20 (see Table 23-20)
• Additional minor corrections throughout the
document
DS70141E-page 213
dsPIC30F3010/3011
NOTES:
DS70141E-page 214
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
dsPIC30F3010/3011
INDEX
A
C
A/D
C Compilers
MPLAB C18.............................................................. 160
MPLAB C30.............................................................. 160
Center-Aligned PWM .......................................................... 97
CLKOUT and I/O Timing
Characteristics.......................................................... 176
Requirements ........................................................... 176
Code Examples
Data EEPROM Block Erase ....................................... 54
Data EEPROM Block Write ........................................ 56
Data EEPROM Read.................................................. 53
Data EEPROM Word Erase ....................................... 54
Data EEPROM Word Write ........................................ 55
Erasing a Row of Program Memory ........................... 49
Initiating a Programming Sequence ........................... 50
Loading Write Latches ................................................ 50
Code Protection ................................................................ 137
Complementary PWM Operation........................................ 98
Configuring Analog Port Pins.............................................. 60
Control Registers ................................................................ 48
NVMADR .................................................................... 48
NVMADRU ................................................................. 48
NVMCON.................................................................... 48
NVMKEY .................................................................... 48
Core Overview .................................................................... 15
Core Register Map.............................................................. 31
Customer Change Notification Service............................. 220
Customer Notification Service .......................................... 220
Customer Support............................................................. 220
1 Msps Configuration Guideline................................ 130
600 ksps Configuration Guideline ............................. 131
Conversion Rate Parameters.................................... 129
Selecting the Conversion Clock ................................ 128
Voltage Reference Schematic .................................. 130
AC Characteristics ............................................................ 171
Load Conditions ........................................................ 171
AC Temperature and Voltage Specifications .................... 171
ADC
750 ksps Configuration Guideline ............................. 131
Conversion Speeds................................................... 129
Address Generator Units .................................................... 35
Alternate 16-Bit Timer/Counter ........................................... 89
Alternate Vector Table ........................................................ 45
Assembler
MPASM Assembler................................................... 160
Automatic Clock Stretch.................................................... 112
During 10-Bit Addressing (STREN = 1) .................... 112
During 7-Bit Addressing (STREN = 1) ...................... 112
Receive Mode ........................................................... 112
Transmit Mode .......................................................... 112
B
Band Gap Start-up Time
Requirements............................................................ 178
Timing Characteristics .............................................. 178
Barrel Shifter ....................................................................... 22
Bit-Reversed Addressing .................................................... 38
Example ...................................................................... 38
Implementation ........................................................... 38
Modifier Values (table) ................................................ 39
Sequence Table (16-Entry)......................................... 39
Block Diagrams
10-Bit High-Speed ADC Functional .......................... 126
16-Bit Timer1 Module.................................................. 66
16-Bit Timer4 .............................................................. 76
16-Bit Timer5 .............................................................. 77
32-Bit Timer4/5 ........................................................... 75
Dedicated Port Structure............................................. 59
DSP Engine ................................................................ 19
dsPIC30F3010 .............................................................. 9
dsPIC30F3011 .............................................................. 8
External Power-on Reset Circuit............................... 145
I2C............................................................................. 110
Input Capture Mode .................................................... 79
Oscillator System ...................................................... 139
Output Compare Mode ............................................... 83
PWM Module .............................................................. 94
Quadrature Encoder Interface .................................... 87
Reset System............................................................ 143
Shared Port Structure ................................................. 60
SPI ............................................................................ 106
SPI Master/Slave Connection ................................... 106
UART Receiver ......................................................... 118
UART Transmitter ..................................................... 117
BOR Characteristics ......................................................... 170
BOR. See Brown-out Reset.
Brown-out Reset
Timing Requirements................................................ 177
Brown-out Reset (BOR) .................................................... 137
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
D
Data Access from Program Memory Using
Program Space Visibility............................................. 26
Data Accumulators and Adder/Subtracter .......................... 20
Overflow and Saturation ............................................. 20
Data Accumulators and Adder/Subtracter
Data Space Write Saturation ...................................... 22
Round Logic ............................................................... 21
Write Back .................................................................. 21
Data Address Space........................................................... 27
Alignment.................................................................... 30
Alignment (Figure) ...................................................... 30
Effect of Invalid Memory Accesses............................. 30
MCU and DSP (MAC Class)
Instructions Example .......................................... 29
Memory Map......................................................... 27, 28
Near Data Space ........................................................ 31
Software Stack ........................................................... 31
Spaces........................................................................ 30
Width .......................................................................... 30
Data EEPROM Memory...................................................... 53
Erasing ....................................................................... 54
Erasing, Block............................................................. 54
Erasing, Word............................................................. 54
Protection Against Spurious Write.............................. 57
Reading ...................................................................... 53
Write Verify ................................................................. 57
Writing ........................................................................ 55
Writing, Block.............................................................. 56
Writing, Word.............................................................. 55
DS70141E-page 215
dsPIC30F3010/3011
DC Characteristics ............................................................ 163
BOR .......................................................................... 170
Brown-out Reset ....................................................... 169
I/O Pin Output Specifications .................................... 169
Idle Current (IIDLE) .................................................... 166
Operating Current (IDD)............................................. 165
Power-Down Current (IPD) ........................................ 167
Program and EEPROM............................................. 170
Temperature and Voltage Specifications .................. 163
Dead-Time Generators ....................................................... 98
Ranges........................................................................ 98
Development Support ....................................................... 159
Device Configuration
Register Map............................................................. 150
Device Configuration Registers......................................... 148
FBORPOR ................................................................ 148
FGS........................................................................... 148
FOSC ........................................................................ 148
FWDT........................................................................ 148
Device Overview ................................................................... 7
Divide Support..................................................................... 18
DSP Engine......................................................................... 18
Multiplier...................................................................... 20
dsPIC30F3010 PORT Register Map................................... 61
dsPIC30F3011 PORT Register Map................................... 62
Dual Output Compare Match Mode .................................... 84
Continuous Pulse Mode .............................................. 84
Single Pulse Mode ...................................................... 84
E
Edge-Aligned PWM............................................................. 97
Electrical Characteristics................................................... 163
AC ............................................................................. 171
DC ............................................................................. 163
Equations
A/D Conversion Clock ............................................... 128
Baud Rate ................................................................. 121
PWM Period ................................................................ 96
PWM Resolution ......................................................... 96
Serial Clock Rate ...................................................... 114
Errata .................................................................................... 6
Exception Processing
Interrupt Priority .......................................................... 42
Exception Sequence
Trap Sources .............................................................. 43
External Clock Timing Characteristics
Timer1, 2, 3, 4, 5 ....................................................... 179
External Clock Timing Requirements................................ 172
Timer1 ....................................................................... 179
Timer2 and Timer 4................................................... 180
Timer3 and Timer5.................................................... 180
External Interrupt Requests ................................................ 45
F
Fast Context Saving............................................................ 45
Flash Program Memory....................................................... 47
In-Circuit Serial Programming (ICSP) ......................... 47
Run-Time Self-Programming (RTSP) ......................... 47
Table Instruction Operation Summary ........................ 47
I
I/O Pin Specifications
Output ....................................................................... 169
I/O Ports .............................................................................. 59
Parallel I/O (PIO)......................................................... 59
DS70141E-page 216
I2C 10-Bit Slave Mode Operation ..................................... 111
Reception ................................................................. 112
Transmission ............................................................ 112
I2C 7-Bit Slave Mode Operation ....................................... 111
Reception ................................................................. 111
Transmission ............................................................ 111
I2C Master Mode
Baud Rate Generator ............................................... 114
Clock Arbitration ....................................................... 114
Multi-Master Communication, Bus Collision
and Bus Arbitration ........................................... 114
Reception ................................................................. 114
Transmission ............................................................ 113
I2C Module
Addresses................................................................. 111
Bus Data Timing Characteristics
Master Mode..................................................... 192
Slave Mode....................................................... 194
Bus Data Timing Requirements
Master Mode..................................................... 193
Slave Mode....................................................... 194
Bus Start/Stop Bits Timing Characteristics
Master Mode..................................................... 192
Slave Mode....................................................... 194
General Call Address Support .................................. 113
Interrupts .................................................................. 113
IPMI Support............................................................. 113
Master Operation ...................................................... 113
Master Support ......................................................... 113
Operating Function Description ................................ 109
Operation During CPU Sleep and Idle Modes .......... 114
Pin Configuration ...................................................... 109
Programmer’s Model ................................................ 109
Register Map ............................................................ 115
Registers .................................................................. 109
Slope Control ............................................................ 113
Software Controlled Clock Stretching
(STREN = 1) ..................................................... 112
Various Modes.......................................................... 109
Idle Current (IIDLE) ............................................................ 166
In-Circuit Serial Programming (ICSP)............................... 137
Independent PWM Output ................................................ 100
Initialization Condition for RCON
Register Case 1 ........................................................ 146
Initialization Condition for RCON
Register Case 2 ........................................................ 146
Input Capture (CAPx) Timing Characteristics................... 182
Input Capture Interrupts...................................................... 81
Register Map .............................................................. 82
Input Capture Module ......................................................... 79
In CPU Sleep Mode .................................................... 80
Simple Capture Event Mode....................................... 80
Input Capture Timing Requirements................................. 182
Input Change Notification Module....................................... 63
Register Map (Bits 7-0)............................................... 63
Instruction Addressing Modes ............................................ 35
File Register Instructions ............................................ 35
Fundamental Modes Supported ................................. 35
MAC Instructions ........................................................ 36
MCU Instructions ........................................................ 35
Move and Accumulator Instructions............................ 36
Other Instructions ....................................................... 36
Instruction Set Overview................................................... 154
Instruction Set Summary .................................................. 151
Internal Clock Timing Examples ....................................... 174
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
dsPIC30F3010/3011
Internet Address................................................................ 220
Interrupt Controller
Register Map............................................................... 46
Interrupt Priority
Traps........................................................................... 43
Interrupt Sequence ............................................................. 45
Interrupt Stack Frame ................................................. 45
Interrupts ............................................................................. 41
L
Load Conditions ................................................................ 171
M
Memory Organization.......................................................... 23
Microchip Internet Web Site .............................................. 220
Modulo Addressing ............................................................. 36
Applicability ................................................................. 38
Operation Example ..................................................... 37
Start and End Address................................................ 37
W Address Register Selection .................................... 37
Motor Control PWM Module................................................ 93
Fault Timing Characteristics ..................................... 184
Timing Characteristics .............................................. 184
Timing Requirements................................................ 184
MPLAB ASM30 Assembler, Linker, Librarian ................... 160
MPLAB ICD 2 In-Circuit Debugger ................................... 161
MPLAB ICE 2000 High-Performance
Universal In-Circuit Emulator .................................... 161
MPLAB Integrated Development
Environment Software............................................... 159
MPLAB PM3 Device Programmer .................................... 161
MPLAB REAL ICE In-Circuit Emulator System................. 161
MPLINK Object Linker/MPLIB Object Librarian ................ 160
O
OCx/PWM Module Timing Characteristics........................ 183
Operating Current (IDD)..................................................... 165
Oscillator
Operating Modes (Table) .......................................... 138
Oscillator Configurations ................................................... 140
Fail-Safe Clock Monitor............................................. 142
Fast RC (FRC) .......................................................... 141
Initial Clock Source Selection ................................... 140
Low-Power RC (LPRC)............................................. 141
LP Oscillator Control ................................................. 141
Phase Locked Loop (PLL) ........................................ 141
Start-up Timer (OST) ................................................ 140
Oscillator Selection ........................................................... 137
Oscillator Start-up Timer
Timing Characteristics .............................................. 177
Timing Requirements................................................ 177
Output Compare Interrupts ................................................. 85
Output Compare Mode
Register Map............................................................... 86
Output Compare Module..................................................... 83
Timing Characteristics .............................................. 182
Timing Requirements................................................ 182
Output Compare Operation During
CPU Idle Mode............................................................ 85
Output Compare Sleep Mode Operation ............................ 85
P
Packaging ......................................................................... 201
Details ....................................................................... 203
Marking ..................................................................... 201
PICSTART Plus Development Programmer ..................... 162
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
Pinout Descriptions
dsPIC30F3010............................................................ 12
dsPIC30F3011............................................................ 10
PLL Clock Timing Specifications ...................................... 173
POR. See Power-on Reset.
Port Write/Read Example ................................................... 60
Position Measurement Mode .............................................. 89
Power-Down Current (IPD)................................................ 167
Power-on Reset (POR)..................................................... 137
Oscillator Start-up Timer (OST)................................ 137
Power-up Timer (PWRT) .......................................... 137
Power-Saving Modes........................................................ 147
Idle............................................................................ 148
Sleep ........................................................................ 147
Power-Saving Modes (Sleep and Idle) ............................. 137
Power-up Timer
Timing Characteristics .............................................. 177
Timing Requirements ............................................... 177
Program Address Space..................................................... 23
Construction ............................................................... 24
Data Access From Program Memory
Using Table Instructions ..................................... 25
Data Access from, Address Generation ..................... 24
Memory Map............................................................... 23
Table Instructions
TBLRDH ............................................................. 25
TBLRDL.............................................................. 25
TBLWTH............................................................. 25
TBLWTL ............................................................. 25
Program and EEPROM Characteristics............................ 170
Program Counter ................................................................ 16
Program Data Table Access............................................... 26
Program Space Visibility
Window into Program Space Operation ..................... 27
Programmable .................................................................. 137
Programmable Digital Noise Filters .................................... 89
Programmer’s Model .......................................................... 16
Diagram ...................................................................... 17
Programming Operations.................................................... 49
Algorithm for Program Flash....................................... 49
Erasing a Row of Program Memory ........................... 49
Initiating the Programming Sequence ........................ 50
Loading Write Latches ................................................ 50
PWM
Register Map ............................................................ 103
PWM Duty Cycle Comparison Units ................................... 97
Duty Cycle Register Buffers ....................................... 97
PWM Fault Pins ................................................................ 101
Enable Bits ............................................................... 101
Fault States .............................................................. 101
Modes....................................................................... 101
Cycle-by-Cycle ................................................. 101
Latched............................................................. 101
PWM Operation During CPU Idle Mode ........................... 102
PWM Operation During CPU Sleep Mode........................ 102
PWM Output and Polarity Control..................................... 101
Output Pin Control .................................................... 101
PWM Output Override ...................................................... 100
Complementary Output Mode .................................. 100
Synchronization ........................................................ 100
PWM Period........................................................................ 96
PWM Special Event Trigger.............................................. 102
Postscaler................................................................. 102
DS70141E-page 217
dsPIC30F3010/3011
PWM Time Base ................................................................. 95
Continuous Up/Down Count Modes............................ 95
Double-Update Mode .................................................. 96
Free-Running Mode .................................................... 95
Postscaler ................................................................... 96
Prescaler ..................................................................... 96
Single-Shot Mode ....................................................... 95
PWM Update Lockout ....................................................... 102
Q
QEA/QEB Input Characteristics ........................................ 185
QEI Module
External Clock Timing Requirements........................ 181
Index Pulse Timing Characteristics........................... 186
Index Pulse Timing Requirements ............................ 186
Operation During CPU Idle Mode ............................... 90
Operation During CPU Sleep Mode ............................ 89
Register Map............................................................... 91
Timer Operation During CPU Idle Mode ..................... 90
Timer Operation During CPU Sleep Mode.................. 89
Quadrature Decoder Timing Requirements ...................... 185
Quadrature Encoder Interface (QEI) Module ...................... 87
Quadrature Encoder Interface Interrupts ............................ 90
Quadrature Encoder Interface Logic ................................... 88
R
Reader Response ............................................................. 221
Reset......................................................................... 137, 143
Reset Sequence.................................................................. 43
Reset Sources ............................................................ 43
Reset Timing Characteristics ............................................ 177
Reset Timing Requirements.............................................. 177
Resets
BOR, Programmable................................................. 145
POR .......................................................................... 143
POR with Long Crystal Start-up Time ....................... 145
POR, Operating without FSCM and PWRT .............. 145
Revision History ................................................................ 213
S
Simple Capture Event Mode
Capture Buffer Operation ............................................ 80
Capture Prescaler ....................................................... 80
Hall Sensor Mode ....................................................... 80
Input Capture in CPU Idle Mode ................................. 81
Timer2 and Timer3 Selection Mode ............................ 80
Simple OCx/PWM Mode Timing Requirements ................ 183
Simple Output Compare Match Mode................................. 84
Simple PWM Mode ............................................................. 84
Input Pin Fault Protection............................................ 84
Period.......................................................................... 85
Single Pulse PWM Operation............................................ 100
Software Simulator (MPLAB SIM)..................................... 160
Software Stack Pointer, Frame Pointer............................... 16
CALL Stack Frame...................................................... 31
SPI Mode
Slave Select Synchronization ................................... 107
SPI1 Register Map .................................................... 108
SPI Module........................................................................ 105
Framed SPI Support ................................................. 106
Operating Function Description ................................ 105
SDOx Disable ........................................................... 105
Timing Characteristics
Master Mode (CKE = 0) .................................... 187
Master Mode (CKE = 1) .................................... 188
Slave Mode (CKE = 1) .............................. 189, 190
DS70141E-page 218
Timing Requirements
Master Mode (CKE = 0).................................... 187
Master Mode (CKE = 1).................................... 188
Slave Mode (CKE = 0)...................................... 189
Slave Mode (CKE = 1)...................................... 191
Word and Byte Communication ................................ 105
SPI Operation During CPU Idle Mode .............................. 107
SPI Operation During CPU Sleep Mode........................... 107
STATUS Register ............................................................... 16
Symbols Used in Opcode Descriptions ............................ 152
System Integration............................................................ 137
Overview................................................................... 137
Register Map ............................................................ 150
T
Temperature and Voltage Specifications
AC............................................................................. 171
DC ............................................................................ 163
Timer1 Module.................................................................... 65
16-Bit Asynchronous Counter Mode........................... 65
16-Bit Synchronous Counter Mode............................. 65
16-Bit Timer Mode ...................................................... 65
Gate Operation ........................................................... 66
Interrupt ...................................................................... 67
Operation During Sleep Mode .................................... 66
Prescaler .................................................................... 66
Real-Time Clock ......................................................... 67
RTC Interrupts .................................................... 67
RTC Oscillator Operation ................................... 67
Register Map .............................................................. 68
Timer2 and Timer3 Selection Mode.................................... 84
Timer2/3 Module................................................................. 69
32-Bit Synchronous Counter Mode............................. 69
32-Bit Timer Mode ...................................................... 69
ADC Event Trigger...................................................... 72
Gate Operation ........................................................... 72
Interrupt ...................................................................... 72
Operation During Sleep Mode .................................... 72
Register Map .............................................................. 73
Timer Prescaler .......................................................... 72
Timer4/5 Module................................................................. 75
Register Map .............................................................. 78
TimerQ (QEI Module) External Clock
Timing Characteristics .............................................. 181
Timing Characteristics
SPI Module
Slave Mode (CKE = 0)...................................... 189
Timing Diagrams
A/D Conversion
10-Bit High-speed (CHPS = 01,
SIMSAM = 0, ASAM = 1, SSRC = 111,
SAMC = 00001)........................................ 199
ADC Conversion
10-Bit High-speed (CHPS = 01,
SIMSAM = 0, ASAM = 0,
SSRC = 000) ............................................ 198
Band Gap Start-up Time........................................... 178
Center Aligned PWM .................................................. 97
CLKOUT and I/O ...................................................... 176
Dead Time .................................................................. 99
Edge-Aligned PWM .................................................... 97
External Clock........................................................... 171
I2C Bus Data
Master Mode..................................................... 192
Slave Mode....................................................... 194
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
dsPIC30F3010/3011
I2C Bus Start/Stop Bits
Master Mode ..................................................... 192
Slave Mode ....................................................... 194
Input Capture (CAPx)................................................ 182
Motor Control PWM Module...................................... 184
Motor Control PWM Module Fault............................. 184
OCx/PWM Module .................................................... 183
Oscillator Start-up Timer ........................................... 177
Output Compare Module........................................... 182
PWM Output ............................................................... 85
QEA/QEB Inputs ....................................................... 185
QEI Module Index Pulse ........................................... 186
Reset......................................................................... 177
SPI Module
Master Mode (CKE = 0) .................................... 187
Master Mode (CKE = 1) .................................... 188
Slave Mode (CKE = 1) ...................................... 190
Time-out Sequence on Power-up
(MCLR Not Tied to VDD), Case 1...................... 144
Time-out Sequence on Power-up
(MCLR Not Tied to VDD), Case 2...................... 144
Time-out Sequence on Power-up
(MCLR Tied to VDD).......................................... 144
Timer1, 2, 3, 4, 5 External Clock............................... 179
TimerQ (QEI Module) External Clock ....................... 181
Timing Diagrams and Specifications
DC Characteristics - Internal
RC Accuracy ..................................................... 174
Timing Diagrams.See Timing Characteristics.
Timing Requirements
A/D Conversion
10-Bit High-Speed ............................................ 200
Band Gap Start-up Time ........................................... 178
Brown-out Reset ....................................................... 177
CLKOUT and I/O....................................................... 176
External Clock........................................................... 172
I2C Bus Data (Master Mode)..................................... 193
I2C Bus Data (Slave Mode)....................................... 194
Input Capture ............................................................ 182
Motor Control PWM Module...................................... 184
Oscillator Start-up Timer ........................................... 177
Output Compare Module........................................... 182
Power-up Timer ........................................................ 177
QEI Module
External Clock................................................... 181
Index Pulse ....................................................... 186
Quadrature Decoder ................................................. 185
Reset......................................................................... 177
Simple OCx/PWM Mode ........................................... 183
SPI Module
Master Mode (CKE = 0) .................................... 187
Master Mode (CKE = 1) .................................... 188
Slave Mode (CKE = 0) ...................................... 189
Slave Mode (CKE = 1) ...................................... 191
Timer1 External Clock............................................... 179
Timer3 and Timer5 External Clock ........................... 180
Watchdog Timer........................................................ 177
Timing Specifications
PLL Clock.................................................................. 173
Trap Vectors ....................................................................... 44
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
U
UART
Address Detect Mode ............................................... 121
Auto Baud Support ................................................... 122
Baud Rate Generator ............................................... 121
Enabling and Setting Up UART ................................ 119
Alternate I/O ..................................................... 119
Disabling........................................................... 119
Enabling ........................................................... 119
Setting Up Data, Parity and
Stop Bit Selections ................................... 119
Loopback Mode ........................................................ 121
Module Overview...................................................... 117
Operation During CPU Sleep and Idle Modes.......... 122
Receiving Data ......................................................... 120
In 8-Bit or 9-Bit Data Mode ............................... 120
Interrupt ............................................................ 120
Receive Buffer (UxRXB)................................... 120
Reception Error Handling ......................................... 120
Framing Error (FERR) ...................................... 121
Idle Status ........................................................ 121
Parity Error (PERR) .......................................... 121
Receive Break .................................................. 121
Receive Buffer Overrun Error
(OERR Bit) ............................................... 120
Transmitting Data ..................................................... 119
In 8-Bit Data Mode............................................ 119
In 9-Bit Data Mode............................................ 119
Interrupt ............................................................ 120
Transmit Buffer (UxTXB) .................................. 119
UART1 Register Map ............................................... 123
UART2 Register Map ............................................... 123
Unit ID Locations .............................................................. 137
Universal Asynchronous Receiver
Transmitter Module (UART) ..................................... 117
W
Wake-up from Sleep ......................................................... 137
Wake-up from Sleep and Idle ............................................. 45
Watchdog Timer
Timing Characteristics .............................................. 177
Timing Requirements ............................................... 177
Watchdog Timer (WDT)............................................ 137, 147
Enabling and Disabling............................................. 147
Operation.................................................................. 147
WWW Address ................................................................. 220
WWW, On-Line Support ....................................................... 6
DS70141E-page 219
dsPIC30F3010/3011
NOTES:
DS70141E-page 220
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
dsPIC30F3010/3011
THE MICROCHIP WEB SITE
CUSTOMER SUPPORT
Microchip provides online support via our WWW site at
www.microchip.com. This web site is used as a means
to make files and information easily available to
customers. Accessible by using your favorite Internet
browser, the web site contains the following
information:
Users of Microchip products can receive assistance
through several channels:
• Product Support – Data sheets and errata,
application notes and sample programs, design
resources, user’s guides and hardware support
documents, latest software releases and archived
software
• General Technical Support – Frequently Asked
Questions (FAQ), technical support requests,
online discussion groups, Microchip consultant
program member listing
• Business of Microchip – Product selector and
ordering guides, latest Microchip press releases,
listing of seminars and events, listings of
Microchip sales offices, distributors and factory
representatives
•
•
•
•
•
Distributor or Representative
Local Sales Office
Field Application Engineer (FAE)
Technical Support
Development Systems Information Line
Customers
should
contact
their
distributor,
representative or field application engineer (FAE) for
support. Local sales offices are also available to help
customers. A listing of sales offices and locations is
included in the back of this document.
Technical support is available through the web site
at: http://support.microchip.com
CUSTOMER CHANGE NOTIFICATION
SERVICE
Microchip’s customer notification service helps keep
customers current on Microchip products. Subscribers
will receive e-mail notification whenever there are
changes, updates, revisions or errata related to a
specified product family or development tool of interest.
To register, access the Microchip web site at
www.microchip.com, click on Customer Change
Notification and follow the registration instructions.
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70141E-page 221
dsPIC30F3010/3011
READER RESPONSE
It is our intention to provide you with the best documentation possible to ensure successful use of your Microchip product. If you wish to provide your comments on organization, clarity, subject matter, and ways in which our documentation
can better serve you, please FAX your comments to the Technical Publications Manager at (480) 792-4150.
Please list the following information, and use this outline to provide us with your comments about this document.
To:
Technical Publications Manager
RE:
Reader Response
Total Pages Sent ________
From: Name
Company
Address
City / State / ZIP / Country
Telephone: (_______) _________ - _________
FAX: (______) _________ - _________
Application (optional):
Would you like a reply?
Y
Device: dsPIC30F3010/3011
N
Literature Number: DS70141E
Questions:
1. What are the best features of this document?
2. How does this document meet your hardware and software development needs?
3. Do you find the organization of this document easy to follow? If not, why?
4. What additions to the document do you think would enhance the structure and subject?
5. What deletions from the document could be made without affecting the overall usefulness?
6. Is there any incorrect or misleading information (what and where)?
7. How would you improve this document?
DS70141E-page 222
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
dsPIC30F3010/3011
PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION SYSTEM
To order or obtain information, e.g., on pricing or delivery, refer to the factory or the listed sales office.
d s P I C 3 0 F 3 0 1 0 AT - 3 0 I / P F - 0 0 0
Custom ID (3 digits) or
Engineering Sample (ES)
Trademark
Architecture
Package
PT = TQFP 10x10
PT = TQFP 12x12
P = DIP
SO = SOIC
SP = SPDIP
ML = QFN 6x6 or 8x8
S = Die (Waffle Pack)
W = Die (Wafers)
Flash
Memory Size in Bytes
0 = ROMless
1 = 1K to 6K
2 = 7K to 12K
3 = 13K to 24K
4 = 25K to 48K
5 = 49K to 96K
6 = 97K to 192K
7 = 193K to 384K
8 = 385K to 768K
9 = 769K and Up
Temperature
I = Industrial -40°C to +85°C
E = Extended High Temp -40°C to +125°C
Device ID
Speed
20 = 20 MIPS
30 = 30 MIPS
T = Tape and Reel
A,B,C… = Revision Level
Example:
dsPIC30F3010AT-30I/PT = 30 MIPS, Industrial temp., TQFP package, Rev. A
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70141E-page 223
Worldwide Sales and Service
AMERICAS
ASIA/PACIFIC
ASIA/PACIFIC
EUROPE
Corporate Office
2355 West Chandler Blvd.
Chandler, AZ 85224-6199
Tel: 480-792-7200
Fax: 480-792-7277
Technical Support:
http://support.microchip.com
Web Address:
www.microchip.com
Asia Pacific Office
Suites 3707-14, 37th Floor
Tower 6, The Gateway
Harbour City, Kowloon
Hong Kong
Tel: 852-2401-1200
Fax: 852-2401-3431
India - Bangalore
Tel: 91-80-4182-8400
Fax: 91-80-4182-8422
India - New Delhi
Tel: 91-11-4160-8631
Fax: 91-11-4160-8632
Austria - Wels
Tel: 43-7242-2244-39
Fax: 43-7242-2244-393
Denmark - Copenhagen
Tel: 45-4450-2828
Fax: 45-4485-2829
India - Pune
Tel: 91-20-2566-1512
Fax: 91-20-2566-1513
France - Paris
Tel: 33-1-69-53-63-20
Fax: 33-1-69-30-90-79
Japan - Yokohama
Tel: 81-45-471- 6166
Fax: 81-45-471-6122
Germany - Munich
Tel: 49-89-627-144-0
Fax: 49-89-627-144-44
Atlanta
Duluth, GA
Tel: 678-957-9614
Fax: 678-957-1455
Boston
Westborough, MA
Tel: 774-760-0087
Fax: 774-760-0088
Chicago
Itasca, IL
Tel: 630-285-0071
Fax: 630-285-0075
Dallas
Addison, TX
Tel: 972-818-7423
Fax: 972-818-2924
Detroit
Farmington Hills, MI
Tel: 248-538-2250
Fax: 248-538-2260
Kokomo
Kokomo, IN
Tel: 765-864-8360
Fax: 765-864-8387
Los Angeles
Mission Viejo, CA
Tel: 949-462-9523
Fax: 949-462-9608
Santa Clara
Santa Clara, CA
Tel: 408-961-6444
Fax: 408-961-6445
Toronto
Mississauga, Ontario,
Canada
Tel: 905-673-0699
Fax: 905-673-6509
Australia - Sydney
Tel: 61-2-9868-6733
Fax: 61-2-9868-6755
China - Beijing
Tel: 86-10-8528-2100
Fax: 86-10-8528-2104
China - Chengdu
Tel: 86-28-8665-5511
Fax: 86-28-8665-7889
Korea - Daegu
Tel: 82-53-744-4301
Fax: 82-53-744-4302
China - Hong Kong SAR
Tel: 852-2401-1200
Fax: 852-2401-3431
Korea - Seoul
Tel: 82-2-554-7200
Fax: 82-2-558-5932 or
82-2-558-5934
China - Nanjing
Tel: 86-25-8473-2460
Fax: 86-25-8473-2470
Malaysia - Kuala Lumpur
Tel: 60-3-6201-9857
Fax: 60-3-6201-9859
China - Qingdao
Tel: 86-532-8502-7355
Fax: 86-532-8502-7205
Malaysia - Penang
Tel: 60-4-227-8870
Fax: 60-4-227-4068
China - Shanghai
Tel: 86-21-5407-5533
Fax: 86-21-5407-5066
Philippines - Manila
Tel: 63-2-634-9065
Fax: 63-2-634-9069
China - Shenyang
Tel: 86-24-2334-2829
Fax: 86-24-2334-2393
Singapore
Tel: 65-6334-8870
Fax: 65-6334-8850
China - Shenzhen
Tel: 86-755-8203-2660
Fax: 86-755-8203-1760
Taiwan - Hsin Chu
Tel: 886-3-572-9526
Fax: 886-3-572-6459
China - Wuhan
Tel: 86-27-5980-5300
Fax: 86-27-5980-5118
Taiwan - Kaohsiung
Tel: 886-7-536-4818
Fax: 886-7-536-4803
China - Xiamen
Tel: 86-592-2388138
Fax: 86-592-2388130
Taiwan - Taipei
Tel: 886-2-2500-6610
Fax: 886-2-2508-0102
China - Xian
Tel: 86-29-8833-7252
Fax: 86-29-8833-7256
Thailand - Bangkok
Tel: 66-2-694-1351
Fax: 66-2-694-1350
Italy - Milan
Tel: 39-0331-742611
Fax: 39-0331-466781
Netherlands - Drunen
Tel: 31-416-690399
Fax: 31-416-690340
Spain - Madrid
Tel: 34-91-708-08-90
Fax: 34-91-708-08-91
UK - Wokingham
Tel: 44-118-921-5869
Fax: 44-118-921-5820
China - Zhuhai
Tel: 86-756-3210040
Fax: 86-756-3210049
01/02/08
DS70141E-page 224
© 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.